TM-55-1500-345-23

TM-55-1500-345-23
TM 55-1500-345-23
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
This publication supersedes TB 746-93-2 10 August 1978, including all changes
HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
12 JUNE 1986
TM 55-1500-345-23
An operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not correctly followed, could result in personnel
injury or loss of life.
An operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or
destruction of equipment.
NOTE
An operating procedure, condition etc., which it is essential to highlight.
PRECAUTIONARY DATA
Personnel performing instructions involving operations, procedures, and practices which are included or implied
in this technical manual shall observe the following instructions. Disregard of these warnings and precautionary
information can cause serious injury, death or an aborted mission.
USING SOLVENT/PAINTS
Standard precautions such as .re prevention and adequate ventilation shall be exercised when using solvents or
applying primer and coating.
ELECTRICAL WIRING
Disconnect all electrical wiring before removing any part of aircraft.
ACETONE, ASTM-D329
Acetone is extremely flammable an toxic to eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. Wear protective gloves and goggles/face shield. Avoid repeated or prolonged contact. Use only in well ventilated areas (or use approved respirator
as determined by local safety/industrial hygiene personnel). Keep away from open flames, sparks, hot surfaces or
other sources of ignition.
ALIPHATIC NAPHTHA, TT-N-95
Aliphatic Naphtha is extremely flammable an toxic to eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. Wear protective gloves and
goggles/face shield. Avoid repeated or prolonged contact. Use only in well ventilated areas (or use approved respirator as determined by local safety/industrial hygiene personnel). Keep away from open flames, sparks, hot surfaces
or other sources of ignition.
Change 12
a/(b Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
C 12
CHANGE
HEADQUATERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C.,1 January 2011
NO. 12
PAINTING AND MARKING OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 55-1500-345-23, dated 12 June 1986, is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar
in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
a/(b Blank)
A through C/(D blank)
i and iv
1-1 through 1-3/(1-4 blank)
2-3 and 2-4
3-3 through 3-18
3-29/(3-30 blank)
4-1 through 4-6
5-1 through 5-4
6-1 through 6-14
6-14.1 and 6-14.2
6-15 through 6-22
7-1 through 7-4
7-7 and 7-8
7-11 and 7-12
8-1 through 8-8
8-17 through 8-20
9-1 through 9-12
9-13 and 9-14
9-30.1 and 9-30.2
9-31 through 9-34
9-43 and 9-44
9-47 through 9-50
9-55 and 9-58
9-67 and 9-68
9-71 through 9-86
9-87 through 9-100
9-101 and 9-102
9-103 to 9-108
9-109 and 9-110
9-115 through 9-124
9-127 and 9-128
9-129 through 9-176
9-176.1/(9-176.2 blank)
9-177 through 9-180
9-185 through 9-192
9-195 through 9-200
9-200.1 and 9-200.2
10-1 and 10-2
10-23 and 10-24
10-25 through 10-54
10-55 through 10-64
a/(b blank)
A and B
i and iv
1-1 through 1-3/(1-4 blank)
2-3 and 2-4
3-3 through 3-18
3-29/(3-30 blank)
4-1 through 4-6
5-1 through 5-4
6-1 through 6-14
6-14.1 and 6-14.2
6-15 through 6-22
7-1 through 7-4
7-7 and 7-8
7-11 and 7-12
8-1 through 8-8
8-17 through 8-20
9-1/(9-2 blank)
9-13 and 9-14
9-30.1 and 9-30.2
9-31 through 9-34
9-43 and 9-44
9-47 through 9-50
9-55 and 9-58
9-67 and 9-68
9-71 through 9-85/(9-86 blank)
----9-101/(9-102 blank)
----9-109 and 9-110
9-115 through 9-124
9-127 and 9-128
--------9-177 through 9-180
9-185 through 9-192
9-195 through 9-200
9-200.1 and 9-200.2
10-1 and 10-2
10-23 and 10-24
10-31/(10-32 blank)
10-55/(10-56 blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
C 12
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
10-65
10-67
10-77
10-89
10-95
10-65/(10-66 blank)
10-67/(10-68 blank)
10-77/(10-78 blank)
10-89 through 10-92
10-95 and 10-96
and 10-66
through 10-76
through 10-88
through 10-92
and 10-96
2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
32708
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN) 11338
requirements for TM 55-1500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C 11
CHANGE
NO.
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 9 February 2006
11
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF
ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 55-1500-345-23, dated 12 June 1986, is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical
bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointin g hand.
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
a/(b blank)
A through C/(D blank)
i and ii
2-7 and 2-8
3-15 through 3-18
8-1 through 8-8.1/(8-8.2 blank)
9-53 and 9-54
9-67 through 9-84
10-63/(10-64 blank)
a/(b blank)
A through C/(D blank)
i and ii
2-7/(2- 8 blank)
3-15 through 3-18
8-1 through 8-8
9-53 and 9-54
9-67 through 9-84
10-63/(10-64 blank)
2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
TM 1-1500-345-23
C11
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
PETER J. SCHOOMAKER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
SANDRA R. RILEY
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0602304
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with Initial Distribution Number (IDN) 311338 requirements for
TM 55-1500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C10
CHANGE
NO. 10
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 26 JANUARY 2004
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 55-1500-345-23, dated 12 June 1986 , is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar
in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove pages
Insert pages
A through C/(D blank)
1-1 and 1-2
2-7 and 2-8
4-3 and 4-4
(10-55 blank)/10-56
10-57 through 10-62
10-63 through 10-66
A through C/(D blank)
1-1 and 1-2
2-7 and 2-8
4-3 and 4-4
10-55/(10-56 blank)
-----10-63/(10-64 blank)
2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
PETER J. SCHOOMAKER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
JOEL B. HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0334403
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with Initial Distribution Number (IDN) 311338, requirements for
TM 55-1500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C9
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, DC 19 July 2002
CHANGE
NO. 9
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 55-1500-345-23, 12 June 1986, is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical
bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
a/(b blank)
a/(b blank)
A through C/(D blank)
v through xi/(xii blank)
v through xi/(xii blank)
1-1 and 1-2
3-15 and 3-16
6-5 through 6-12
7-1 through 7-4
7-5 through 7-10
8-1 and 8-2
8-29 through 8-30
8-31 through 8-36
9-175 and 9-176
1-1 and 1-2
3-15 and 3-16
6-5 through 6-12
7-1 through 7-4
7-6 through 7-10
8-1 and 8-2
8-29 through 8-30
8-31 through 8-36
9-175 and 9-176
9-181 and 9-182
9-181 and 9-182
9-200.1 and 9-200.2
9-200.1 and 9-200.2
10-1 through 10-54
10-55 and 10-56
10-65 through 10-88
10-1 through 10-25
(10-55 blank)/10-56
10 -65 through 10-66
2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C9
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
ERIC K. SHINSEKI
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
JOEL B. HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0212807
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with Initial Distribution Number (IDN) 311338, requirements
for TM 55-1500-0345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C8
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, DC 30 December 1998
CHANGE
NO. 8
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 55-1500-345-23, 12 June 1986, is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical
bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
a/(b blank)
a/(b blank)
i and ii
i and ii
2-1 and 2-2
2-1 and 2-2
2-5 through 2-8
2-5 through 2-8
3-15 through 3-18
3-15 through 3-18
3-29/(3-30 blank)
3-29/(3-30 blank)
4-3 and 4-4
4-3 and 4-4
6-1 and 6-2
6-1 and 6-2
6-13 and 6-14
6-13 and 6-14
6-17 and 6-18
6-17 and 6-18
8-5 through 8-8
8-5 through 8-8
9-7 and 9-8
9-7 and 9-8
9-111 and 9-112
9-111 and 9-112
9-123 and 9-124
9-123 and 9-124
9-161 through 9-176
9-161 through 9-176
9-176.1/(9-176.2 blank)
2.
Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C8
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
By Order Of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
DENNIS J. REIMER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
05283
DISTRIBUTION: To be distributed in accordance with Initial Distribution No. (IDN) 311338, requirements
for TM 55-1500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C7
CHANGE
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 20 September 1996
NO.7
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 55150034523, 12 June 1986, is changed as follows:
1.
2.
Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar in the
margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove pages
Insert pages
i and ii
1-1 and 1-2
2-1 and 2-2
3-3 and 3-4
--------8-1 and 8-2
9-21 and 9-22
9-29 and 9-30
-------------9-31 and 9-32
9-32.1/(9-32.2 blank)
9-115 and 9-116
9-119 and 9-120
9-163 and 9-164
9-185 through 9-192
9-197 through 9-200.2
i and ii
1-1 and 1-2
2-1 and 2-2
3-3 and 3-4
3-29/(3-30 blank)
8-1 and 8-2
9-21 and 9-22
9-29 and 9-30
9-30.1/(9-30.2 blank)
9-31 and 9-32
---------------9-115 and 9-116
9-119 and 9-120
9-163 and 9-164
9-185 through 9-192
9-197 through 9-200.2
Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C7
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
DENNIS J. REIMER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
JOELB.HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
02988
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 1231E, block no. 1338, requirements for TM 551500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C6
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 28 February 1995
CHANGE
NO. 6
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited
TM 55-1500-345-23, 12 June 1986, is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar
in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove pages
Insert pages
i and ii
i and ii
3-3 and 3-4
3-3 and 3-4
3-17 and 3-18
3-17 and 3-18
6-3 and 6-4
6-3 and 6-4
6-13 and 6-14
6-13 and 6-14
8-7 and 8-8
8-7 and 8-8
9-3 and 9-4
9-3 and 9-4
9-9 and 9-10
9-9 and 9-10
9-13 through 9-30
------------
9-13 through 9-30
9-31 and 9-32
9-31 and 9-32
9-191 and 9-192
9-191 and 9-192
9-189 and 9-200
9-199 and 9-200
9-30.1/(9-30.2
2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
C6
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
GORDON R. SULLIVAN
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
MILTON H. HAMILTON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25-E, block no. 1338, requirements for
TM 55-1500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C5
CHANGE
NO.
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 4 April 1994
5
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
TM 55-1500-345-23,12 June 1986, is changed as follows
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar
in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove pages
Insert pages
i and ii
ix and x
1-1 and 1-2
6-17 and 6-18
7-11 and 7-12
7-19 and 7-20
-----------9-1 through 9-12
9-15 and 9-16
9-27 and 9-28
9-31 and 9-32
9-67 and 9-68
9-71 through 9-80
9-103 through 9-106
9-111 through 9-124
9-137 through 9-142
9-157 through 9-164
9-167 through 9-176
9-181 through 9-200
------- ------- -10-23 and 10-24
10-49 and 10-50
10-61 and 10-62
10-65 and 10-66
10-87 and 10-88
10-111 and 10-112
i and ii
ix and x
1-1 and 1-2
6-17 and 6-18
7-11 and 7-12
7-19 and 7-20
7-29/(7-30 blank)
9-1 through 9-12
9-15 and 9-16
9-27 and 9-28
9-31 and 9-32
9-67 and 9-68
9-71 through 9-80
9-103 through 9-106
9-111 through 9-124
9-137 through 9-142
9-157 through 9-164
9-167 through 9-176
9-181 through 9-200
9-200.1 and 9-200.2
10-23 and 10-24
10-49 and 10-50
10-61 and 10-62
10-65 and 10-66
10-87 and 10-88
10-111 and 10-112
TM
55-1500-345-23
C5
2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
GORDON R. SULLIVAN
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
MILTON H. HAMILTON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
06573
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25-E, block no. 1338, requirements for
TM 55-1500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C 4
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 28 February 1991
CHANGE
NO.
4
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
TM 55-1500-345-23, 12 June 1986, is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below.
New or changed text material
is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated
by a miniature pointing hand.
2.
Remove pages
Insert pages
i through iv
2-1 through 2-8
3-1 through 3-4
5-3 and 5-4
6-1 and 6-2
6-7 through 6-10
6-13 and 6-14
6-14.1/6-14.2
6-15 and 6-16
7-9 and 7-10
8-1 and 8-2
9-111 and 9-112
9-115 and 9-116
9-121 through 9-124
9-131 through 9-134
9-159 and 9-160
9-167 and 9-168
9-171 and 9-172
9-177 through 9-180
2028’s and Envelopes
i through iv
2-1 through 2-8
3-1 through 3-4
5-3 and 5-4
6-1 and 6-2
6-7 through 6-10
6-13 and 6-14
6-14.1 and 6-14.2
6-15 and 6-16
7-9 and 7-10
8-1 and 8-2
9-111 and 9-112
9-115 and 9-116
9-121 through 9-124
9-131 through 9-134
9-159 and 9-160
9-167 and 9-168
9-171 and 9-172
9-177 through 9-180
2028’s and Envelopes
Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
By Order of theSecretary of the Army:
Official:
CARL E. VUONO
General, UnitedStates Army
Chief of Staff
THOMAS F. SIKORA
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-31-E, block no. 1338, AVUM and
AVIM maintenance requirements for TM 55-1500-345-23.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C 3
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 09 November 1989
Change
NO.
3
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
TM 55-1500-345-23, 12 June 1986 is changed as follows:
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below.
New or changed text material
is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated
by a miniature pointing hand.
2.
Remove pages
Insert pages
7-7 and 7-8
7-15 through 7-20
7-27 and 7-28
8-7 and 8-8
9-171 and 9-172
7-7 and 7-8
7-15 through 7-20
7-27/7-28
8-7 and 8-8
9-171 and 9-172
Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
By Order of theSecretary of the Army:
Official:
CARL E. VUONO
GeneraI, United States Army
CbiefofStaff
WILLIAM J. MEEHAN II
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-31, AVUM and AVIM Maintenance
requirements for All Fixed and Rotary Wing Aircraft.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C2
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 14 August 1989
Change
NO.
2
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
TM 55-1500-345-23, 12 June 1986 is changed as follows:
New or changed text material
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below.
is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated
by a miniature pointing hand.
2.
Remove pages
Insert pages
1-1 and 1-2
2-3 and 2-4
5-1 and 5-2
6-13 and 6-14
6-19 and 6-20
7-1 and 7-2
8-1 and 8-2
8-3 and 8-4
9-129 and 9-130
9-161 through 9-164
9-171 and 9-172
9-193 and 9-194
1-1 and 1-2
2-3 and 2-4
5-1 and 5-2
6-13 and 6-14
6-14.1/6-14.2
6-19 and 6-20
7-1 and 7-2
8-1 and 8-2
8-3 and 8-4
9-129 and 9-130
9-161 through 9-164
9-171 and 9-172
9-193 and 9-194
Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
CARL E. VUONO
GeneraI, United States Army
Chief of Staff
WILLIAMJ.MEEHAN II
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-31, AVUM and AVIM Maintenance
requirements for All Fixed and Rotary Wing Aircraft.
TM 55-1500-345-23
C1
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 1 July 1988
CHANGE
NO.
1
PAINTING AND MARKING
OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
TM 55-1500-345-23, 12 June 1986 is changed as follows:
New or changed text material
1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below.
is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated
by a miniature pointing hand.
Remove pages
Insert pages
a/b
i and ii
v through x
xi/xii
1-1 and 1-2
1-3/1-4
2-7 and 2-8
3-1 through 3-4
3-5 through 3-8
3-13 through 3-16
4-1 and 4-2
5-3 and 5-4
6-1 and 6-2
6-13 through 6-16
6-19 through 6-22
7-1 through 7-4
7-7 through 7-28
8-5 through 8-8
-
a/b
i and ii
v through x
xi/xii
1-1 and 1-2
1-3/1-4
2-7 and 2-8
3-1 through 3-4
3-4.1/3-4.2
3-5 through 3-8
3-13 through 3-16
4-1 and 4-2
5-3 and 5-4
6-1 and 6-2
6-13 through 6-16
6-19 through 6-22
6-22.1/6-22.2
7-1 through 7-4
7-7 through 7-28
8-5 through 8-8
8-8.1/8-8.2
8-23 and 8-24
8-24.1/8-24.2
8-25 and 8-26
9-1 through 9-8
9-11 through 9-14
9-25 and 9-26
9-33 and 9-34
9-67 and 9-68
9-85 and 9-86
8-23 and 8-24
8-25 and 8-26
9-1 through 9-8
9-11 through 9-14
9-25 and 9-26
9-33 and 9-34
9-67 and 9-68
9-85 and 9-86
TM 55-1500-345-23
C1
2.
Remove pages
Insert pages
9-101 and 9-102
9-109 through 9-112
9-115 through 9-122
9-127 through 9-148
9-153 through 9-172
9-175 through 9-180
9-185 and 9-186
9-195 and 9-196
10-23 and 10-24
10-39 and 10-40
10-83 and 10-84
10-111 and 10-112
9-101 and 9-102
9-109 through 9-112
9-115 through 9-122
9-127 through 9-148
9-153 through 9-172
9-175 through 9-180
9-185 and 9-186
9-195 and 9-196
10-23 and 10-24
10-39 and 10-40
10-83 and 10-84
10-111 and 10-112
Retain these sheets in front of manual for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
WILLIAM J. MEEHAN II
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-31-R, AVUM and AVIM requirements
for All Fixed and Rotary Wing Aircraft.
TM 55-1500-345-23
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES
NOTE: The portion of text affected by the changes is indicated by a vertical line in the outer margins of the page.
Changes to illustrations are indicated by miniature pointing hands. Changes to wiring diagrams are indicated by
shaded areas.
Date of issue for the original manual is:
Original .......................... 18 June 1986
Change 1 ....................... 1 July 1988
Change 2 ....................... 14 August 1989
Change 3 ....................... 9 November 1989
Change 4 ....................... 28 February 1991
Change 5 ....................... 4 April 1994
Change 6 ................................ 28 February 1995
Change 7 ................................ 20 September 1996
Change 8 ................................ 30 December 1998
Change 9 ................................ 19 July 2002
Change 10 .............................. 26 January 2004
Change 11 .............................. 9 February 2006
Change 12 .............................. 10 January 2011
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 18 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF WORK
PACKAGES IS 37 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page/WP No.
*Change No.
Cover .......................................................... 0
Blank .......................................................... 0
a ................................................................. 12
b blank ........................................................ 12
A and B....................................................... 12
C Deleted ................................................... 12
D blank Deleted .......................................... 12
i thru iv ........................................................ 12
v through xi Deleted ................................... 12
xii blank Deleted ......................................... 12
1-1 through 1-3 ........................................... 12
1-4 blank..................................................... 12
2-1 .............................................................. 7
2-2 .............................................................. 8
2-3 and 2-4 ................................................. 12
2-5 and 2-6 ................................................. 8
2-7 .............................................................. 11
2-8 blank..................................................... 11
3-1 .............................................................. 0
3-2 .............................................................. 4
3-3 .............................................................. 0
3-4 .............................................................. 12
3-4.1 ........................................................... 1
3-4.2 blank ................................................. 1
3-5 and 3-6 ................................................. 12
3-7 .............................................................. 1
3-8 and 3-9 ................................................. 12
3-10 ............................................................ 0
3-11 through 3-17....................................... 12
3-18 through 3-27....................................... 0
3-28 blank................................................... 0
3-29 ............................................................ 12
3-30 blank................................................... 12
4-1 through 4-6 ........................................... 12
Page/WP No.
*Change No.
5-1 .............................................................. 2
5-2 and 5-3 ................................................. 12
5-4 .............................................................. 0
6-1 through 6-13 ......................................... 12
6-14 ............................................................ 8
6-14.1 ......................................................... 12
6-14.2 ......................................................... 4
6-15 through 6-19 ....................................... 12
6-20 ............................................................ 0
6-21 and 6-22 ............................................. 12
6-22.1 ......................................................... 1
6-22.2 blank ................................................ 1
6-23 ............................................................ 0
6-24 blank ................................................... 0
7-1 .............................................................. 12
7-2 .............................................................. 9
7-3 and 7-4 ................................................. 12
7-5 blank ..................................................... 9
7-6 .............................................................. 9
7-7 and 7-8 ................................................. 12
7-9 .............................................................. 9
7-10 ............................................................ 0
7-11 ............................................................ 1
7-12 ............................................................ 12
7-13 ............................................................ 0
7-14 and 7-15 ............................................. 1
7-16 ............................................................ 3
7-17 ............................................................ 1
7-18 ............................................................ 3
7-19 ............................................................ 5
7-20 through 7-26 ....................................... 1
7-27 ............................................................ 3
7-28 blank Deleted ..................................... 3
7-29 ............................................................ 5
7-30 blank ................................................... 5
Change 12
A
TM 55-1500-345-23
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES /WORK PACKAGES (CON’T)
Page/WP No.
*Change No.
8-1 .............................................................. 12
8-2 and 8-3 ................................................. 11
8-4 and 8-5 ................................................. 12
8-6 .............................................................. 11
8-7 .............................................................. 12
8-8 .............................................................. 11
8-9 through 8-16 ......................................... 0
8-17 ............................................................ 12
8-18 ............................................................ 0
8-19 ............................................................ 12
8-20 through 8-22....................................... 0
8-23 and 8-24 ............................................. 1
8-24.1 ......................................................... 1
8-24.2 blank ............................................... 1
8-25 and 8-26 ............................................. 1
8-27 through 8-29....................................... 0
8-30 and 8-31 ............................................. 9
8-32 blank................................................... 9
8-33 and 8-34 ............................................. 9
8-35 ............................................................ 9
8-36 ............................................................ 0
9-1 .............................................................. 12
9-2 blank Deleted ....................................... 12
9-3 through 9-12 Deleted ........................... 12
9-13 ............................................................ 12
9-14 through 9-21....................................... 6
9-22 ............................................................ 7
9-23 through 9-29....................................... 6
9-30 ............................................................ 7
9-30.1 and 9-30.2 ....................................... 12
9-31 ............................................................ 12
9-32 ............................................................ 0
9-33 and 9-34 ............................................. 12
9-35 through 9-42....................................... 0
9-43 and 9-44 ............................................. 12
9-45 through 9-47....................................... 0
9-48 and 9-49 ............................................. 12
9-50 through 9-52....................................... 0
9-53 ............................................................ 1
9-54 ............................................................ 11
9-55 through 9-58....................................... 12
9-59 through 9-66....................................... 0
9-67 and 9-68 ............................................. 12
9-69 through 9-71....................................... 11
9-72 through 9-83....................................... 12
9-84 ............................................................ 0
9-85 ............................................................ 12
9-86 blank ................................................. 12
9-87 through 9-100 Deleted ....................... 12
9-101 .......................................................... 12
9-102 blank ............................................... 12
9-103 through 9-108 Deleted ..................... 12
9-109 and 9-110 ......................................... 12
9-111 .......................................................... 5
9-112 .......................................................... 8
B Change 12
Page/WP No.
*Change No.
9-113 and 9-114 ......................................... 5
9-115 .......................................................... 0
9-116 .......................................................... 12
9-117 .......................................................... 5
9-118 and 9-119 ......................................... 12
9-120 .......................................................... 5
9-121 .......................................................... 12
9-122 .......................................................... 5
9-123 .......................................................... 12
9-124 through 9-126 ................................... 0
9-127 and 9-128 ......................................... 12
9-129 through 9-176 Deleted ..................... 12
9-177 through 9-179 ................................... 12
9-180 .......................................................... 1
9-181 .......................................................... 5
9-182 .......................................................... 9
9-183 ......................................................... 5
9-184 .......................................................... 0
9-185 and 9-186 ......................................... 12
9-187 .......................................................... 7
9-188 and 9-189 ......................................... 12
9-190 .......................................................... 7
9-191 .......................................................... 5
9-192 .......................................................... 12
9-193 through 9-195 ................................... 5
9-196 through 9-200 ................................... 12
9-200.1 ....................................................... 5
9-200.2 ....................................................... 12
9-201 .......................................................... 0
9-202 blank ................................................. 0
10-1 ............................................................ 12
10-2 through 10-23 ..................................... 9
10-24 .......................................................... 12
10-25 through 10-30 Deleted ..................... 12
10-31 .......................................................... 12
10-32 blank ................................................. 12
10-33 through 10-54 Deleted ..................... 12
10-55 .......................................................... 12
10-56 blank ................................................. 12
10-57 through 10-64 Deleted ..................... 10
10-65 .......................................................... 12
10-66 blank ................................................. 12
10-67 .......................................................... 12
10-68 blank ................................................. 12
10-69 through 10-76 Deleted ..................... 12
10-77 .......................................................... 12
10-78 blank ................................................. 12
10-79 through 10-88 Deleted ..................... 10
10-89 .......................................................... 12
10-90 .......................................................... 0
10-91 .......................................................... 12
10-92 through 10-94 ................................... 0
10-95 .......................................................... 12
10-96 through 10-115 ................................. 0
10-116 blank ............................................... 0
* TM 55-1500-345-23
TECHNICAL MANUAL
No. 55-1500-345-23
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 12 JUNE 1986
PAINTING AND MARKING OF ARMY AIRCRAFT
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can improve this manual. If you .nd mistakes, or if you know of a way to improve these
procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes
to Publications and Blank Forms) located in the back of this manual, directly to: Commander,
U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command, ATTN: AMSAM-MMA-NP, Redstone Arsenal, AL
35898-5000. A reply will be furnished to you. You may also provide DA Form 2028 information to
AMCOM via e-mail, fax, or the World Wide Web. Our fax number is DSN 788-6546 or Commercial
(256) 842-6546. Our e-mail address is: [email protected] Instructions for sending an
electronic 2028 may be found at the back of this manual immediately preceding the hard copy
2028. For the World Wide Web use: https://amcom2028.redstone.army.mil.
OZONE DEPLETING CHEMICALS INFORMATION
This document has been reviewed for the presence of Class I Ozone Depleting Chemicals by the AMCOM G-4 (Logistics)
Environmental Division. As of the base document through Change 10, dated 26 January 2004, all references to Class
I Ozone Depleting Chemicals have been removed from this document by substitution with chemicals that do not cause
atmospheric ozone depletion.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION
This document has been reviewed for the presence of SOLVENTS containing hazardous materials as defined by the EPCRA
302 and 313 lists by the AMCOM G-4 (Logistics) Environmental Division. As of the base through Change 10, dated 26 January 2004, all references to Solvents containing hazardous materials have been removed from this document by substitution
with non-hazardous or less hazardous materials where possible.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER 1
Section I
Section I
Section II
CHAPTER 2
Section I
Section II
Section III
CHAPTER 3
Section I
Section II
Section III
CHAPTER 4
Section I
Section II
Section III
Section IV
Section V
Section VI
CHAPTER 5
Section I
Section II
CHAPTER 6
Section I
Section II
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PURPOSE AND SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESPONSIBILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTHORIZED PAINT SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURFACE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRIPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
METAL CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAINTING: GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAINTING TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINISH PAINTING: GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TACTICAL PAINT SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HELICOPTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED WING AIRCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPELLER ASSEMBLIES AND BLADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPLICATION TO PREVIOUSLY PAINTED SURFACES (ROTARY AND FIXED
WING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-TACTICAL PAINT SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINISHES FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS: GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPELLER ASSEMBLIES AND ROTOR BLADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* This publication supersedes TB 746-93-2 10 August 1978, including all changes
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-7
3-1
3-1
3-14
3-16
4-1
4-1
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
5-1
5-1
5-2
6-1
6-1
6-2
Change 12
i
TM 55-1500-345-23
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)
Page
Section I
Section II
Section III
Section IV
Section V
Section VI
CHAPTER 7
Section I
Section II
Section III
Section IV
Section V
Section VI
Section VII
Section VIII
Section IX
Section X
Section XI
CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER 9
Section I
Section II
Section III
Section IV
Section V
Section VI
Section VII
Section VIII
Section IX
CHAPTER 10
Section I
Section II
Section III
Section IV
Section V
Section VI
Section VII
Section VIII
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPELLER ASSEMBLIES AND ROTOR BLADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR LANDING GEAR AND WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WALKWAY COATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERIOR PAINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROTECTIVE COATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LETTERING AND MARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSIGNIA: GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEDICAL INSIGNIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMAND AND ORGANIZATIONAL INSIGNIA AND NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDENTIFICATION LETTERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WARNING STRIPES AND SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIO CALL NUMBERS AND PREFIXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERIAL NUMBER AND FUEL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKINGS FOR EMERGENCY ENTRY OR EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MISCELLANEOUS MARKINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKING OF INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MISCELLANEOUS TABLES AND ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HELICOPTER ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AH-64 Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH-47 Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OH-58 ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UH-60 ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED WING AIRCRAFT ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C12 and RC-12 Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U-21 and RU-21 ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2
6-5
6-5
6-14.1
6-20
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-7
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-17
8-1
9-1
9-1
9-13
9-33
9-85
9-101
9-109
9-127
9-128
9-178
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-31
10-55
10-65
10-67
10-77
10-89
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
1-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
ii
Title
or Identi.er Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right and Methods of Spraying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross-Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fifty Percent Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Spray Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faulty Patterns and Suggested Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Excessive Spray Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paint Leaks From Spray Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gun Sputters Constantly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change 12
Page
1-3
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-12
3-14
3-24
3-24
3-24
TM 55-1500-345-23
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont)
Figure
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-25
9-39
9-40
9-41
Title
Page
Orange Peel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sandpaper Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrinkling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blistering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fish-Eyes and Poor Wetting, Crawling, Poor Flowout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pitting or Cupping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Size and Wording of Stencil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method of Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixture Control Quadrant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Manifold Pressure Gage, Tachometer, Cylinder Head Temperature Gage, and Air
Temperature Gage Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Coolant Temperature Gage and Torquemeter Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Tachometer and Engine Exhaust Temperature Gage Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Dual Tachometer Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Oil Pressure Gage, Oil Temperature Gage, and Airspeed Indicator Markings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Accelerometer, Hydraulic Pressure Gage, Deicer Gage, and Fuel Pressure Gage
Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Nozzle Ground Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
National Star Insignia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing and Fuselage Marking (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NATO Marking Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sidedraft Paint Booths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downdraft Paint Booths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Compartment Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Two Blade, Exposed Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Two Blades,
Helicopter Tail Rotor Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Three Blades, Exposed Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Three Props With Spinner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Four Props, Exposed Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Four Blades, Helicopter Tail Rotor Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tactical Paint Scheme, AH-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Diagram, AH-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tactical Paint Scheme. CH-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Tactical Arctic/Desert Paint Scheme, CH-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Markings, CH-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Markings, CH-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Diagram, CH-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tactical Paint Scheme, OH-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Tactical Arctic/Desert Paint Scheme, OH-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Requirements to be Stenciled on the Back of Pilot’s and Co-Pilot’s Seat Backs, OH-58A/C
Station Diagram, OH-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tactical Paint Scheme, UH-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Tactical Arctic/Desert Paint Scheme, UH-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Army Medical Service (Ambulance), UH-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
3-25
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-27
3-27
7-5
7-9
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-26
7-27
7-29
8-20
8-22
8-23
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-33
8-34
8-35
8-36
9-13
9-14
9-32
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-55
9-84
9-109
9-110
9-111
9-124
9-126
9-178
9-179
9-180
Change 12
iii
TM 55-1500-345-23
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont)
Figure
9-42
9-43
10-1
10-2
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-23
Title
Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Locations, UH-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Markings, C-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Diagram, C-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tactical Paint Scheme, RU-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Tactical Paint Scheme, U-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Tactical, High Visibility Paint Scheme, U-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Diagram, U-21 and RU-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
9-181
9-201
10-2
10-24
10-89
10-91
10-95
10-97
10-102
10-25
LIST OF TABLES
Number
3-1
6-1
6-2
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
iv
Title
Manual Spray Coating Troubles, Possible Causes, and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas To Be Painted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas Not To Be Painted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Manuals, Technical Bulletins, and AR’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards-American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D1193-Reagent Water . . . . . . . . . .
Consumable Items List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions of Common Painting Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation and Respirator Requirements for Application of Paints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Safety Guidelines for Application of MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039B Paint . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Respiratory Protection Guidelines for Spray Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Occupational Health Protection Requirements for Paint Spray Workers Using MIL-E-52798A
Alkyd Enamel and MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039B Polyurethane Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change 12
Page
3-18
6-6
6-9
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-8
8-9
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
SECTION I
PURPOSE AND SCOPE
1-1. PURPOSE. This manual provides instructions
and procedures for the painting and marking of all Army
aircraft, including standard approved materials, application and maintenance of coatings, .nishing materials,
special purpose coatings and markings, insignia, and
identification markings.
NOTE
Paragraph 7-34 should be consulted prior to
painting and marking of all aircraft, in order to
assure compliance with NATO STANDARDIZATION AGREEMENT (STANAG) No. 3109 ABC
AIR STD 5 1/2 AND STANAG 3230.
1-2. SCOPE. The paint schemes and materials prescribed by this TM are mandatory for all Army aircraft
whether assigned for active service, storage, under
procurement, or involved in research and development.
This TM is applicable to all Army Reserve National
Guard, and major Army field commands as defined
in AR 10-5, Section III. Commencing Oct 85, "New
procurements and those assets that require depot
maintenance will include polyurethane (MIL-DTL-64159
SECTION I
1-5.
or MIL-DTL-53039) and/or MIL-C-22750, Epoxy as
noted in this publication."
1-3. RESTRICTIONS. Satisfactory protective coatings applied prior to the issuance of this TM will not be
altered solely for the purpose of conformity to current
painting and marking requirements. Complete painting
will be accomplished only when the existing finish has
been obsoleted or deteriorated to the extent that it fails
to protect the underlying surfaces or the finish must
be changed for policy reasons as authorized by higher
authority.
1-4. DEVIATIONS. Deviations from the provisions of
this technical manual must be approved by Department
of the Army. Request for deviation or change will be supported by justification (such as safety, mission requirement, cost reductions etc.) and forwarded to U.S. Army
Aviation and Missile Command ATTN: AMSAM-MMANP, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898–5000. Wherever the
instructions in this technical manual conflict with the instructions in the publications referenced herein, the instructions in this technical manual will be followed.
RESPONSIBILITIES
ORGANIZATIONAL ACTIVITIES.
a. Aviation Unit Maintenance (AVUM). Responsible for surface preparation and minor touch-up (spot
painting) of aircraft surfaces. Touch-up is defined as minor repainting of the painted aircraft surface, i.e., light
scratches, chipping, crazing, small wear spots around
doors, cowling, areas where there is heavy foot traffic, towing points, minor sheet metal repairs and necessary blending to improve appearance. Touch-up for
coating, aliphatic polyurethane per MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 , see para 4-12; for lacquer, acrylic, per
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, see para 4-13.
b. Complete Repainting May be Done at Field
and Sustainment Where OSHA Approved Facilities
are Available. Responsible for repainting deteriorated
aircraft painted surfaces that are beyond the capabilities authorized for AVUM. Repainting is defined as
stripping paint down to the bare substrate, inspecting
for corrosion, pretreatment for corrosion, priming and
topcoating of large areas of aircraft painted surfaces.
Repainting will only be done if equipment and facilities
indicated in Chapter 3 are available.
Change 12
1-1
TM 55-1500-345-23
c. Aircraft Components. Assemblies and components received in primed condition will be touched up
with primer as necessary to repair damaged coating,
prior to application of top coat, and will be finish-coated
to match adjacent and interrelated structural surfaces.
Internal airframe components within crewstations shall
be painted with polyurethanes MIL-DTL-64159 water
dispersible and MIL-DTL-53039 single component solvent based. Internal airframe components located in,
or adjacent to, cargo compartments shall be painted
polyurethanes MIL-DTL-64159 water dispersible and
MIL-DTL-53039 single component solvent based. Internally installed components will be touched up or
refinished using MIL-C-22750 or MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 with required colors. All external surfaces shall be painted per Chapter 9.
refinishing the entire aircraft. Refinishing is defined as
stripping down the complete aircraft to bare substrate,
inspecting for corrosion, pretreating for corrosion,
priming and repainting to a like new condition. Depot
level maintenance activities will also perform work
assigned to lower echelons of maintenance.
1-7. INTERNATIONAL
STANDARDIZATION. The
aircraft marking provisions of this Technical Manual
are subject to international standardization agreement
(ABC AIR STD. 5 1/2, STANAG 3109, and STANAG
3230.) When amendments, revisions, or cancellation
of this Technical Manual are proposed, the department
custodians will inform their respective standardization
offices so that appropriate action may be taken respecting the international agreement concerned.
1-6. AVIATION
DEPOT
MAINTENANCE. Responsible for surface preparation and
SECTION II
AUTHORIZED PAINT SCHEMES
1-8. GENERAL. The following aircraft may be completely repainted only with authority for deviation from
AMSAT-I-MEA: Standard C (STD C) aircraft, Limited
Standard (LS) aircraft, Obsolete (OBS) aircraft, aircraft
designated Contingency Category (C and T), and aircraft used by the Army on loan from another agency.
They will otherwise be maintained in their existing paint
scheme by spot painting to prevent corrosion and deterioration. See paragraph 1-4 for deviations from the
provisions of this technical manual.
1-9.
TACTICAL AIRCRAFT PAINTING.
a. All Army aircraft, except those specifically exempted in paragraph 1-10, will be painted the tactical
paint scheme as specified in Chapter 4.
b. All TOE/MTOE (Table(s) of Organization and
Equipment/Modified Table(s) of Organization and
Equipment) helicopters will be painted to the tactical paint scheme of aircraft green polyurethane per
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 applied with lusterless markings.
1-2
Change 12
c. Army helicopters having a top coat of aircraft
green acrylic lacquer applied per MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 will be converted to MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 Aircraft Green paint during commercial
or organic aircraft overhaul. Aircraft may be painted
on other occasions at the discretion of the major field
commanders.
d. The tactical external topcoat for fixed wing aircraft will be aircraft gray with black markings. Material
will conform to MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
e. Crewstations and components within crewstations shall be finished Aircraft Black, #37038, per MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
f. Aircraft cargo compartments of applicable aircraft should be painted interior Aircraft Gray, #36231,
conforming to MIL-C-22750 or MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039, except OH-58 aircraft shall be painted Aircraft Black.
g. Both pilot and gunner stations of AH-64 aircraft
shall be Aircraft Black.
TM 55-1500-345-23
h. Internal components located in or adjacent to
cargo compartment areas shall be finished to match internal airframe color.
i. All aircraft that have been painted or repainted
with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 should be
marked with the polyurethane paint symbol as indicated in Figure 1-1. The date (month and year) and
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 designation shall
be as shown. The paint scheme used shall be shown
in the manner and location specified in paragraph 7-40.
The polyurethane paint symbol shall be to the left of the
air-frame. Aircraft components with insufficient surface
to apply the symbol, will be marked on the sur-
face of the component that would not normally be
visable from outside the aircraft. With either chemical agent resistant coating polyurethane (CARC-P) or
chemical agent resistant coating epoxy (CARC-E) using
1/4 inch lettering.
1-10. EXCEPTIONS TO TACTICAL AIRCRAFT
PAINTING.
a. Medical air ambulances will be painted in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 5.
b. TDA helicopters may be painted to the tactical
paint scheme but retain high visibility/conspicuity markings described in Chapter 5. Aircraft in this category that
are used for training purposes at Army aviation schools
and other facilities may be banded with fluorescent paint
or tape to ensure better daylight inflight visibility. Refer
to Chapter 9.
c. Aircraft designated for a specific mission or assigned to certain geographic locations may be painted
variations to the tactical paint of Chapter 4. See Chapter 5 for information clarifying these non-tactical paint
schemes.
Figure 1-1. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
Identi.er Symbol
Change 12
1-3/(1-4 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 2
SURFACE PREPARATION
Section I. CLEANING
2-1.
GENERAL. In the process of preparing surfaces
for stripping or painting, care should be taken that the
surfaces are dean and free from dirt, grease, lint, water
or other substances which may interfere with full contact
with the surface. Conventional cleaning may be used in
this process, as follows:
c. For conventional surface cleaning prior to metal
treatment processing, primer or topcoat application, use
the process cited in TM 1-1500-344-23.
NOTE
Acid cleaners or surface treatments
other than those cited in TM 1-1500344-23 or this publication shall not be
utilized. These materials may cause
hydrogen embrittlement to high strength
steels and deteriorative effects on other
alloys.
a
Cleaning of surfaces, as covered by this
paragraph is intended to remove traces of dust or
contamination just prior to painting. For complete details
on materials and surface cleaning preparatory to
stripping, consult TM 1-1500-344-23.
b. Cleaning shall be accomplished with solvents,
detergents and processes which have no degrading
effect on the surfaces and which produce surfaces
satisfactory for receiving subsequent processing. There
are cleaning materials which are effective and suitable
for some surface contaminants, e.g., grease and oils,
and which are not suitable for others. More than one
cleaning product may, therefore, be required to provide a
waterbreak-free surface.
NOTE
Reclaimed paint thinner or other
reclaimed thinners shall not be used for
cleaning purposes.
These materials
may leave a grease film which will cause
poor adhesion of the next coat or form a
barrier
which
removers
cannot
effectively penetrate.
Section II. STRIPPING
2-2.
GENERAL. The foremost considerations in
removing organic coatings are that removal is complete
to the bare metal, or polyamide primer, and that no
damage occurs in the process to underlying surfaces. A
variety of methods can remove coatings. In choosing
one, a compromise must be made between maximum
uncontrolled removal power and protection of equipment
being stripped.
Change 7 2-1
TM 55-1500-345-23
Military Specification MIL-R-81294
may be used on aluminum or magnesium substrates. Military Specification
MIL-H-81294 remover contains highly
volatile methylene chloride as a constiuent. Its vapors are hazardous to breath
and/or will cause skin burns. Although
methylene chloride is not flammable,
other constituents are. When the blanketing effect of methylene chloride is
lost through its volatility, the remaining
constituents may, under certain condiAny paint
tions, become ignitable.
remover on the skin or in the eyes must
be flushed immediately and copiously
with water. In addition, medical treatment should be sought promptly in the
case of contact with the eyes. Protective clothing and equipment such as
rubber gloves, aprons, boots, approved
organic vapor cartridge respirators (TB
MED 502), appropriate eye shields and
goggles shall be used as necessary to
provide adequate protection for personnel.
The painting operation should be
reviewed by the installation safety off ice
and MEDDAC Health and Environment
Activity to determine the presence of
any operational hazards and to make
recommendations for either eliminating
or controlling those hazards found.
Care must be exercised when using any
paint remover on fiberglass/plastics
(e.g., antenna, access doors, fairings,
canopies) surfaces to avoid damage.
Spot tests must be accomplished, on
inconspicuous surfaces to determine
compatibility of any remover, and a
remover selected which does not cause
2-2
Change 8
deterioration. Precautionary measures
shall be taken to prevent paint and paint
removal waste from contaminating
lakes and streams. Some of the chemicals utilized for painting and paint
removal require treatment or other special control prior to disposal. Disposal of
materials shall be accomplished under
the direction of the installation facility
engineer and MEDDAC Health and
Environment Activity in accordancewith
applicable directive, and in a manner
that will not result in violation of local,
state and federal pollution criteria.
Guidelines for disposal are cited in AR
200-1.
2-3. METHODS. The specific method for strip-
ping existing paint to bare metal is determined by
the accessibility of the area, judgement of the
degree and type of corrosion and degree of flaking
or peeling of paint. Stripping may be accomplished
by:
Chemical Remover. See paragraphs 2-4,
a.
2-6 and 2-7 below.
b.
below.
Mechanical Means. See paragraph 2-9
2-4. SURFACES NOT TO BE CHEMICALLY STRIPPED.
NOTE
MIL-R-81924 will deteriorate most nonmetallic structures. Non-metallic surfaces may be stripped with specific
AMCOM or local engineering approval.
Subsequent damage must be repaired.
a. Areas Not to be Exposed to Paint Remover.
(1)
De-icer boots, wing and tail.
(2) De-icer element, leading edge of engine
cowl-air intake.
(3) Wheel wells.
(4) Propellers.
TM 55-1500-345-23
(5) Propeller spinner or propeller control.
(6) Cockpit enclosures, including avionics panels, instruments, etc.
(5) All edges, repairs and loose fasteners on all
honeycomb panels shall be masked prior to chemical
stripping.
(7) Engine air intakes, tail pipe area. Battery
and fuel vents and heater exhaust must be covered to
keep out paint remover.
(6) Mask over joints, access doors, or other
openings or panels which have been bonded with adhesives. Paint remover has a detrimental effect on the
strength of adhesives when allowed to contact them.
(8) Do not strip sealant presently applied under
access covers. Any sealant removed will be replaced
using high adhesion sealant MIL-S-81733 Type II, Class
B or low adhesion MIL-S-8784 molded in the form of a
rubber gasket.
(7) Masking may be done with barrier paper,
Military Specification MIL-B-131F or MIL-B-121, Type
I, Grade A, Class 1; tape, pressure sensitive adhesive,
for masking during paint stripping, Military Specification
MIL-T-23397, Type II (72 hour protection).
(9) Fiberglass wingtips and other .berglass
components, e.g., antennas and radomes.
(8) Masking may also be done with paraffin wax,
Federal Specification VV-W-95, in lieu of paper. Use
only masking tape, MIL-T-21595, to outline area to be
masked to keep wax off metal. Melt wax and brush
a thick coat on surface. The temperature of the wax
should be approximately 150°F (65°C), as higher temperature may deform plastic.
b.
Deleted
c. Radomes. Radomes will not be stripped.
2-5. PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE
STRIPPED.
a. General.
(1) Mask all transparent plastic surfaces such
as windows, canopies, blisters, etc. Plastic will be
crazed, frost or lose transparency if paint remover
comes in contact with them. Mask radomes in the same
manner as plastics to prevent damage to their rain-erosion resistant and antistatic coatings. Also, mask boots
or any exposed rubber or elastomer surfaces since
remover will accelerate deterioration of these materials.
Double masking of sensitive areas is recommended.
(2) Mask detailed decalcomania which cannot
be easily replaced. Other instructions, stencils or warning signs will either be masked or replaced after repainting.
(3) Do not attempt to remove coating from loop
antennas. Protect the housing from contact with remover.
(4) Mask all faying surfaces, seams, access
doors, pitot static ports (area within a one (1) inch diameter), or other openings with barrier paper and tape.
b. Masking of Seams. Masking of seams can be
done with MIL-S-8784, Class B, sealant. Allow to cure
to a firm rubbery state (approximately 20 hours at 60°F
to 80°F) prior to starting the stripping operation. The
required cure time for this material must be considered
when flow or processing time is of prime importance.
After the paint stripping operation is completed, the fillet
formed by the MIL-S-8784, class B, material shall be
peeled off by hand.
All masking or protective materials must be removed immediately upon completion of paint
stripping and/or painting process.
2-6.
GENERAL PREPARATIONS.
NOTE
The only chemical paint remover authorized for
use on aircraft surfaces is MIL-R-81294. Other
chemical removers cannot be used unless authorized by AMSAV-MEA.
Change 12
2-3
TM 55-1500-345-23
a. Preparation.
(1) Place aircraft on a wash rack, preferably in
a shaded area, and attach a static ground.
(2) For best results, ambient temperature
should be approximately between 50° and 100°F (10°
and 37°C). Do not attempt to accomplish paint removal
in rain, or on aircraft surfaces which are not dry.
(3) When painted surface is exceptionally dirty
or coated with fuel, oil, grease, mud, or other foreign
matter, clean it before applying remover in accordance
with paragraph 2-1.
b. Drying. After aircraft has been cleaned, allow
sufficient time for surfaces and crevices to dry thoroughly. Water remaining on surfaces and in crevices
has a detrimental effect on paint removers.
2-7. APPLICATION OF MIL-R-81294 PAINT
REMOVERS.
Paint remover that is old is not necessarily unsatisfactory for use although it deteriorates progressively with age in removal effectiveness,
particularly if subjected to open air and temperatures over 100 °Fahrenheit. More important,
there is an increasing potential of corrosiveness upon its aging. Close surveillance shall be
made of material age when it is to be used on
aircraft surfaces. Any material which is questionable by reason of age, or improper storage,
shall be laboratory tested for continued conformance to specification, with particular reference
to the corrosive potential, prior to being used on
aircraft surface. Any remover found not to be in
accordance with Military Specifications will be
discarded.
NOTE
Removers must be well mixed before use as
they tend to segregate on standing. Do this
by agitating with a wooden paddle if mechanical mixers are not available. Rolling a drum
will not mix its content very effectively. At temperatures below 60 °F, the removal power of removers will be noticeably slower than at higher
temperatures.
a. Applying Removers. Beginning at the highest
point of any vertical or sloping surface, apply a coat of
remover, with a long handle, nonmetallic brush. Barrel
pump and spray gun may be used for application of removers. In no case should the spray be highly atomized.
Agitate with a stiff fiber brush, if necessary, to loosen
paint. A wet film of remover should be maintained on the
surface being stripped to obtain efficient removal. This
may require additional application of the remover. Areas
should be treated progressively, kept wet, and sufficient
time allowed for the stripping action. Best results are
obtained by applying removers in shaded areas since
sunlight dries the remover quickly.
Prolonged breathing of remover fumes must be
avoided. Use only in well ventilated areas.
NOTE
Deleted
b. Painted Surfaces. Enamel surfaces should
wrinkle within 5 to 15 minutes after application. Most
surfaces with lacquer or polyurethane paint will not
wrinkle but will merely be softened by the remover;
allow remover to remain 8 to 20 minutes, keeping a
wet surface by applying another coat of remover if
necessary.
c. Cleanup of Stripped Surfaces.
2-4
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
(1) After appropriate masking, apply sol-
(1) Flush the stripped surfaces, using water
heated to 90° to 120° Fahrenheit at 150 to 250 psi
maximum. If high pressure warm water is not available, cold water at usual hydrant pressure may be
used. This will require a longer time to accomplish
the washing. Lifted paint will be flushed by starting
at the bottom and working upward, keeping the
flushing liquids off the unwashed parts. After flushing thoroughly, continue cleaning in accordance
with TM 1-1500-344-23.
NOTE
Zinc chromate primed surfaces, where
topcoat material has not been applied,
should be washed down as soon as
possible after initial loosening of primer.
If the surface becomes dry, another
application of remover is required since
zinc chromate tends to become redeposited on the surface.
(2) Tape and loosened paint may be
vents with soft bristle brush or clean cloth.
(2) Allow solvent to remain on surface
until paint has softened and lifted. To keep the area
wet with solvent, it may be necessary to keep a cloth
on the surface and keep the cloth saturated with solvent.
(3) Wipe all of the solvent away with a
clean damp cloth, frequently rinsing cloth in clean
water.
(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) as necessary until all paint and residue have been
removed from metal surface including recesses and
around rivets, bolts, etc.
(5) Wipe clean and dry with clean lint-free
cloth, Federal Specification CCC-C-46.
removed by hand or by using water under pressure.
2-9. MECHANICAL REMOVAL FROM
METALS. Mechanical removal of paint is recom-
2-8. STRIPPING IN CONFINED LOCATIONS.
mended where chemical removal would be impractical because of structural complexities, rinsing difficulties, or where it is more efficient or environmental
a.
Removal of Paint with Solvent Materials.
When impractical to use emulsified paint remover
restrictions on chemical exists.
because of complexities of assembly and rinsing
difficulties, remove acrylic paint with solvent materials such as ethyl acetate, Federal Specification TTE-751, lacquer thinner, Federal Specification TTT-266, or dichloromethane, Military Specification
MIL-D-6998; remove polyurethane paint by
mechanical means.
a. Hand removal may be accomplished
using:
(1) An abrasive nylon mat, Military Specification MIL-A-9962; aluminum wool, Military Specification MIL-A-4864, or Federal Specification
P-P-101 No. 400 abrasive paper. Do not use steel
wool.
Prolonged breathing of solvent fumes
must be avoided. Use only in well ventilated areas.
b.
Application of Solvents
(2) A hand operated air powered drill
motor with rotary brass wire brush or abrasive flap
brush on heavy structural non-clad aluminum
alloys.
Change 8
2-5
TM 55-1500-345-23
The use of goggles or face shield is
mandatory since paint particles can
break loose and fly off.
Do not use steel brush or steel wool on
non-ferrous surfaces. Metal particles
will become embedded in the substrate,
causing corrosion by galvanic action
between dissimilar metals.
(3) Wipe area with clean damp cloth followed by wiping dry, with a clean, dry lint-free cloth.
Areas may be blown with warm oil-free air or gaseous nitrogen.
Magnesium-Thorium Alloy Components of T-53, T-55 and T-63 engines
contain radioactive material. The
mechanical method of corrosion
removal shall be attempted only under
the operating procedures required by
TB 43-0108.
b. Abrasive Blasting. Abrasive blasting (a rapid
method) consists of bombarding a surface with an
2-6
Change 8
abrasive at high velocity. The abrasive may be
glass beads, steel grit or organic materials and is
carried to the surface by air at high velocity. This
should not be applied on surface where critical
dimensions must be maintained or on thin structures which can warp.
c. Wire Brushing. Wire brushing is a mechanical
abrasive operation done usually with a hand wire
brush or a wire brush mounted on a motor driven
wheel. By using different types of brushes and various lengths and gages of wire, a wide range of abrasive action is possible. Use wire brushing to remove
heavy corrosion and imbedded paint, especially
where chemical treatment is not practical. A typical
wire brushing procedure follows:
(1) Protect adjacent components from scale,
chips, and dust.
(2) If grease or oil are present, clean area by
method outlined in paragraph 2-1 or TM
1-1500-344-23.
(3)
face.
Wire brush area to a firm metal subsur-
The use of goggles or face shield
is mandatory when using motordriven brushes.
TM 55-1500-345-23
2-10. SPECIAL CONDITIONS. Where diff culty is
encountered on magnesium surfaces, paint may be removed by following instructions in Military Specif cation
MIL-M-3171, Processes for Pretreatment and Preven-
SECTION III.
METAL CONDITIONING
2-11. METAL TREATMENT. Aluminum and magnesium surfaces to be painted will be cleaned prior to painting and prior to the application of the chemical treatment
specif ed in paragraph 2-12 with a bristle brush using
any of the cleaning compounds or processes listed in
TM 1-1500-344-23 series.
2-12. CHEMICAL COATINGS (CONVERSION
COATINGS).
a. Chemical Treatment of Aluminum Surfaces. Surfaces will be cleaned prior to application of
chemical coating. Chemical treatment of aluminum will
be as follows:
(1) General. Chemical surface treatment,
such as alodine, provides a passive surface layer that
resists corrosion and provides a necessary base for
bonding the paint to the aluminum.
(2) Materials. Treatment materials will conform to Military Specif cation MIL-C-5541.
(3)
tion of Corrosion on Magnesium Alloy. Do not blast
f exible braided metal lines such as copper or stainless
steel. Use only clean abrasive on Titanium Alloys.
solution into areas where it cannot be removed and/or
further diluted by water. Accidental spills in conf ned
areas can be neutralized using baking soda followed
by rinsing with clean water. Allow the surface to drain
and/or pick up the excess water by absorbing in a
sponge by blotting action; do not rub. Excess rubbing
will remove the coating since it is soft.
b. Chemical Treatment of Magnesium Surfaces. Treat magnesium surfaces to be painted in
accordance with Military Specif cation MIL-M-3171.
Apply strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2-13. PRETREATMENT AND SEALING OF BARE
METAL SURFACES.
a.
Aluminum bare metal will be alodine treated
per MIL-C-5541, Class 1A, prior to applying the f rst
primer.
b.
Bare magnesium metal areas will be dichromate treated per MIL-M-3171, Type 6, prior to applying
the f rst primer.
Application.
NOTE
(a)
Prepare and apply in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. In general, mix 1-1/4
ounces of compound with each gallon of water.
(b)
Apply solution to perfectly cleaned but
wetted surfaces.
(c)
Apply solution liberally and evenly to
only as much surface at a time as can be coated and
rinsed before surface treatment solution dries. When
the surface action appears complete on all areas, stop
the reaction by rinsing or f ooding the area with fresh,
clean water. The reaction of the solution is stopped by
diluting the acid component. Be careful not to f ush the
Paint will not bond to the brown powdery surface
of excessively treated magnesium or aluminum,
nor will paint bond to treated aluminum surfaces
which are too dark.
c.
Steel substrates will be treated with zinc phosphate per TT-C-490, Type I, prior to applying the f rst
primer.
d.
All missing or deteriorated skin sealant will be
replaced using low adhesion, corrosion inhibiting AMS3265 sealing compound.
Change 11
2-7/(2-8 blank)
TM55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 3
PAINTING:
GENERAL
Section l. PAINTING TECHNIQUES
3-1. STORAGE OF PAINTING MATERlALS. To prevent fire, spoilage, and waste arising
from improper storage and surplus stock, the
following precautions shall be observed.
Space heaters or other direct fired
heaters shall not be used to heat
storage areas. Floors should be concrete and drained to one point; drain
shall run to sump or detached cistern
and have deep trap. Ventilation shall
utilize screened inlets 6 inches above
floor and screened vent through roof.
Paint and thinners shall be stored where
a.
possible in dry, fire resistant well drained and well
ventilated structures, preferably separated from
other buildings, and under automatic sprinkler
protection.
To avoid possible leakage arising from
b.
corrosion of containers, protection shall be provided against wetting by rain, snow, steam leaks,
or other sources of water.
Materials shall not be stored in the proxc.
imity of steam lines or other sources of heat to
avoid direct heat. It is recommended that steam
heat be used with coils above stock and screened
to prevent contact with drums or containers.
Storage shall not be on floors below grade
d.
and first tier of containers shall be laid at least 2
inches above floor level to provide for suitable
ventilation and drainage. Sills shall be provided at
openings to storage areas, approximately 6 inches above floor
Paint components and thinners packaged
e.
in 55 gallon steel drums may be stored outdoors
provided containers are protected against rusting
by painting of bare metal areas and are set on
dunnage so as to provide approximately 2 inches
clearance above ground. Drums stored out of
doors shall be laid on their sides to protect loss of
markings stenciled on the heads through
weathering action of rain, snow, and sun.
f.
Handling of stock shall be conducted in a
manner to avoid damage to labels. Relabeling of
material where labels have been obliterated may
result in mislabeling, with consequent incorrect
use or waste of material. Materials with obliterated labels should be properly discarded.
Care should be taken to assure protection
g.
of the paint or components from moisture. Particular care should be exercised to prevent water
entering containers as paint is opened.
h.
Containers of paint materials shall be
readily accessible at all times. Other materials
shall not be stacked on top of paint materials.
i.
Containers shall be stored and issued in
order of dates of manufacture shown on respective labels. Materials bearing oldest date shall be
used first In the event that date of manufacture is
not shown on container, date of receipt shall be
considered as approximate date of manufacture
for purposes of storage and issue.
To give best results, temperature of paint
j.
materials should be between 60° and 85° F (18°
and 29° C) at time of use. Storage conditions that
result in paint temperatures below 55° F (13° C) or
above 95° F (35° C) require storage of material at
room temperature for approximately 25 hours
prior to use.
3-1
TM55-1500-345-23
k. Transit and Storage - In closed containers,
temperature and humidity will not affect the
stability of either component of two part coatings.
Both components will remain stable for 1 year, as
long as the component B, the catalyst portion, remains in closed and sealed containers. Where it is
necessary to extract a portion of the component B,
it should be done in a cool location and the lid
resealed as rapidly and as tightly, as possible.
health hazards, and flammability hazards in accordance with existing instructions and regulations. All safety precautions regarding personnel
health, fire prevention, ventilation, handling of
equipment, e l e c t r i c a l g r o u n d i n g , s t o r a g e o
coating materials, area preparation, use of vaporproof lights, etc., are mandatory.
3-2. SAFETY AND HEALTH ASPECTS
OF PAINTING.
(1) Wear protective clothing to prevent
contamination of ordinary clothing.
CAUTION
Federal and state environmental regulations are applicable to all chemicals used in painting processes. Precautionary
measures shall be taken to prevent
paint and paint removal waste from conlaminating lakes and streams. Some of
the chemicals utilized for painting and
paint removal require treatment or other
special control prior to disposal. Disposal of materials shall be accomplished
under the direction of the installation
facility engineer and MEDDAC Health
and Environmental Activity in accordance with applicable directives, and in
a manner that will not result in violation
of local, state and federal pollution
criteria. Guidelines for disposal are
cited in AR 200-1.
Painting operations present hazards that require
control or preventive measures. Vapors produced,
particularly in spray painting, are highly flammable, as are the accumulated dried coating
materials deposited on walls, floor and equipment
in painting areas. Coating materials and their
thinners very often contain toxic substances
which are injurious to health by inhalation and, to
a less degree, by physical contact. Painting
operations also involve hazards resulting from the
improper use of work stands, ladders, hoists, etc.
All painting personnel shall take all requisite safety precautions with regard to toxicity and other
3-2
Change 4
f
Personnel Safety Measures. The following
a.
measures are minimum requirements for personal
safety.
(2) Aprons and clothing that become
saturated with paint should not be worn in shop.
Saturated clothing shall not be hung in lockers or
other similar confined spaces that might induce
spontaneous combustion.
(3) All personnel should wear nonsparking shoes, which are free from metal nails in
soles and heels.
(4) Full skin covers, i.e., gloves or skin
protective creams shall be applied to exposed
skin areas prior to painting to guard against injurious effects of paints, and to allow ready
removal of paints by washing the area with water.
Skin areas shall be clean and dry before cream is
applied.
W A R N I N G
Certain paint solvents and pigments
may cause dermatitis on coming in contact with the skin. Some solvents may
penetrate skin, or may be inhaled as
vapors, and lead to systemic poisoning.
Care must be taken to avoid skin contact or breathing vapors to avoid systemic poisoning.
(5) Personnel engaged in stripping or
Cleaning with methylethylketone (MEK), acetone
or toluene and spray application of paints shall
wear an approved organic vapor cartridg
e
respirator approved by the Operational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA). (See Tables 8-7
through 8-9).
TM 55-1500-345-23
(6) Wash thoroughly after painting and before
eating, and do not carry food into spraying areas.
(7) Spray paint only when adequate exhaust or
general ventilation is available.
(8) Personnel having histories of skin or respiratory ailments should be excluded from paint crews
applying two component polyurethane or epoxy paints.
When there is doubt, appropriate medical tests must be
administered.
(9) Individuals who engage in mixing or applying plural component paints containing isocyanates will
be subjected to appropriate pre-placement surveillance
and periodic job related medical tests.
b. Fire Precautions. Most aircraft paints contain
highly .ammable constituents, which, under suitable
conditions, can form explosive mixtures with air. As a
result, the following precautions shall be taken:
(1) Electric motors used to drive exhaust fans
or other equipment in storage places shall be of the type
approved for explosive atmospheres. If such motors are
not available, substitutes shall be located outside the
room or building. Motor housing, fan frames, and the
like shall be properly grounded to prevent possible static
sparks, and all electric wiring shall be enclosed in conduits.
(2) All electric lights bulbs used within storage
area shall be enclosed in vaporproof globes, mounted
in keyless sockets.
(3) Motor starting devices and switches in all
electrical circuits, if not of the explosive-proof type and
approved by an established electrical underwriter, shall
be located outside room or building to prevent fire hazards from flammable vapors.
(4) Tools used to open containers shall be nonspark-producing types. All electrically-driven portable
tools used in this area shall be explosion proof and properly grounded.
(5) Ample fire extinguishers of the foam, dry
chemical, or carbon dioxide type will be provided.
Containers of paint may develop internal pressure during storage and should be opened cautiously.
c. Opening of Containers. Paint containers may
develop internal pressure due to storage at high temperatures or by development of gas due to deterioration.
This condition may be detected by a bulging of light gage
steel drums. Containers must be opened slowly to allow
the pressure to escape before completely removing the
seal.
NOTE
Failure to follow this procedure may result in
paint being spattered on personnel and surrounding areas.
(1) Open containers, sealed with bungs, by
slowly turning bung out until a hissing sound is heard.
When hissing stops (an indication that pressure in and
out of drum is equal) completely remove bung.
Use a fine, nonspark-producing tool and a softhead hammer (rubber or plastic) to puncture
drum.
(2) Containers which are bulged or distorted
due to internal pressure shall have a small hole punctured in top to release pressure. After pressure is
released, container may be opened in usual manner.
3-3. ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS FOR
PAINTING.
a. Coatings normally should not be applied under unfavorable atmospheric conditions such as wind,
strong drafts, dust, high humidity or extremes of temperature.
3-3
TM 55-1500-345-23
b. Specific guidance on ambient temperature and
humidity ranges for painting with various coatings may
be found in other parts of the TM, in the applicable specifications, or in the manufacturer’s recommendations. If
not specific guidance is given, the general guidance is
to not paint below 50°F or above 90°F, nor below 40%
or above 75% humidity.
c. The temperature of the surface to be painted
must also be considered, and work schedules adjusted
to allow or induce surface(s) to come to the proper temperature before applying paint.
3-4. SURFACE CONDITION. Prior to painting, inspect or test all metal surfaces for cleanliness and
physical condition suitable for receiving paint material.
a. The water break test is a method of evaluating
the degree of cleanness of a metal surface. It is based
on the ability of a clean surface to sustain an unbroken
film of water. Test representative areas of the surface
to be painted by projecting distilled water, deionized (DI)
water, or reverse osmosis (RO) water that complies with
ASTM D1193 Type I, II, III, or IV on it using an atomizing
device such as a nasal atomizer. Do not use a paint
sprayer for this purpose as the excessive pressure will
defeat this test. If water gathers into separate droplets
within 25 seconds (that is, if the surface shows a water
break) the surface has failed the cleanness test. If, on
the other hand, the water suddenly flashes out into a film
over a large area, an impurity such as alkali detergent,
etc., is on the surface and it has failed the test. If the
water merges into a continuous film without a sudden
flashout, the surface has passed the water break test.
A solvent wipedown is not required if the surface has
passed a water break test.
b. Insufficient rinsing after cleaning may leave an
unacceptable surface. For best adhesion of coatings,
metallic surfaces should give either a neutral or a slightly
3-4
Change 12
acid reaction when alkaline cleaners are used. Moistened red litmus paper when applied to the surface shall
not react by turning blue. If such color changes occur,
apply a 0.20 to 0.25 percent chromic acid O-C-303 solution until a piece of blue litmus paper applied to the
treated surface turns red, which indicates an acid surface. Permit the acid solution to remain on the surface
from two to five minutes. Follow with a water rinse and
then wipe dry with clean, lint-free cloths.
c. Determine whether the surface has appropriate
surface treatment in accordance with TM 1-1500-344-23
Series.
d. When a special solvent cleaning requirement
exists in aircraft painting operations, use Military Specification, MIL-D-16791, TYPE 1, general purpose detergent, consisting of 1/2 ounce of detergent in a gallon of
water for wipedown. Then wipedown the aircraft with
isopropyl alcohol, TT-I-735. Additionally, each time the
painting sequence of an aircraft is broken overnight or
longer, this same procedure shall be performed immediately prior to application of further coats to insure cleanness and proper paintability of the surface.
e. Examine for presence of corrosion or foreign
matter retained in seams and crevices, etc, and for oily
films or deposits which may have accumulated after
cleaning. If any of these are present, remove or treat
as directed in TM 1-1500-344-23 Series.
f. Assure that all metal surfaces and all seams and
crevices are dry prior to application of paint. Pressurized
filtered air may be used to dry these areas.
g. Non-metallic surfaces should be dry, free of
contamination; all pores sealed and scuff sanded with
an abrasive nylon mat in accordance with Military Specification MIL-A-9962.
TM55-1500-345-23
3-5. MATING SURFACES.
Application, Similar Metals. All seams in
a.
which the mating (faying) surfaces are similar
metals will be protected by applying two coats of
primer to each surface being joined. Welded faying surfaces shall not be primed prior to
assembly. Faying surfaces that are to be
adhesively bonded will be surface treated and
processed as specified in the approved bonding
procedures prescribed for the assemblies concerned. In addition to the required primer
coatings, faying surfaces of magnesium alloys
will be filled with an approved sealing compound.
Change 1
3-4.1/(3-4.2 blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
b. Application, Dissimilar Metals. Each surface
to be joined will receive a minimum of two coats of the
appropriate primer, and, in addition, the following precautions will be taken.
(1) Where magnesium is one of the metals
of dissimilar metal faying surfaces, the metals will be
separated by use of an approved barrier tape. The tape
will extend not less than 1/4 inch beyond the joint edges
to prevent moisture from bridging between the dissimilar metals. Sealing compounds conforming to Military
Speci.cation MIL-S-81733 may be used as moisture
barriers in lieu of tape and when used, the sealing
compound will be applied between the surfaces and
squeezed out of all boundaries and the excess removed
in a manner that will fillet all edges. The fillet width will
be not less than 1/4 inch. Joint areas which would retain
water will be filled with a sealing compound conforming
to Military Specification MIL-S-81733 or MIL-S-7124.
When the use of a barrier tape or sealing compound is
impractical because of mechanical or other factors, a
primed 5356 aluminum alloy shim extending 1/4 inch
will be used in lieu of the tape or sealing compound.
(2) Butt joints consisting of a riveted magnesium
sheet and a riveted dissimilar metal sheet will be protected by grooving the seam to a width of not less than
1/8 inch and filling with sealing compound conforming
with Military Specification MIL-S-81733. The depth of
the groove will be sufficient to retain the sealing compound conforming to Military Specification MIL-S-81733,
which will be subsequently applied and smoothed flush
with the surfaces of adjacent dissimilar metals.
(3) Butt joints consisting of a magnesium sheet
and a dissimilar metal sheet, either of which is secured
by mechanical means other than riveting, will be protected by use of an approved adhesive barrier tape or
a primed 5052 aluminum alloy foil which covers the cut
ends of either or both dissimilar metal sheets and extends not less than 1/4 inch beyond the joint edge.
(4) Organic adhesive barrier tapes or metal foils
will not be used on exterior surfaces.
c. Attaching Parts. Parts, such as nuts, bushings,
spacers, washers, rivets, high-shear rivets, screws, selftapping screws, sleeves for "shakeproof" fastener studs,
self-locking nuts, "speed nuts", clamps, and the like, do
not need to be painted in detail except when dissimilar metals or wood contacts are involved in the materials being joined. Such parts will receive a coat of
epoxy primer, MIL-PRF-23377 (wet or dry, at installation). Rivets (5066) in magnesium alloy need not be
installed with epoxy primer. For magnesium dissimilar
combinations follow the general requirements of paragraph 3-5. Close tolerance bolts passing through dissimilar metals will be coated before installation with a
zinc chromate compound conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-1757, or a wet epoxy primer in accordance
with Military Specification, MIL-PRF-23377. Aluminum
alloy washers (5356) of suitable design will be used under machine screws, countersunk fastners, boltheads,
and nuts that would otherwise contact magnesium.
3-6. MASKING. Masking of specific areas is required
in painting operations on large assemblies or structures
either for protective reasons, as in the precautionary
note below, or for purposes of delineation.
a. Mask areas such as windows, canopies and
large openings with combinations of barrier materials.
(1) Federal Specification MIL-B-121, usually a
treated paper which is oil and moisture resistant.
(2) Federal Specification MIL-B-131, usually a
laminated foil and cloth or foil and paper with good water
vapor resistance.
NOTE
Both types above are heat sealable.
(3) Crepe-backed paper masking tape, Military
Specification MIL-T-21595, Type I.
b.
alone.
Cover small or regularly shaped parts with tape
Change 12
3-5
TM 55-1500-345-23
c. In repetitive spraying of the same or similar
structures, it is advisable to have available pre-designed
bandages, socks, etc., of barrier paper or cloth.
d. Avoid using tape in such a way as to leave a
paint edge on aerodynamic surfaces unless feathering
by sanding can be done safely.
e. Use only approved masking tapes in varying
widths required by the job. A complex or curved area
is better masked initially at the paint edges with narrow
(1/2 inch) tape. Wider tape may then be applied over
the narrow, if required.
f. Use only approved masking paper for large area
masking. Coating solvents may dissolve and deposit
printing ink from newspapers, etc., on the surface of the
area being masked; hence, such materials should be
avoided as masking materials.
g. When spray painting, mask or cover surfaces
at a distance from the area being painted which might
receive over-spray or paint drift.
h. Masking tapes should be removed as soon as
possible after coating application.
i. Press tape firmly at the masking edge when applying it to prevent paint bleeding under it by capillary
action.
NOTE
Care should be taken to insure that paint is not
applied to certain surfaces where paint will interfere with a function. The following should be
masked or otherwise protected during painting:
Machined surfaces that move with respect to
each other such as threads, slip rods, bearing
contacts and gear teeth; electrical parts, such
as contacts, relays, insulators, sockets, plugs,
connectors, wiring and terminals; plastic and
rubber (natural and synthetic) mounts, spacers,
etc, and lubrication fittings, cups, oil holes, etc.
Do not paint interior of bomb racks or other actuators except as noted on manufacturer’s drawing.
3-6
Change 12
3-7.
MIXING.
a. Painting materials shall be prepared for application under dry and clean conditions with dry and clean
equipment.
b. Paint shops shall be equipped with continuous
mechanical paint agitators of suitable capacity. The
proper sequence for preparing packaged materials prior
to each use is as follows:
ture.
(1) Allow materials to come to room tempera-
(2) Remove lids and inspect contents for skinover, gelling, lumps, etc. Skins, if present, shall be
carefully removed and discarded, retaining liquids which
drain from them. Gelled, lumpy or otherwise deteriorated paints shall not be used, but properly discarded.
NOTE
Cans of the pigmented component of MIL-DTL64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint with non-resealable lids should not be opened and inspected
until after the original mechanical agitation, if
practical.
(3) Thoroughly agitate all component containers, using a mechanical agitator prior to mixing or thinning and again prior to and during application. Agitation
must be continuous during application to assure uniformity of pigment.
c. Use automatic mixing and proportioning devices, if possible. When automatic equipment is not
available, mix paint as follows:
(1) Breakup sediment remaining in original container with a clean wood or metal paddle; stir until a
smooth, uniform, heavy paste forms.
(2) Proportion paint in clean mixing container to
the four to one ratio specified. (This applies only to
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. Respirator must be
worn.
TM 55-1500-345-23
(3) Catalytic action begins immediately on mixing. An eight hour pot life can be anticipated after mixing. Ideally, mixed paint should be used in six hours, to
assure the capability for complete system purging and
cleaning to precluded equipment damage.
(4) Assure complete mixing when manual mixing is used.
(5) To avoid the possibility of incompatibility of
materials under the same specification but of different
manufacturers, such materials shall not be mixed.
Primers and topcoats from different manufacturers,
under the same specification, will not be mixed, but
may be applied separately to areas which are to be
over-coated. Every effort shall be made, however, to
assure that an entire topcoat is restricted to the product
of a single manufacturer and, where possible, to the
same batch in order to maintain uniformity of color,
finish, etc.
(6) Application and mixing equipment must be
thoroughly purged and cleaned after use.
Mixing should always be done in areas that are
well ventilated and away from any source of
open flame.
3-8.
Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in serious injury or systemic poisoning of personnel.
NOTE
The wrong thinner may destroy certain characteristics of a coating material without immediately giving visual evidence in the wet state.
Reduced material which has increased in viscosity due
to evaporation will require corrective additions. However, some coating materials which undergo chemical
processes, such as polymerization to create a film, cannot be thinned beyond a certain point and remain usable; nor can they be brought back to the correct viscosity by thinning after the chemical action has progressed
beyond a critical point. This is the case with epoxy and
polyurethane.
b. Thinning shall be controlled by weight, volume
or viscosity measurement to obtain and maintain proper
and uniform consistency. If there is no specification covering the material, thin according to manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE
Do not mix materials of the same specification
but supplied by different manufacturers during
application. This will avoid problems of incompatibility in the liquid and curing phases.
THINNING.
a. When thinning is necessary, always add thinner
to the coating material. Adding coating material to thinner may result in an irreversible separation or degradation of some of the coating ingredients. Thinner should
be added slowly with continual stirring to obtain complete mixing. For all thinning, use only thinners authorized in applicable instructions in this technical bulletin
or pertinent specifications or, in the absence of these
instructions, those recommended by the manufacturer.
MEK can be used in cold weather. Other thinners may
be needed in hot weather.
METHYL ETHYL KETONE
Keep away from heat and open flame.
c. Strain all material to be used in spray equipment through clean 60-90 mesh metal strainers in accordance with paint or equipment manufacturers instructions.
3-9.
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT.
a. Application Systems. The application equipment plays a key role in the overall success of painting
aircraft and aircraft components. Selection of application systems and care thereafter are essential
considerations in the painting process, whether the
system is an automated (robotics) or a manual type.
No description or details are provided herein because
of the wide variances
Keep container closed.
Use with adequate ventilation.
Change 1
3-7
TM 55-1500-345-23
between equipment manufacturers and local conditions.
Each manufacturer’s instructions and other details must
be consulted. Special consideration should be given
equipment with which plural components are to be applied. Problems may be encountered, i.e., required accuracy of mixtures, pot life of mixtures and effects resulting from non-adherence to prescribed application procedures.
(4) Spray Guns,
for Manual Applications. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paints shall
be applied only in approved and qualified facilities. No
application of MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 shall
be accomplished in open air. Interior applications of
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint will be accomplished using personal respirator masks and equipment
prescribed in Table 8-6.
b. Components of Application Equipment.
(1) Automated Systems (Robots). Such systems include, but are not limited to, metering and mixing
equipment, air compressors, air cleaners, electrostatic
generators, spray booths, feed lines and tanks, regulators and computerized automated components.
(2) Hoses. Because of friction losses in hoses,
it is essential that the proper sizes be used. Do not
use hoses longer than 50 feet except in the case of
high pressure air hoses leading to the regulator or tank.
These may be a maximum of 150 feet for painting such
areas as the tail surfaces of exceptionally large aircraft
which are of considerable height above the ground. Extra lengths of hose may be attached for this use but
should be removed when no longer needed. The high
pressure air hose should have a minimum inside diameter of 7/16 inch. No less than 3/8 inch ID fluid hose
should be used from the tank to the gun and no less than
5/16 ID air hose from the regulator to the tank and from
the tank to the gun. Any reduction in size or increase
in length from the forestated may produce unsatisfactory results. Air and paint hoses are furnished in various
standard lengths. Determine the length required for use
in a spray booth measuring the width of the booth and
add two feet for the total required length of the hose.
Hoses should always be thoroughly cleaned by
purging and flushing with solvent appropriate to
the coating material used. When the material is
a catalytic system (epoxy or polyurethane), this
must be done immediately after use and before
the prescribed pot life limit has been reached to
prevent the material from gelling in the system.
(3) Associated Electrical Equipment. As required by manufacturers.
3-8
Change 12
Personal protective clothing, and disposition
thereof, should also conform to OSHA and
NIOSH safety specifications.
(5) Paint Booths and Application Equipment. No description or detail is provided for painting
facilities due to the variance of equipment and local
conditions. Such equipment must, however, conform
to conditions of Tables 8-6 through 8-8. For automated
robotic equipment, manufacturer’s instructions should
be consulted.
(6) Paint Brushes. Paint brushes should be
used during touch-up procedures in open air when
applying MMIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint.
Consult section on touch-up procedures for details.
3-10. PAINT SPRAY GUN TECHNIQUES. When
manual spray applications are employed, techniques
must be used which insure the most uniform and proper
dry thin coating. Spray guns (and spray coatings) are
designed to be used with certain spraying techniques.
Quality of finish will depend on how well these techniques are used. Spraying techniques include the
following:
a. Distance. Depending on the desired width of
the spray pattern, the gun is held six to ten inches from
the work (figure 3-1). If all other adjustments are correct, greater distance will result in dry spray or dusting
and excessive over spray. Holding the gun too close to
the work will result in coatings which are too heavy and
will have a tendency to sag or run.
b. Stroking. The essence of proper stroking is
maintaining the same distance of the gun from
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 3-1. Right and Methods of Spraying
the work, the same speed, and as near to a right angle to
the surface as possible throughout the entire pass. The
natural tendency for spray painters, particularly when fatigued or in an uncomfortable position, is to arc or wave
the gun (figure 3-1). This practice must be avoided at all
costs. In general, wrist movement must be eliminated in
stroking. A flexible wrist almost inevitably causes the
gun to describe a curve instead of remaining parallel to
the surface. This causes a thicker coating to be applied
in the middle of the stroke than at the end. (An exception to the rules is in spotting during touchup. Here it
is permissible to fan the gun to lay down a spot which
is thinner at the edges in order to blend into the larger
painted area.) Touch up here applies only to painting
occurring in an approved facility and not open air touch
up. Special pains must be taken, particularly when applying dense coating materials with poor flow characteristics (such as MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039), that
the gun is held perpendicular to all surfaces (flat or contoured as they are passed).
If this is not done, the irregular spray pattern formed
will lay down uneven thicknesses. Uneven thickness
will cause uneven drying when using single component
paint. Uneven thickness, when MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039 paints are used may cause sagging. Protrusions such as screw heads, etc., present surfaces
that will require facing the gun in several directions to
completely coat them. It may be advisable to spot paint
these in advance. The rate of the stroke should be uniform and such as to lay down a full wet coat of material.
Stroking should be in parallel passes with each stroke
aimed for a 50 percent overlay, or so that the middle of
the spray strikes the wet bottom edge of the previous
stroke (figure 3-3.)
Change 12
3-9
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 3-2. Cross-Coating
Figure 3-3. Fifty Percent Overlap
3-10
TM 55-1500-345-23
c. Triggering. Proper triggering of the gun is difficult to learn and can only be developed by practice.
It is a matter of judgement and sensitivity of touch and
variations of triggering technique may be called for in
special situations. In general, the painter should begin
his stroke before triggering the gun and release the trigger before stopping the stroke. It is intended to feather
out the end of a stroke so that the end of a succeeding
overlapping stroke will blend into it. Examine of correct
techniques are shown in figure 3-1.
NOTE
A reasonable amount of care will maintain spray
guns and spray equipment in top operating condition and prevent a majority of spraying difficulties. Thorough cleaning immediately after
use and appropriate lubrication of equipment
are essential. Care should be taken to not allow
gelling to occur for any particular mixed batch
of plural component paint. The system should
be purged and flushed after use of each mixed
batch to avoid system stoppages, and batch
mixes.
d. Setting Spray Pattern. See Fig 3-4 for recommended adjustments.
3-11.
PAINTING DIFFICULTIES AND REMEDIES.
a. Coating troubles may be divided into six
groups: (1) Inadequate surface preparation (including
temperature), (2) incorrect methods or techniques of
application, (3) unusual and unsuitable climatic and
atmospheric conditions, (4) unsuitable and improperly adjusted equipment, (5) faulty finishing material
or improperly mixed or agitated components and (6)
systems not purged of previously mixed materials. An
experienced finisher may be capable of adjusting to
obtain proper results with faulty materials, but this is
an emergency measure only and must be with the
cognizance and authority of the quality control facility. The practice is not advised. Incorrect methods of
application should be discontinued upon discovery of
the discrepancy. Areas painted prior to the discovery
of such discrepancies must be inspected and remedial
measures taken when necessary. Brushing and roller
coating on certain surfaces must be used in confined
areas. Remedying incorrect applications, however,
also calls for training. The practice of allowing inadequately trained personnel to apply MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 coatings, particularly to aeronautical
surfaces, is unauthorized and dangerous. Unusual or
unsuitable climatic and atmospheric conditions are normally not a problem since manual spray painting must
be accomplished in an approved facility which usually
compensates for such conditions. Unsuitable or faulty
equipment can only be remedied by obtaining proper
equipment or repair. Table 3-1 shows common troubles
of spray coating operations with suggested remedies or
methods of avoidance.
b. Faulty spray patterns and suggested corrections are shown in Fig 3-5.
c. Blushing of coatings is the result of water condensation from the atmosphere within, or on, an applied
organic film. It occurs when the temperature of the work
surface falls below the prevailing dewpoint. (It shall always be looked for in production coating whenever other
than average atmospheric conditions prevail). It shows
as a lighter-than-normal or bleached discoloration or increased opaqueness of the film. It may occur to the extent that a surface powder develops which can be removed by fingernail or by light rubbing. (Rubbing will
not cure the condition). It may be almost imperceptible, and blushing inducing conditions may escape notice
on test panels sprayed prior to production coating due
to the temperature differences between test and production environment. Though MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039 painted items are not susceptible to water
or moisture damage immediately after proper application to items. Great care must be taken to avoid surface
condensation prior to coating or water induction, in any
form, into unmixed components or the mixture prior to or
during application. Water will not affect the cure process
after proper application. Water will affect paints other
than plural component catalytic paints.
Change 12
3-11
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 3-4. Setting Spray Pattern.
3-12.
FILM THICKNESS (AIRCRAFT SURFACES).
a. Film applied either too thick or too thin will have
reduced effectiveness in service. (See MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039 for recommended film thickness applicable to standard coatings for aircraft. Recommended
minimal dry film thickness is 1.8 mils). Attaining proper
coating thickness by spraying is a matter of technique,
plus periodically checking the work. There is a limit to
the thickness that can be applied at one pass because of
possible sagging of the film, and often this must be considered in obtaining the ultimate desired thickness of all
paints. Also, there is a tendency with coating materials
of good hiding power to increase the spreading rate as
the work progresses and this must be curbed. Changing
3-12
Change 12
atmospheric conditions, during operations, may have to
be compensated for in order to continue applying a uniform film. Frequent checks with a wet film thickness
gage, if available, should be made during painting to
ascertain and control film thickness. Thickness cannot
be gaged accurately without instruments, but, lacking
these, the best assurance of consistent films is in correct initial adjustment of gun and material and the use of
good judgement.
NOTE
Care should be taken that proper measurements are made when extremely rough texture paint is applied, e.g., MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 aircraft green.
TM 55-1500-345-23
PATTERN
CAUSE
(A) DRIED OUT PACKING AROUND MATERIAL
NEEDLE VALVE PERMITS AIR TO GET INTO FLUID
PASSAGEWAY. THIS RESULTS IN SPITTING.
(B) DIRT BETWEEN FLUID NOZZLE SEAT AND BODY
OR A LOOSELY INSTALLED FLUID NOZZLE WILL
MAKE A GUN SPIT
(C) A LOOSE OR DEFECTIVE SWIVEL NUTON
SIPHON CUP OR MATERIAL HOSE CAN CAUSE
SPITTING.
FAN SPRAY PATTERN THAT IS HEAVY IN THE
MIDDLE, OR A PATTERN THAT HAS AN UNATOMIZED
"SALT-AND-PEPPER" EFFECT INDICATES THAT THE
ATOMIZING AIR PRESSURE IS NOT SUFFICIENTLY
HIGH.
DRIED MATERIAL IN WING
PORT "A" RESTRICTS
PASSAGE OF AIR THROUGH
IT AND PRODUCES A
CRESENT FULL PRESSURE
OF AIR FROM CLEAN WING
PORT FORCES PATTERN IN
DIRECTION OF CLOGGED
SIDE.
SPRAY PATTERN WIDER OR
HEAVIER AT EITHER END IS
CAUSED BY DRIED MATERIAL
AROUND THE OUTSIDE OF
THE FLUID NOZZLE TIP. B
RESTRICTS THE PASSAGE
OF ATOMIZING AIR AT
ONE POINT THROUGH THE
CENTER OPENING OF AIR
NOZZLE AND RESULTS IN
PATTERN SHOWN. THIS
PATTERN CAN ALSO BE
CAUSED BY LOOSE AIR
NOZZLE.
CORRECTION
TO CORRECT CAUSE (A). BACK UP
KNURLED NUT C, PLACE TWO DROPS
OF MACHINE OIL ON PACKING, REPLACE
NUT AND TIGHTEN WITH FINGERS ONLY.
IN AGGRAVATED CASES, REPLACE
PACKING.
TO CORRECT CAUSE (B), REMOVE
FLUID NOZZLE D, CLEAN BACK OF
NOZZLE SEAT IN GUN BODY USING RAG
WET WITH THINNER, REPLACE NOZZLE
AND DRAW UP TIGHTLY AGAINST BODY.
TO CORRECT CAUSE (C), TIGHTEN OR
REPLACE SWIVEL NUT E.
INCREASE PRESSURE FROM YOUR AIR
SUPPLY. CORRECT AIR PRESSURES
ARE DISCUSSED ELSEWHERE IN THIS
INSTRUCTION SHEET.
DISSOLVE MATERIAL IN SIDE PORT WITH
THINNER. DO NOT POKE IN ANY OF THE
OPENINGS WITH METAL INSTRUMENTS.
IF DRIED MATERIAL IS CAUSING THE
TROUBLE, REMOVE AIR NOZZLE AND
WIPE OFF FLUID TIP, USING RAG WET
WITH THINNER. TIGHTEN AIR NOZZLE.
Figure 3-5. Faulty Patterns and Suggested Corrections (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 12
3-13
TM 55-1500-345-23
REDUCING AIR PRESSURE WILL
CORRECT CAUSE (A). TO CORRECT
CAUSE (B), OPEN MATERIAL CONTROL
TO FULL POSITION BY TURNING TO
LEFT. AT THE SAME TIME TURN SPRAY
WIDTH ADJUSTMENT TO RIGHT. THIS
WILL REDUCE WIDTH OF SPRAY BUT
WILL CORRECT SPLIT SPRAY PATTERN.
A SPLIT SPRAY OR ONE THAT
IS HEAVY ON EACH END OF
A FAN PATTERN AND WEAK
IN THE MIDDLE IS USUALLY
CAUSED BY (A TOO HIGH AN
ATOMIZING AIR PRESSURE,
OR (B) BY ATTEMPTING TO
GET TOO WIDE A SPRAY
WITH THIN MATERIAL.)
Figure 3-5. Faulty Patterns and Suggested Corrections (Sheet 2 of 2)
b. Coating Thickness Measurements. Wet and
dry .lm gages are available as local purchase items
from various laboratory or paint supply houses. If paint
film thickness measuring instruments are not available,
small (5 x 16 inches) anodized aluminum test panels will
be employed for the measurement of the paint thickness
after drying. These panels will be applied to each side of
the fuselage prior to the painting operation. One end of
the panel should be masked with tape for a distance of
approximately two inches to provide a comparison of the
original panel system. Removal of the panel after application of the epoxy primer is recommended so that immediate touch-up operations can be employed to cover
those areas previously protected by the panel. This procedure will also permit relocating of the panel on various
portions of the same aircraft to provide a good indication
of the overall paint thickness application. The location of
the panel is dependent upon inspection procedures and
may vary throughout the aircraft. Each aircraft should
possess a panel for each operator employed on the air-
SECTION II
3-13.
GENERAL.
a. Use, General. Primers are used on metals to
provide a coating to which subsequent coatings will
firmly adhere and provide protection for the substrate
metal against corrosion. The pigment portion of primers
for ferrous base metals usually consists of iron oxide,
chromate, red lead, zinc chromate, zinc oxide, zinc
dust, or a mixture of these. Zinc olstrontium chromate
is the pigment in some primers used on substrates of
3-14
Change 12
craft and it should be identified by the name of the operator, aircraft model, and the date of painting in order
to provide follow-up data during any subsequent service
evaluation. The panel is applied by the use of a small
section of one-inch width masking tape doubled upon itself with the adhesive side contacting the panel and the
aircraft surface. Slight errors in paint thickness measurement can exist due to thickness tolerances permitted by the basic aluminum procurement specification.
This factor must be taken into consideration in the measurement of the thickness of the paint deposit. Measurement of the paint thickness is best accomplished by the
use of an ordinary micrometer possessing flat contact
surfaces when smooth textured paints are used. Micrometers possessing pointed or rounded contact surfaces are recommended when extremely rough textured
paints are used. At least six readings should be taken on
both painted and unpainted portions of each test panel
to provide an average paint thickness measurement.
PRIMERS
magnesium, aluminum and their alloys. Other primers
which are lead and chromate free are desirable for most
applications and required in applications where lead
and zinc chromate are prohibited.
b. Use, Aircraft. Primers are used as corrosion-inhibiting coatings on aircraft metal surfaces to
inhibit corrosion and provide good adhesion for the
topcoat. Primers will conform to Military Specification
MIL-P-52192, MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-PRF-85582.
TM 55-1500-345-23
3-14.
PRIMERS.
a. MIL-PRF-23377 Primer. This is an epoxy
polyamide primer furnished as a two- component kit
wherein the two components are mixed prior to use. It is
intended for application to clean aluminum and magnesium substrates. One component contains the pigment,
mixed in an epoxy vehicle, while the other component
consists of a clear polyamide solution which functions
as a hardener for the epoxy resin. These components
are packaged separately and have excellent storage
stability. When mixed, storage life is eight hours. Only
that amount which can be used in an eight hour period
should be mixed.
b. MIL-P-85582 Primer. This is a water reducible
two component epoxy primer intended for use on nonferrous alloys where volatile organic emission is a problem.
c. MIL-P-53030 Primer. This is a water reducible
epoxy primer for use on ferrous alloys where volatile organic emission is a problem.
d. MIL-P-53022 This is a lead and chromate free
primer that may be used as an alternate to MIL-PRF23377 on pretreated ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
Change 12
3-15
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION III
FINISH PAINTING: GENERAL
ACETONE, ASTM-D329
Acetone is extremely .ammable and toxic to
skin, eyes and respiratory tract. Wear protective
gloves and goggles/face shield. Avoid repeated
or prolonged contact. Use only in well-ventilated areas (or use approved respirator as determined by local safety/industrial hygiene personnel). Keep away from open flames, sparks,
hot surfaces or other sources of ignition.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in serious injury or systemic poisoning of personnel.
3-15. MIL-DTL-64159 OR MIL-DTL-53039. The
Army standard tactical topcoat for aircraft is fully
described in Chapter 4. Acetone can be used to differentiate between acrylic lacquer (MIL-C-46159) and
polyurethane (MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039) or
epoxy MIL-C-22750 coatings. Wipe the coating with a
cloth saturated with acetone. Acrylic lacquer coating
will be dissolved but properly cured MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 coating will not.
CARC MIL-DTL-64159 can be used as a replacement
for MIL-C-46168 and MIL-DTL-53039 CARC topcoats.
3-16. MIL-PRF-85285 COATING: POLYURETHANE,
HIGH SOLIDS.
a. Use. This aliphatic urethane finish is formulated
for protection of areas exposed to chemicals and solvents and is intended for exterior or interior use on aircraft and other applications. It is a two component paint
with a highly weather-resistant gloss finish used as a
topcoat over epoxy primers, MIL-PRF-23377 and MILPRF-85582. It may be used in areas where air pollution
regulations are in force. This finish is intended for use
by exception only in accordance with the provisions of
Chapter 5.
b. Top Coat (Mixing and Thinning). Consult MILPRF-85285 or paint manufacturer’s instructions.
c. Application.
(1) Clean per Chapter 2, Section I.
3-16
Change 12
(2) Strip old finish (if needed) per Chapter 2,
Section II.
(3) Apply metal conditioning per Chapter 2,
Section III.
(4) Apply primer per Chapter 3.
(5) Apply paint per MIL-PRF-85285 or manufacturer’s instructions.
(6) Apply a full wet coat to dry filn, thickness of
1.0 to 1.5 mils.
d. Touch-up of Polyurethane System. Closely
inspect candidate areas for extent of damage and/or
touch-up required. If inspection reveals major paint or
primer failure or damage, such as chipped or peeled
paint from the center of a skin panel, the involved
skin section should be prepared and touched up from
seam to seam. If only minor damage is found, e.g.,
paint chipped or missing from screw/rivet heads and on
outer edges of skin panel(s) the specific area may be
prepared and touched up. Prepare damaged area(s)
and paint as follows:
(1) Thoroughly clean area to be repainted.
(2) Feather edges of coating adjacent to peel
section and scuff sand the other area(s) to be coated.
Use 280 grit paper or nylon abrasive matting, Military
Specification MIL-A-9962, very fine for scuff sanding.
TM 55-1500-345-23
(3) Solvent wipe scuffed area(s) with thinner,
Military Specif cation MIL-T-19588.
(4) Apply one thin coat of epoxy primer, Military
Specif cation MIL-PRF-23377 on area to be touched up.
(5) Apply one full wet coat of thoroughly mixed
polyurethane topcoat. If required, apply a second coat
after allowing 1 to 4 hours curing period for the f rst coat.
(6) Touch up shall be accomplished with brush
and rollers only in open areas.
NOTE
This must be accomplished with full adherence
to provisions of health and safety cited elsewhere and herein.
3-17.
INSPECTION.
a. Waterbreak Test.
b. Viscosity Test.
See Paragraph 3-4.
See MIL-F-18264.
c. Test Panel. Prior to spraying operations, the
suitability of materials for the entire system shall be
determined experimentally on a panel approximately 10
to 32 inches in size. The panel shall be coated under
prevailing conditions with the f nish system that is to be
applied. If the f nish system applied to the experimental
panel is satisfactory, full scale operations may begin.
Defects found in the experimental application such
as blushing, poor adhesion, excessive orange peel,
sagging, etc, shall be corrected prior to large scale
application.
NOTE
MIL-F-18264 is inactive for new design. Inactive for new design notice. An inactive for new
design notice shall be prepared to indicate that
an item covered by a specif cation or specif cation sheet is prohibited from being used in new
design and is used only in existing equipment
or for future contracts to buy more of existing
equipment. Structures division. MIL-F-18264,
while inactive, still applicable for existing equipment.
d. Adhesion Test. See MIL-F-18264.
e. Gloss Test. (Not applicable to MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039 paints). See MIL-F-18264.
f. Smoothness Test. See MIL-F-18264.
g. Film Thickness Test. See paragraph 3-12.
3-18. MIL-DTL-53039
a.
MIL-DTL-53039 is a aliphatic polyurethane,
single component, chemical agent resistant coating
(CARC) used as a f nish coat on tactical equipment. It
is a moisture cured f nish which is lead free and chromate (hexavalent) free, and has a maximum voc of 420
gm/1 (3.5 lbs/gallon) volatile organic compounds. This
coating is applied over epoxy primers MIL-P-53022,
MIL-P-53030 or MIL-PRF-85582. It can be applied over
a CARC basecoat which is thoroughly cleaned and is
at least set to touch or completely cured. It should not
be applied over an existing alkyed or lacquer f nish.
b. Top coat (mixing and thinning). Consult MILDTL-53039 or paint manufacturer’s instruction.
c. Application.
(1) Clean per Chapter 2, Section I.
(2) Strip old f nish (if needed) per Chapter 2,
Section II.
(3) Apply metal conditioning per Chapter 2,
Section III.
(4) Apply primer per Chapter 3.
(5) Apply paint per MIL-DTL-53039 or manufacture’s instructions.
d.
Touch up of polyurethane system. If the old
f nish is in good condition, clean the surface with MILT-81772 thinner, to remove all contaminates such as
grease, oil or fuel residue, and apply the topcoat. Areas
sanded down to bare metal shall be pretreated, primed
and then topcoated. Scratches or light damage to top
coat will have to be scuff sanded at the damaged area.
Prepare damage area and paint as follows:
(1) Clean area to be painted.
(2) Mask or tape the area to be repaired or
touched up per Chapter 3, Section I.
(3) Scuff sanded area to be painted.
(4) Wipe down area to be painted with a clean
rag wet with MIL-T-81772 thinner to remove loose sanding debris and f ngerprints.
(5) Apply evenly one coat of epoxy primer over
the area to be touched up. Allow epoxy primer to dry a
minimum of 1 hour or until dry to touch before topcoating.
(6) Apply topcoat evenly to blend with the original surface around the area to be touched up. The total thickness of previous coating shall be checked prior
to reworking. The coating thickness, existing plus rework, shall not exceed a dry f lm thickness of 1.8 mils.
MIL-DTL-53039 will dry set to touch in approximately
15 minutes, dry hard in 90 minutes, dry through in four
hours, with a complete cure in seven days. At 60°F
(16°C), MIL-DTL-53039 requires twice as long to cure.
(7) Touch up shall be done in open areas when
using brushes or rollers.
Change 12
3-17
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 3-1.
TROUBLE
Sags and runs
Manual Spray Coating Troubles, Possible Causes, and Remedies
POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. Dirty air cap and fluid tip (distorted spray
pattern).
2. Gun stroked too close to the surface.
PREVENTIVE MEASURES OR REMEDIES
1. Remove air cap and clean tip and air cap
carefully.
2. Maintain 6 to 10 inches distance from
surface.
3. Trigger not released at end of stroke (when 3. Release the trigger after every stroke.
stroke does not go beyond object).
4. Gun stroked at wrong angle to surface.
4. Keep gun at right angle (perpendicular) to
surface during stroke.
5. Heat material by approved methods.
5. Coating material too cold.
6. Develop ability to apply thicknesses by
6. Coating piled on too heavy.
panel practice.
7. Coating material thinning too much.
7. Add the correct amount of solvent by
measure or determined by viscosity test.
8. Incomplete mixture of components.
8. Continuous agitation of mixture.
NOTE
Streaks
Pot life must be considered when using plural component paint. Pot life
is approximately 8 hours after mixing.
Serious gelation occurs after 6 hours,
at which point viscosity will impede the
flow and ultimately completely stop the
system. It is recommended that the system be flushed after 6 hours to preclude
damage to the system.
1. Remove air cap and clean tip and air cap
1. Dirty air cap and fluid tip (distorted spray
carefully.
pattern).
2. Insufficient or incorrect overlapping strokes. 2. Follow the previous stroke accurately.
Deposit a wet coat.
3. Gun stroked too rapidly (dusting of the paint). 3. Avoid whipping. Make deliberate, slow
strokes.
4. Gun stroked at wrong angle to surface.
4. Keep gun at right angle (perpendicular) to
surface during stroke.
5. Stroking too far from surface.
5. Maintain 6 to 10 inches from surface.
6. Too much air pressure.
6. Use least air pressure necessary.
7 Split spray.
8. Coating material too cold.
Paint will not
1. Out of paint (gun begins to sputter).
come from spray
gun
3-18
7 Clean the fluid tip and air cap.
8. Heat material to get good flow-out. (Use
authorized heat methods).
1. Add paint, correctly thinned out and
strained.
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 3-1. Manual Spray Coating Troubles. Possible Causes. and Remedies — (Continued)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE
Paint will not come
from pressure tank
Paint wiII not come
from suction CUP
Excessive material
loss
PREVENTIVE MEASURES OR REMEDIES
1.
Lack of proper air pressure in the pressure
tank
1
Check for Ieaks or Iach of air entry.
2.
Air intake opening inside of pressure
tank lid, clogged by dried rnaterial.
2.
This is a common trouble. Clean the opening
periodically
3.
Leaking gaskets on tank cover
3.
Replace with a new gasket.
1.
Dirty fluid tip and air cap.
1.
Remove all air cap and clean tip and air cap
carefully
2.
Clogged air vent on cup cover.
2.
Remove the obstruction.
3.
Using wrong air cap.
3.
Ascertain and use correct setup.
4.
Leaky connections on fluid tube or nozzle.
4.
Check for leaks under water and repair.
1.
Not triggering the gun at each stroke.
1.
It should be a habit to release trigger after
every stroke
2.
Stroking at wrong angle to surface.
2.
Gun should be stroked at right angles to surface.
3.
Stroking gun 100 far from the surface.
3.
Stroke the gun 6 to 10 inches from the surface.
4.
Wrong air cap or fluid tip.
4.
Ascertain and use correct setup.
5.
Depositing a film of Irregular thickness.
5.
Learn to calculate the depth of wet film of finish and develop control.
6.
Air pressure too high.
6.
Use the least amount of air necessary.
7.
Fluid pressure too high.
7.
Reduce pressure. If pressure keeps climbing.
clean regulator on pressure tank.
8.
Coating material too cold.
8.
Heat to enable reduced air pressure. (Use
authorized heat methods)
3-19
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 3-1. Manual Spray Coating Troubles. Possible Causes, and Remedies – (Continued)
PREVENTIVE MEASURES OR REMEDIES
TROUBLE
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Failure of wet tape
test
Insufficient drying time on wash primer and/or
epoxy primer: Insufficiently cleaned surface:
cleaning compound residue. etc. Oil seepage
throughout inspection doors and blind rivets
(especially jet aircraft) entrapped oils and soil in
epoxy shop primer: excessively aged primer:
insufficient removal of shop primer and/or preViOUS coatings: use of final finishes incorporating wax ingredients: use of laundered rags
instead of new mill ends: use of water-sensitive
primer not conforming to specification
requirements: seepage of water containing
cleaning compound residues from between fraying surfaces.
Employ initial wipedown. using safety solvent
followed by thinner as an auxiliary cleaner. Rinse
with clear clean water when enzymatic cleaner i S
used: remove all shop primers to provide a clean
surface prior to any coating: primer shop coat
elirnination preferred as 011 removal from shop
primer coats practically Impossible. employ sol
vent-dampened cloths in Iieu of dry cloths for
removal of oil contamination. Allow aircraft to
stand for a sufficient time to permit drainage of
effluent before final cleaning note the type of failure. such as to bare metal or intercoat failure. and
select the applicable cause and remedy accordingly.
Lifting
1.
Absorption of solvents by previous partially
dried film.
1.
Allow coal to dry before recoating. (Applicable only to single component paint.)
2.
Second coats apt 10 lift if poorly prepared
surface.
2.
Begin with properly prepared surface
3.
Use compatible coatings and thinners
(figure 3-16)
Pitting or cupping
(figure 3-17)
1.
Rust under surface.
1.
Drain Iines periodically.
2.
Oil or grease on surface.
2.
Use proper thinner proportions.
3.
Moisture in lines.
3.
Strip and clean: or sand down and repaint
4.
Trapped solvents.
NOTE
Excessive spray fog
(figure 3-6)
Sandpaper finish
(figure 3-10)
3-22
Do not mix materials and/or components of different manufacturers.
1.
Too high air pressure.
1.
Use least amount of air pressure necessary
2.
Spraying past surface of the product.
2.
Release trigger when gun passes target.
3.
Wrong air cap or fluid tip.
3.
Ascertain and use correct setup
4.
Gun stroked too far from the surface.
4.
Stroke the gun 6 to 10 inches from surface
5.
Material thinned too much.
5.
Add the correct amount of solvent by meassure or test.
1.
Unsatisfactory wash primer or primer.
1.
2.
Excessive dirt contamination from painting
area.
2.
Laboratory analysis to verify acceptability of
the material: check wash primer and primer
application procedures.
Provide cleaner painting areas.
3.
Insufficient scuff-sanding of wash primer or
primer.
3.
Scuff-sand wash primer using No 320 and
wet-or-dry abrasive. paper P-C-451.
4.
Improperly cleaned paint lines.
4.
Flush paint lines frequently with solvent.
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 3-1.
Manual Spray Coating Troubles. Possible Causes. and Remedies — (Continued)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE
Paint will not come
from spray gun
PREVENTIVE MEASURES OR REMEDIES
5
Dried overspray.
5. Sand the complete finish until smooth to the
fingertips.
1.
Settled. caked pigment or gelling paint
blocking gun ttp.
1. Remove obstruction. stir paint thoroughly.
2
Grit. dirt. paint skins. etc. blocking gun lip.
fluid valve or strainer.
2. Clean spray gun thoroughly and strain the
coating material. Always strain materials
before using.
3-23
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 3-6. Excessive Spray Fog
Figure 3-7. Paint Leaks From Spray Gun
Figure 3-8. Gun Sputters Constantly
3-24
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 3-9. Orange Peel
Figure 3-10. Sandpaper Finish
Figure 3-11. Wrinkling
3-25
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 3-12. Crazing
Figure 3-13. Checking
3-26
Figure 3-14. Blistering
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 3-15.
Figure 3.16. Lifting
Fish-Eyes and Poor Wetting,
Crawling, Poor Flowout
Figure 3-17. Pitting or Cupping
3-27/(3-28blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
3-19. TOUCH UP OF CONDUCTIVE COATING ON
UH-60 COCKPIT DOOR. The UH-60 cockpit doors
are bonded assemblies made of Kevlar. The doors are
coated with conductive coating, Choshield-2002, for
EMI shielding. Scratches or light damage to conductive
coating will have to be scuff sanded at the damage
area. Repair damaged area and paint as follows:
a. Lightly sand damaged area using 280 grit abrasive cloth.
b. Wipe damaged area with solvent, MIL-T-81772
Type 3, to remove surface contamination.
c. Apply one coat of epoxy primer, MIL-PRF23377. Allow primer to dry at least one hour to eight
hours.
Volatile and toxic fumes occur when using solvents, causing both a .re and a health hazard.
Provide proper ventilation and protective clothing, including eye shield, when using solvents.
Avoid breathing vapors and skin contact as
much as possible. Wash contacted skin with
soap and water. If solvent contacts eyes, flush
them with clean water and get immediate medical help.
To prevent damage to Kevlar laminate, do not
allow solvents to contact exposed fibers. Do not
allow solvents to remain in contact with Kevlar
laminate.
d. Conducting coating can be thinned to spray viscosity with thinner MIL-T-81772.
e. Apply three coats of conductive coating, P/N
Choshield-2002, to make 0.003 to 0.004 inch thick coat.
Allow 1/2 hour minimum drying time between coats.
f. After the last coat, the conductive coating shall
be allowed to dry for one hour minimum.
g. Apply top coat evenly to blend with original surface around the area to be touched up. The top coat
thickness shall not exceed a dry film thickness of 1.8
Mils.
h. Touch-up shall be done in open areas when using brushes or rollers.
Change 12
3-29/(3-30 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 4
TACTICAL PAINT SCHEME
SECTION I
4-1.
(5) De-icing boots.
GENERAL.
a. The coating system and painting scheme in this
section is the Army standard for tactical helicopters. The
finish coat provides a lusterless, low visibility and low
reflectance surface in various military conditions.
b. This aircraft green topcoat conforms to MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. This topcoat is to be
applied over primer conforming to MIL-PRF-23377 or
MIL-P-85582. Advantages of MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039 top coating are its properties of resistance to
chemical agents, increased abrasion and impact resistance, improved exposure and weathering performance
and superior longevity.
c. Aircraft green paint, MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, is rougher textured than most paints.
This is intended, pursuant to achieving low reflectivity
requirements.
4-2.
HELICOPTERS
EXTERNAL AREAS NOT TO BE PAINTED.
a. Areas Not to be Painted (General). Do not
prime or apply any paint to any of the following exterior
surfaces:
(1) Light lenses, windows, and windshields.
(2) Wires and cables (electrical).
(3) Areas containing slippage or tolerance
marks unless the slippage or tolerance marks can be
retained (1/2" masking tape may be used to cover
marks).
(6) Reinforced impregnated flexible ducting.
nas.
(7) Plastic or ceramic insulators for radio anten-
(8) Rods that move in and out of hydraulic cylinders, on portions contacting a mating surface. Non-contact surfaces will be coated.
(9) Piston portion of landing gear struts and
shimmy damper, where surfaces are mated.
(10) Interior and opening of pitot tube.
(11) Pitot static opening.
(12) Static ground receptacle.
(13) All bearings, races, and rod ends. Apply
masking over, and 3/4 inch beyond, bearings, races,
and rod ends. Masking will be snug and complete to
prevent any spray from entering bearings, races, and
rod ends.
(14) All hydraulic fittings. Apply masking to
cover fittings and about one inch of tubes.
(15) Ambient air thermometer probe.
(16) Required conspicuity markings.
(17) Previously unpainted Aircraft Survivability
Equipment.
(4) Rubber and cloth boots and dust covers.
Change 12
4-1
TM 55-1500-345-23
b.
Deleted
4-3. PREPARATION OF MIL-DTL-64159 OR
MIL-DTL-53039 POLYURETHANE PAINT.
and proportionally mix the two components directly at
the spray gun nozzle. Since the two components are
kept separate, the pot life consideration is also eliminated.
a. Polyurethane, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039 paint is a plural component, low reflective paint
formulated to be lead and chromate free. The components of this paint must be thoroughly mixed prior to
pouring into the application container when transfer is
necessary. Care should be taken that all of the pigment
matter has been included in the mixture.
e. The polyurethane paint can also be applied by
conventional, airless, or electro-static spray equipment.
In cases where this type of equipment is used, the viscosity can change. The applicator should check with the
paint company and equipment supplied for the exact criteria for viscosity, thinning and the best application processes.
b. Mixing and application equipment. Mixing requirements for the two component polyurethane paint,
when applying by conventional air atomized or airless
spray is to mix four parts of Component A, which is the
polyester portion, to one part of Component B, which is
the catalyst or isocyanate portion. After the two components are mixed, the total mixture is left to stand for
at least 30 minutes to deaerate. The mixture (batch) is
then thinned to the proper viscosity depending upon the
spray equipment. The mix at the specified ratio will produce a pot life of eight hours. Therefore, no more paint
should be mixed than can be used in an eight hour shift
or period.
f. Whatever spray equipment is used, it is necessary that all spray guns, lines and nozzles, when applicable, be thoroughly cleaned after use to prevent hardening of the coating system. If the coating hardens in the
system, the system cannot be cleaned. That portion of
the unit in which the paint has gelled or hardened, must
be discarded.
c. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint must
be thinned to spraying viscosity, determined by the
user and the type of spraying equipment to be used.
A suggested starting point is obtained by mixing approximately four volumes of mixed MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 paint and one volume of MIL-T-81772
thinner. The paint must be thoroughly mixed with the
thinner and continuously agitated during application.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint is a
catalytic paint and will cure under most atmospheric conditions after application. However,
at very low temperature, curing is retarded.
d. Where quantities permit, and to eliminate the
30 minute deaeration time and potential waste, plural
component spray units can be used which automatically
4-2
Change 12
g. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint may
be applied over a wide range of temperatures. Temperatures from 50° F (24° C) to 90°F (32° C) are recommended for best results.
NOTE
h. Test the mixture, pressure and spray equipment settings by applying a test coating to masking
paper or similar smooth surfaces prior to application
to aircraft or components. Adjust paint and/or equipment until proper test coating is achieved. Paint and
equipment are then ready for application to aircraft or
components.
TM 55-1500-345-23
4-4. PROCEDURES FOR APPLICATION OF
MIL-DTL-64159 OR MIL-DTL-53039 PAINT TO BARE
METAL SUBSTRATES. The total paint system for the
polyurethane coating as with all other paint systems,
requires cleaning, a pretreatment coating, an anticorrosive primer and the polyurethane topcoat. This applies
to painting of bare metal substrates.
a. Cleaning. The substrate should be thoroughly
cleaned of all oil, grease and other contaminants by appropriate methods cited elsewhere herein or as specified in TT-C-490.
b. Pretreatments. TT-C-490 finishing documents
e.g., MIL-STD-193, MIL-STD-186, MIL-T-704, etc., provide appropriate directions for surface preparation. For
steel substrates, the pretreatments to use are zinc phosphate or wash primer conforming to DOD-P-15328. For
aluminum, substrates, the pretreatment is alodine, MILC-5541.
c. Anticorrosive Primers. The anticorrosive
primers to be used with the MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 paint system are the epoxy type.
SECTION II
d. Topcoat. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
coating is applied at 1.8 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness
in two coats. The first should be applied in one to four
hours of the application of the primer. The second coat
may be applied within a few minutes of the first coat or
anytime thereafter. The total thickness of the topcoat
should not exceed 3.0 mils. There is no maximum
time between application of the first and second coats,
ideally within two hours. No surface preparation, except
for cleaning, will be necessary as long as the surface
has not become contaminated, e.g., with dirt or grease.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 coating fully cures
in 7 days.
e. MIL-DTL-64159 CARC topcoat is a alternate to
CARC MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. MIL-DTL64159 has been evaluated and approved for use by the
AMRDEC Materials Branch, Structures and Materials
Division.
FIXED WING AIRCRAFT
4-5. GENERAL. The tactical paint system is a threecoat system consisting of a chemical conversion coating applied to bare metal, followed by an intermediate
primer coat, MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-85582 and then
finish-painted with a lusterless topcoat.
4-6.
The epoxy primer to use with steel substrates is
MIL-P-52192 and for aluminum and magnesium substrates is MIL-PRF-23377, or MIL-P-85582.
MATERIALS.
a. The chemical conversion coating will conform
to MIL-C-5541 for aluminum and MIL-M-3171 for magnesium.
b. Intermediate primer will conform to Military
Specification MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-85582
4-7.
PROCEDURE.
a. Clean and prepare aircraft surfaces for painting
in accordance with Chapter 2.
b. Apply chemical conversion coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
c. Apply primer in accordance with the applicable
specification.
d. Apply finish coats in accordance with instructions relating to application of MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039 polyurethane coating.
c. Aircraft Gray paint will conform to Military Specification MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. For exceptions to aircraft gray, see Chapter 5.
Change 12
4-3
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION III
4-8. GENERAL. All markings, letterings, and numerals, including the identification lettering UNITED
STATES ARMY, and radio call numbers, will be applied
with Aircraft Black #37038 in compliance with instruc-
SECTION IV
MARKINGS
tions in Chapters 7, 8, 9 and 10. As an alternate, black
lusterless enamel may be used, overcoated with a clear
polyurethane in accordance with MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039.
PROPELLER ASSEMBLIES AND BLADES
4-9. GENERAL. Details of the color scheme for propeller assemblies are in Chapter 6.
SECTION V
AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS
4-10. GENERAL. Aircraft components that are installed on an aircraft will be painted as follows:
a. New components shall be processed with
MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-85582 primer and painted
with Interior Aircraft Gray #36231, per MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039 or Aircraft Black #37038, per
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 (as indicated in
paragraph 1-5b) or MIL-C-22750 of the same color.
b. Recycled components shall be oversprayed
with a mist coat of MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-85582
unless condition of primer indicates a necessity for strip-
SECTION VI
4-12. TOUCH UP AND REPAIR WITH MIL-DTL64159 OR MIL-DTL-53039. If there is not extensive
Change 12
c. Zinc chromate shall not be used as a primer,
unless it is subsequently oversprayed with MIL-PRF23377 or MIL-P-85582.
d. Previously painted surfaces of Aircraft Survivability Equipment will be painted. Caution shall be taken
to avoid any coating of radiating or receiving surfaces or
windows of this equipment.
APPLICATION TO PREVIOUSLY PAINTED SURFACES
(ROTARY AND FIXED WING)
4-11. GENERAL. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
polyurethane paint must be applied over properly prepared subsurfaces. This paint shall not be applied over
topcoats other than MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
painted equipment. Because of weight considerations,
overcoating over MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
paint shall be restricted to small areas.
4-4
ping to bare metal, at which time the item will be completely refinished. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
or MIL-C-27750 paint shall be applied as the top coat.
damage to the paint and touch up is for cosmetic purposes only or to cover up areas that are slightly marred
or scratched, a supplemental polyurethane coating
may be applied over the existing polyurethane finish.
This must be done only on small areas and must be
accomplished by brush application. No special surface
preparation is necessary except for cleaning. If a small
area is broken or damaged down to the substrate material, that area must be sanded, reprimed and topcoated.
See paragraphs 4-3 and 4-4.
TM 55-1500-345-23
4-13. TOUCH UP AND REPAIR WITH MIL-DTL64159 OR MIL-DTL-53039. Aircraft which are totally painted with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
paint must be touched up using MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039. No special surface preparation is necessary except for cleaning. If a small area is broken or
damaged down to the substrate material, that area must
be sanded, reprimed and topcoated. The epoxy primer
to use with steel substrates is MIL-P-52192 and for aluminum and magnesium substrates is MIL-PRF-23377
or MIL-P-85582. See Chapter 3, Section II, "Primers"
for details on primer use and application. Extensive
topcoat areas may be repaired by renewing the topcoat
over existing primer if the primer is in good condition.
4-14. PREPARATION OF MIL-DTL-64159 OR
MIL-DTL-53039.
a. Low reflective paint, MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, must be thoroughly mixed in the original container prior to pouring into the paint application
container.
NOTE
Paint application equipment must be clean
prior to first use of MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039. Halts of 5 minutes or longer
duration during application will require flushing
of the paint lines and spray gun to remove dried
particles prior to restarting application.
b. Thoroughly mixed paint, MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, with appropriate thinner and retarder
(as required) should be poured into the paint application
container only in quantities required for use that day.
NOTE
IMMEDIATELY after adding paint and thinner/retarder, agitation should be started and
operated for 1 to 3 hours prior to paint application. Paint agitation should be continuously
maintained on liquids in the paint application
container.
c. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 must be
thinned to spraying viscosity. A suggested starting point
is obtained by mixing one volume of MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 with approximately one and one-half
volumes of thinner composed of MIL-T-81772, Type III.
The exact thinning ratio must be determined by the user
and adjusted to the prevailing temperature and relative
humidity. An acceptable alternate thinner consists of
2 parts by volume toulene (TT-T-548) and 1 part by
volume xylene (ASTM D846). The exact ratio of thinner
to paint must be determined by user and adjusted to the
prevailing temperature and relative humidity.
d. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 may be applied over a wide temperature range of 40 °F (24°C) to
90 °F (32 °C), and wide humidity range of 15 to 70%.
High temperature and/or low humidity may result in dry
spraying. High temperature and/or high humidity may
result in blushing. To prevent these conditions and to
provide a satisfactory finish, MIL-E-7125, Ethylene Glycol Monoethylether Acetate (cellosolve acetate or commercial equivalent such as Sherwin-Williams R7K206)
may be required to first and second coat, and should
be added. Add up to 30% acrylic retarder (MIL-E-7125
or commercial equivalent) as required, depending on
temperature and humidity. (The higher the temperature
and/or humidity, the more retarder required.)
e. Test the mixture, pressure and spray settings
on masking paper or similar smooth surfaces prior to
aircraft application to assure proper pigment disbursement. Large solids in test spray are indicative of dry
spray and/or insufficient mixing. Add thinner, retarder
and/or mix for a longer period of time, and retest as required to attain smoothest possible surface finish.
4-15. PROCEDURES FOR APPLICATION OVER
PROPERLY PREPARED SURFACES.
a. Apply two coats of MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039 lacquer to a dry film thickness of about 1.5 mils.
Change 12
4-5
TM 55-1500-345-23
b. Apply first coat in continuous over-lapping
strokes. Going back over partially dried areas will cause
excessive surface roughness.
and will dry sufficiently for flight in approximately four
hours. Markings may be reapplied at any time after the
paint is dried.
c. Allow first coat to air dry for approximately thirty
minutes. Remove all dust and dry overspray by lightly
wiping with a lint free cloth and blowing with clean air.
Apply second coat as in b above. After two coats, film
thickness should be approximately 1.5 mils.
e. Do not reapply black paint to anti-glare areas
because MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 is sufficiently dark to act as anti-glare. Application of heat
resistant paint on the fuselage is not required.
d. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 will dry sufficiently to be touched in approximately thirty minutes
4-6
Change 12
f. When required, the low reflective paint and
epoxy primer may be stripped by applying MIL-R-81294,
remover, paint epoxy, and polyurethane systems.
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 5
NON-TACTICAL PAINT SCHEMES
SECTION I
5-1. SCOPE. This chapter is limited to non-tactical
paint schemes for specific geographic locations and
missions other than tactical. Non-tactical paint schemes
were developed to provide high visibility in congested
areas, to enhance post-crash survival in hazardous terrain, or to identify a specific mission of an aircraft. The
information in this chapter is provided to help the major
Army field commanders, with authorized deviations,
to select the appropriate paint scheme commensurate
with the aircraft mission and location. In most cases,
the standard tactical paint schemes in Chapter 4 are
required.
5-2.
AUTHORITY.
a. Major Army field commanders may apply for
deviation for the standard tactical paint scheme depicted
in Chapter 4 by writing to AVSCOM, ATTN: AMSAVMEA, who has the authority to grant the deviations. Research and development aircraft which are the responsibility of project or systems managers are exempted from
this requirement.
b. Authority to use unique non-tactical paint
schemes, markings, insignia, etc. that are different
from those described in this chapter, must be approved
by the major Army field commander and deviation
GENERAL
requests subsequently submitted to AVSCOM, ATTN:
AMSAV-MEA, with complete justification (such as
safety, mission requirement, cost reduction, etc.), and
sketches or photographs describing the unique paint
schemes. (See paragraph 1-4.)
5-3. WHEN TO PAINT NON-TACTICAL PAINT
SCHEMES.
a. Aircraft in depot overhaul will be painted to a
non-tactical paint scheme during overhaul if the major
Army field commander, to whom the aircraft will be assigned, requests a specific non-tactical paint scheme,
or if it is otherwise known that the aircraft will be definitely assigned to a mission or geographic location that
requires a specific non-tactical paint scheme.
b. Newly-assigned aircraft that are known to have
a limited length of assignment for a special non-tactical
mission or location should not be repainted to a nontactical paint scheme.
c. Assigned aircraft having the standard tactical
paint scheme of Chapter 4 may be repainted to a nontactical scheme when the long-range mission or location of the aircraft is such as to require a non-tactical
scheme.
Change 2
5-1
TM 55-1500-345-23
5-4. PAINT IDENTIFICATION. Where non-tactical paint schemes are authorized, the finish coat
specified in the non-tactical paint schemes may be
obtained by use of the polyurethane MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039 or MIL-C-83286MIL-C-83286. See
Chapter 3 for appropriate primers.
5-5. SHADE NUMBERS. The shade numbers of
some colors of non-tactical finish coats are as follows:
Gloss olive drab
14084
Gloss white
17875
SECTION II
Gloss black
17038
Gloss red
11136
Gloss international orange
12197
Fluorescent red-orange
MIL-P-21600
5-6. FINISHING SYSTEM. The finishing or coating
systems (sequence of paint starting from bare metal)
for non-tactical paint systems are shown in Chapter 3.
SPECIFIC
5-7. ROTOR BLADES AND PROPELLER ASSEMBLIES. Paint schemes for rotor blades and propeller
assemblies are covered in Chapter 6.
authorized. See Chapters 9 and 10 for figures showing
details of high conspicuity markings for aircraft used for
training.
5-8. MARKINGS. Lettering, wording, insignia, etc.
for non-tactical paint schemes shall be the same as
for standard tactical aircraft unless specifically stated
otherwise in this technical manual.
c. The use of high conspicuity tape in place of fluorescent paint on flat or slightly curved aircraft surfaces
offers a better marking for a longer period of time due to
its durability, resistance to fading and quick turn around
to the tactical configuration when necessary. Tests indicate that the tape does not fade in one year of use,
whereas fluorescent paint tends to fade in about four
months. Tape has limited application because it hides
cracks and corrosion. Tape is to be applied only as
shown in illustrations. To eliminate hidden corrosion,
the tape shall not be applied over seams. Nonperforated tape shall not be applied over rivet heads, but perforated tape may be applied over rivet heads. Where
necessary, the tape may be removed by the application
of paint remover, MIL-R-81294.
NOTE
Do not paint items currently unpainted, e.g., antenna masts, loops, antenna housing, radomes,
exposed portions of operating mechanisms,
transparent panels and anti-glare areas.
5-9.
TRAINING AIRCRAFT.
a. TDA helicopters and fixed wing aircraft for training purposes may require additional vivid color schemes
and markings to provide high conspicuity due to inexperienced student pilots flying in congested training areas.
b. The fuselage of the training aircraft will be
the standard tactical paint schemes of Chapter 4.
In addition, areas of fluorescent red-orange paint
(MIL-P-21600), or tape may be used when required and
5-2
Change 12
d. TDA helicopters and fixed wing aircraft, used
for training purposes, that are presently painted with international orange, in good condition, will not be refinished with fluorescent paint or tape. They will be maintained with international orange until complete repainting is required.
TM 55-1500-345-23
5-10. AIRCRAFT IN CONGESTED AREAS. TDA
helicopters and fixed wing aircraft assigned to CONUS
areas with high aircraft density may have the same high
conspicuity paint schemes used for training aircraft,
when approved as specified in paragraph 1-4.
5-11.
AIRCRAFT FOR ARCTIC AND DESERT.
a. The paint scheme for tactical aircraft in arctic regions will be aircraft green unless otherwise designated
by the major Army field commander.
b. If directed by the major Army field commander,
TDA helicopters and fixed wing aircraft destined for arctic, or desert regions which have not been designated
combat areas, may be painted all white, desert sand
or with high conspicuity paint schemes as described in
Chapters 9 and 10.
c. In general, there will be a highly conspicuous
band around the front and the rear of the fuselage. Vertical fins, horizontal stabilizers, and tips of wings on fixed
wing aircraft will also have highly conspicuous areas or
bands. Details for specific aircraft are shown in Chapters 9 and 10.
d. Highly conspicuous schemes will facilitate locating downed aircraft in the event of a forced or crash
landing on ice, snow, or in desert areas. Highly conspicuous color schemes favor visibility in the arctic and
desert.
e. To reduce peeling of paint in extremely cold
locations (arctic, Alaska, etc.), the paint system should
consist of alodine treatment, MIL-PRF-23377 epoxy
primer, and appropriate urethane paints.
5-12. TEST SUPPORT AIRCRAFT. Aircraft utilized
by White Sands Missile Range and other desert test or
development activities. Test Support Aircraft category,
may be painted in the high conspicuity arctic or desert
paint scheme as described in Chapters 9 and 10.
5-13. MEDICAL RESEARCH AND GEODETIC AIRCRAFT. During peacetime, aircraft for these services
may be painted with the high conspicuity arctic or desert
paint scheme as described in Chapters 9 and 10.
5-14. GREENLAND ICECAP AIRCRAFT. Aircraft operating in the area of the Greenland ice cap may be
painted entirely with international orange to ensure better inflight conspicuity and post-crash survivability.
5-15.
MEDICAL SERVICE AIRCRAFT.
a. Army aircraft used as ambulance aircraft will be
painted with the tactical paint scheme of Chapter 4, and
will bear red cross insignia on a white field positioned on
the most suitable surface to be visible from either side,
from the ground and from the air. (See Chapter 9).
b. The crosses will be in aircraft Red, No. 31336,
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 and the field in aircraft White, No. 37875, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039. The overall dimension of the cross depends on
available space. The width and length of each protrusion of the cross is one-third of the overall dimension,
the white field will be square.
5-16. MILITARY ASSISTANCE PROGRAM AIRCRAFT. All aircraft as signed to the Military Assistance
Program (MAP) will conform to the tactical paint scheme
of Chapter 4 except that they will possess no insignia,
US Army markings, or aircraft serial numbers. MAP
aircraft will be identified by three metal tags, citing serial
number, affixed in three conspicuous within the aircraft.
5-17.
STAFF TRANSPORT (VIP) AIRCRAFT.
a. Fixed wing aircraft, which have been designated as staff transport aircraft are to be painted in
accordance with the paint schemes shown in Chapter
10.
Change 12
5-3
TM 55-1500-345-23
b. Staff transport aircraft being prepared for a
combat area may be converted to the tactical paint
scheme of Chapter 4, at the request of the major Army
field commander.
5-18. RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT AIRCRAFT. The provisions of this manual will be used as
required in determining the painting and markings to be
applied to research and development air vehicles. The
following markings are considered mandatory for all
5-4
research and development air vehicles: Identification
lettering U.S. ARMY or ARMY, the national insignia, and
the vehicle serial and model numbers, and conspicuity
painting. Additional authorized markings will be applied
as required. All research and development air vehicles
will be conspicuously marked with the identification
lettering U.S. ARMY or ARMY on all sides when exterior
views of the item are photographed or when the item is
on public display.
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 6
FINISHES FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS: GENERAL
SECTION I
6-1. AIRCRAFT FINISHES. This chapter shall
present requirements for finishes for specific applications and applications not heretofore explicitly included.
a. All areas currently primed but unpainted
will remain unpainted.
Reprimed areas will use
MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-85582, e.g., under floorboards, inside tailbooms, and behind acoustical mats.
b. Acoustical mats, light curtains, cargo covers,
troop seats and like materials will not be painted.
6-2. SURFACE PREPARATION. Surfaces will be prepared and primed as specified in Chapter 2, prior to application of any top coat.
6-3.
a.
APPLICATION.
Gloss finishes will be used as specified herein.
b. Polyurethane finish,
MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft green will be used for all Army
helicopters, except as excluded per paragraph 1-10.
6-4. COLORS. Colors will conform to Federal Standard 595 or the applicable military specification. Military
Standard 795 is a supplementary document to the standard. Colors as Federal Standard 595 or Military Standard 795 are designated by three digit numbers in the
ANA bulletins and by five digit numbers in the Federal
standard. Colors of paint compounds are identified by
numerical coding system.
a.
The first digit identifies the gloss of the color.
(1) The numeral one indicates gloss.
(2) The numeral two indicates semigloss.
GENERAL
b. The second digit identifies the selected color
classification group.
(1) The numeral one indicates red.
(2) The numeral two indicates orange.
(3) The numeral three indicates yellow.
(4) The numeral four indicates green.
(5) The numeral five indicates blue.
(6) The numeral six indicates gray.
(7) The numeral seven indicates white or black.
c. The last three digits identify the approximate order of increasing diffuse reflection.
6-5. DECALS. Stencils will be used in lieu of decals
where possible. If it is absolutely necessary to use
decals, they will be locally manufactured or obtained by
alternative sources. Aircraft decals will not be stocked,
stored or issued. Decals conforming to the requirements of Military Specification MIL-P-38477, plastic
film for marking aircraft, may be used lieu of paint on
gloss painted aircraft for external and internal markings
within the size limits specified herein or as otherwise,
stated in paragraph 7-2. Large, one piece decals are
unsatisfactory because of application difficulties. Decals may be pressure sensitive, adhesive backed, and
scored, but otherwise conforming to Military Specification MIL-P-38477. Pressure sensitive decals should be
applied in accordance with TM 1-1500-204-23 (Series).
Pressure sensitive decals are not recommended for use
on MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 painted aircraft
except where stencil lettering size is impractical.
(3) The numeral three indicates lusterless.
Change 12
6-1
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION II
6-6.
PROPELLER ASSEMBLIES AND ROTOR BLADES
GENERAL
a. Purpose. The finish used on propellers and rotor blades is applied to prevent corrosion or deterioration
of the underlying surfaces, to resist erosion from sand
particles, dust, for anti-glare purposes, to decrease visibility of tactical aircraft used in some areas.
b. Paint Schemes and Shades. Paint schemes
and shades for propeller assemblies and rotor blades
are shown in Chapters 8, 9, and 10.
c. Tactical vs Non-Tactical Optimum High Visibility Schemes. Propeller assemblies and rotor blades
of tactical aircraft in tactical areas or in normal CONUS
areas shall be painted according to the standard tactical
paint schemes. The non-tactical optimum high visibility
paint schemes for propeller assemblies and rotor blades
are permissible for TDA helicopters and fixed wing aircraft, as cited in paragraph 1-4. These schemes are to
provide high visibility of propellers and rotor blades under the following conditions:
(1) High density aircraft on the ground to reduce
the risk of personnel walking into propellers or tail rotor
blades.
(2) High density aircraft in the air to reduce midair collision by making the aircraft below more visible.
(3) Visibility of downed aircraft in arctic, jungle
or desert areas.
(4) Visibility of downed VIP aircraft.
(5) Visibility of aircraft in a training environment.
d. Requirement. Before selecting the optimum
high visibility paint scheme, commanders should give
consideration to the requirements for funds, painting
and balancing equipment, and personnel to properly
support the high visibility paint scheme.
e. Replacing Previous Schemes. Propellers
and blades painted to previous non-tactical paint
6-2
Change 12
schemes need not be repainted to the optimum high
visiblitiy scheme unless repainting is needed for other
reasons, such as excessive retouching or overhaul.
TOE/MTOE helicopters which are painted with low
reflective tactical paint schemes using MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft green, or aircraft grey, will
not have the striped high visibility paint scheme applied
to main or tail rotor blades. These aircraft will have
blades painted in accordance with MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black #37038.
f. Precedence. Concerning touchup, over painting, stripping, paint application and balancing; if the
contents of this TM disagree with instructions in the
aircraft maintenance manual or in overhaul manuals,
the latter manuals take precedence over this TM.
g. Touchup. When necessary, propellers and
blades may be lightly touched up between overhaul
periods while installed on the aircraft. Care will be
exercised to apply proportionate amounts of paint to
each blade to maintain proper balance. Where touchup
paint can be applied to all blades of an assembly in
proportionate amounts, balance need not be accomplished. This is not to be interpreted as an authorization
for deletion of propeller or blade balance at overhaul, or
at any other time, when balancing is normally required.
h. Overpainting for Optimum High Visibility. The optimum high visibility non-tactical stripes
in Chapters 8, 9 and 10 will not be added over the
existing tactical paint scheme. Similarly, the tactical
paint scheme will not be added over the high visibility
paint scheme. The blades should be stripped, painted
and rebalanced.
i. Stripping. Ensure all blade data and markings
are obtained prior to stripping paint from blades so that
the same data and markings may be restenciled on
applicable blades subsequent to repainting. Propeller
blades of fixed wing aircraft will not be stripped during
aircraft repainting unless necessary.
TM 55-1500-345-23
NOTE
When rotor blades are bonded construction, the
original finish should not be stripped because
of possible harmful effects of paint strippers
on bonding agents and adhesives. Personnel
should consult applicable maintenance manuals for removal of old paint finishes from these
blades.
j. Paint Application. When applying primer or finish coats, the blades and propellers must be in a horizontal position, and retained in that position until the
paint or primer has set. Primer and finish coats should
be sprayed on lightly and uniformly. Surfaces will be
prepared and primed as specified in Chapter 2 unless
otherwise directed. Topcoat finishing materials should
conform to those materials listed herein.
k. Balancing. After complete repainting or extensive touch-up, the propellers and blades must be rebalanced in an intermediate maintenance or overhaul maintenance facility.
Painting of main rotor, tail rotor, and propeller
blades may create out-of-balance and unacceptable vibration conditions. Strict adherence
to instructions is required to reduce the probability of creating these out-of-balance conditions. Care must be exercised to apply proportionate amounts of paint to each blade to maintain proper balance.
NOTE
CH-54 main and tail rotor blades shall be
painted and balanced by the overhaul activity
only.
AH-64 main and tail rotor blades complete repainting or extensive touch up should be accomplished at an approved overhaul facility because of balance requirements.
Complete repainting of main and tail rotor
blades on UH-60 and OH-58 aircraft is normally accomplished during blade overhaul only.
Main and tail rotor blades are individually balanced (spanwise and chordwise) to master
blades during overhaul after painting to insure
interchangeability between blades of the same
configuration. Painting of blades in the field
may cause subsequent interchangeability problems.
NOTE
Minor touch up is only needed.
l. Paint Procedures for Drive Shaft and Couplings.
Polish out all surface defects with Scotch Brite (7447-B
TYPE II) (26066). Touch up polished area with paint
epoxy primer base 1-1G-69 (06367) and epoxy primer
hardener 1-H-75 (06367) or a suitable substitute. First
apply a wash primer (MIL-C-8514 TYPE 1) NSN 803001-015-6104. Allow to air dry for 1 hour.
6-7.
PROPELLERS.
a. For tactical aircraft.
(1) Follow Chapters 9 and 10 on a specific aircraft if it contains details about painting blades, spinner
or hubs.
(2) If sufficient data does not exist in Chapters
9 and 10, the standard tactical finish shall be Aircraft
Black, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, No. 37038,
on both sides.
(3) The exterior surface of unplated hubs, fore
and aft, will be painted with Aircraft Black, MIL-DTL64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, No. 37038.
(4) Deleted
Change 12
6-3
TM 55-1500-345-23
b. For non-tactical aircraft.
(1) The blades may be painted with stripes per
Figures 8-8, 8-9 and 8-11.
(2) On all propellers, paint the stripes on the
front side, and aircraft black on the back side. Plated
hubs remain unpainted. Spinners to be painted as
shown on figure 8-8.
6-8.
MAIN ROTOR BLADES.
NOTE
Complete repainting of rotor blades should be
accomplished at an approved overhaul facility
or depot activity. The weight and balance of
blades is critical and complete repainting is not
allowed by field units. Refer to applicable maintenance manual for extent of painting blades.
a. For tactical aircraft. The upper and lower surface of main rotor blades shall be finished in Aircraft
Black, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, No. 37038.
b. For non-tactical aircraft.
(1) The under surface of the blades shall be finished in aircraft black.
(2) The upper surface of the blades will be
painted with stripes per figure 8-8 and 8-13. Note that
the outer two stripes are the same on all blades.
(3) For additional visibility in arctic areas, the
outer 25% of the blades may be painted fluorescent red
orange. The remaining portion of blades will be divided
into 15% black and white segments as shown in the figures.
(4) Deleted
(5) The rotor and hubs and control mechanisms
shall be painted aircraft black, except for mating, load
bearing or dynamic surfaces.
c. Identifying dots of various colors will be installed by the contractor on mounted blades for the
purpose of matching blade with identifying color on the
hub. Blades ordered individually will not have identifying dots installed by the contractor, but will be added by
field personnel as required.
6-4
Change 12
6-9.
TAIL ROTOR BLADES.
NOTE
Complete repainting of rotor blades should be
accomplished at an approved overhaul facility
or depot activity. The weight and balance of
blades is critical and complete repainting is not
allowed by field units. Refer to applicable maintenance manual for extent of painting blades.
a. For tactical aircraft.
(1) Prime blade surfaces with epoxy type
MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-85582. Apply primer in accordance with Chapter 3.
(2) Both sides of the blades will be painted
Aircraft Black, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, No.
37038.
(3) The rotor hubs and control mechanism shall
be painted aircraft black, except for mating, load bearing
or dynamic surfaces.
b. For non-tactical aircraft.
(1) Prime blade surfaces with primer MIL-PRF23377 or MIL-P-85582. Apply primer in accordance with
Chapter 3.
(2) Both sides of the blades may be painted with
stripes per figure 8-8 and 8-13. Note that the outer two
stripes are the same on all blades in figure 8-13.
(3) Application of stripes to tail rotor blades involves a 20% offset of non-concentric sections so as to
provide concentric rings during rotation. Careful attention should be given to figures 8-8 and 8-13 when applying this paint scheme.
(4) Deleted
(5) The rotor hubs and control mechanism shall
be painted aircraft black, except for mating, load bearing
or dynamic surface.
(6) Deleted
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION III
6-10.
AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR LANDING GEAR AND WHEELS
LANDING GEAR.
a. Helicopters. Helicopters skids and skid structures will be painted in the same manner as the fuselage,
with aircraft green, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
When repainting helicopters, the skids will be removed
from the aircraft, the skid wells and enclosures will be
inspected, cleaned and repainted. The removed skids
will be inspected, cleaned or stripped, as appropriate,
repainted and reinstalled on the aircraft.
b. Fixed Wing Aircraft. Landing gear of fixed wing
aircraft will be processed in same paint as the fuselage.
SECTION IV
Mating, dynamic or load bearing surfaces, e.g., oleo pistons will not be painted. Landing gear of non-tactical aircraft will be painted color 17925, MIL-C-83286.
6-11.
WHEELS.
a. Wheel wells of tactical aircraft will be painted
Aircraft White, No. 37875, per MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039.
b. During repainting, wheel wells will be thoroughly cleaned but not stripped.
WALKWAY COATINGS
6-12. WALKWAYS. Walkway coatings conforming
to Military Specification MIL-W-5044 will be applied
on wing roots and heavy duty exterior traffic areas
of all aircraft and overcoated with MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft green or aircraft black.
Walkway coating conforming to Military Specification
MIL-W-5044, Type II may be applied directly over any
primed, enamelled or acrylic nitro-cellulose lacquer
surfaces of the aircraft exterior. These areas must be
overcoated with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
aircraft green or aircraft black. The wing root walkways
will be applied on both wing roots to a width of 18 inches
measured from the fuselage and will extend from just aft
of the leading edge to just forward of the trailing edge.
The exact width may vary from the 18-inch requirement
for specific aircraft. Safety walk, pressure sensitive material conforming to Military Specification MIL-D-17951,
Type III, may be used as an option, but is not recommended. When such materials are used, they must
be overcoated with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
paints. Particular attention must be given the edges to
assure good adhesion and sealing with MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039 paint.
NOTE
DELETED
a. Application Procedures for Walkway Coating,
Military Speci.cation MIL-W-5044.
(1) Apply walkway coating in accordance with
application instructions in Military Specification MIL-W5050.
(2) After each coat, allow a minimum drying time
of 1/2 hour.
(3) After final coat, allow walkway coating to airdry until set to touch before handling.
Change 12
6-5
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 6-1.
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas To Be Painted
ITEM
AH-64
CH-47
OH-58
UH-60
Metal framework, doors and windows
X
X
X
X
Windshield frames
X
X
X
X
Metal structure, walls and ceilings
X
X
X
X
Glare shields, top and bottom and
exposed operating accessories
X
X
X
X
Instrument panels (metal structures)
X
X
X
X
Frame of pedestals or consoles
X
X
X
X
Seat frames, crewstations and cargo
compartment
X
X
X
X
Armor panels (omit rubber edging)
X
Metal portions of control systems
X
X
X
X
Crewstation handles, exit emergency
X
X
X
X
Foot control arms, rudder pedals and
support brackets
X
X
X
X
Exposed metal parts of air vents
(except swivel joints)
X
Exposed metal parts of logbook holder
X
X
X
X
Crewstation deck (including areas
visible from chin bubble, where
applicable)
X
X
X
X
Cyclic control sticks and adjustment
mechanisms
X
X
X
X
1
X
X
Other fixed wing aircraft currently have commercial interior paint schemes not
applicable to this table.
6-6
Change 12
*
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 6-1.
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas To Be Painted — Continued
ITEM
AH-64
CH-47
OH-58
Collective control system, except lock
X
X
X
Ash trays
X
X
X
X
Pedestal or console panel (sides)
X
X
X
X
Spare bulb holder (mask spare bulbs)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Overhead consoles (sides and edges)
UH-60
Radio transmit foot switches (some
masking required)
X
X
X
X
Blanking plates on consoles or
pedestals
X
X
X
X
Crew and passenger stations
X
X
X
X
Canopy egress system and explosive
charge covering (exposed Teflon cord
must be masked with Scotch Cal tape
prior to painting)
X
Restraining bands and brackets for fire
extinguishers
X
X
X
X
Framework supporting transilluminated
panels (lift panels to paint frame)
X
X
X
X
Hand holds
X
Seats (adjusted to the most forward,
aft and vertical positions to assure full
paint coverage)
X
X
Seat tracks, except sliding surfaces
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Collective pitch down lock (markings
in Orange-Yellow No. 33538, after
painting)
Overhead console and switches
(transilluminated). Touch-up, i.e., light
scratches and crazing
*
X
X
X
X
X
Change 12
6-7
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 6-1.
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas To Be Painted — Continued
ITEM
Directional control pedal adjuster (all
adjust knobs/levers, except plastic)
AH-64
CH-47
OH-58
UH-60
X
X
X
X
External cargo mechanical release
systems
X
X
Fuel shut-off valve handle and guard
Pilot’s and copilot’s directional and
wheel brake pedals
Inertial reels
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Hydraulic lines in chin bubble (mask
identification tapes or replace)
Avionics brackets in chin bubble
6-8
X
Shoulder harness lock/unlock controls
X
X
All accessory compartments
accessible from outside
X
X
Change 12
X
X
X
*
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 6-2.
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas Not To Be Painted
ITEM
AH-64
CH-47
OH-58
OV-1
UH-60
*
NOTE
In general, the goal is not to paint those items that .ex, issue instructions, or
are transparent.
Windows and windshields (mask inside
and out to avoid overpaint/overspray
and premature replacement)
X
X
X
X
Fire extinguishers
X
X
X
X
X
X
Oxygen cylinders
First aid kits
X
X
X
X
X
Restraint systems, including buckles
(seat belts and shoulder harnesses
should be removed to avoid overspray
and premature replacement)
X
X
X
X
X
Seat cushions
X
X
X
X
X
Plastic material in seats
X
X
X
X
X
Instrument cases and glass (including
magnetic compass and outside air
temperature gage)
X
X
X
X
X
Rod end bearings
X
X
X
Electrical outlets
X
X
X
X
Emergency handles
X
X
X
All placards, markings, and data
plates (yellow-orange stencils must be
restenciled)
X
X
X
X
X
1
Other fixed wing aircraft currently have commercial interior paint schemes not applicable to
this table.
Change 12
6-9
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 6-2.
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas Not To Be Painted — Continued
ITEM
AH-64
CH-47
OH-58
OV-1
UH-60
Flexible ducts made of fabric or rubber
X
X
X
X
X
Soundproofing blankets, fabric
covered panels
X
X
X
X
X
Key lock ignition switch (requires
masking)
X
X
X
X
X
X
Pedestal panel (top)
Deleted
Padded windshield wipers and/or
rubber components
6-10
Governor control switch on copilot’s
collective stick head
X
X
X
X
Face of pilot’s collective stick head
X
X
X
X
Terminal boards
X
X
X
X
X
Microphone control cords
X
X
X
X
X
Cockpit utility lights
X
X
X
X
X
External stores panel and jettison
handle
X
X
X
X
Compass switch
X
X
X
X
Turret control panel
X
Change 12
X
*
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 6-2.
Typical Aircraft Interior Areas Not To Be Painted — Continued
ITEM
AH-64
CH-47
OH-58
OV-1
UH-60
Calibrated ADF loop antenna control
X
X
X
X
X
Armament system sighting units
X
Caution panels
X
X
X
X
X
All information and radio panels
X
X
X
X
X
Static pressure lines
X
X
X
X
Pilot’s and copilot’s control stick
handles
*
X
Pilot’s and copilot’s thrust control rod
end bearings
X
Boots around control rods
X
X
X
X
Hydraulic lines and fittings
X
X
X
X
X
X
Station 95 bulkhead
Collective pitch down locks (where
painted yellow)
X
X
X
Console panel (top)
X
X
X
Pilot’s and copilot’s cyclic control
handles
X
X
X
X
Pilot’s and copilot’s collective control
rod end bearings
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
Other fixed wing aircraft currently have commercial interior paint schemes not applicable
to this table.
Change 12
6-11
TM 55-1500-345-23
NOTE
Full hardness is attained within maximum drying
time of 24 hours.
(4) After walkway coating is completely dry,
sand all edges to fair in with adjacent finished area.
Walkways will not be polished or waxed.
b. Treatment After Neutralization. Treat affected
area by swabbing with 5 percent solution of chromic
acid, Federal Specification 0-C-303, or 5 percent of
potassium bichromate, Federal Specification 0-P-559,
followed by flushing with water and thorough drying.
c. Painting. After the above neutralization and
treatment, apply the following paint system:
(5) Apply MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039
paint over entire compound and over edges.
(1) Apply two (2) coats of epoxy polyamide
primer, MIL-PRF-23377, Type I or Primer, MIL-P-85582.
6-13. ANTIGLARE COATINGS. Helicopters painted
with tactical paint schemes do not require antiglare paint
forward of windshield.
(2) Apply (over these coats) one (1) coat of
primer coating epoxy, MIL-P-52192.
6-14.
BATTERY COMPARTMENTS.
a. Neutralization.
(1) Acid Electrolyte. Exercise care to prevent
acid from spreading to adjacent areas. Wash areas
affected by battery acid with 20 percent solution of
sodium bicarbonate, Federal Specification 0-S-576,
in water. Neutralization is completed when bubbling
ceases. After neutralization, remove all traces of
sodium bicarbonate solution with generous quantities
of water to prevent corrosion.
(2) Alkaline Electrolyte. Exercise caution to
prevent acid from spreading to adjacent areas. Wash
areas affected by electrolyte with 3 percent solution of
boric acid in water. Neutralization is completed when
bubbling ceases. After neutralization, remove all traces
of boric acid solution with generous quantities of water.
6-12
Change 12
NOTE
Coating (1), MIL-PRF-23377, is yellow. When
wear, scratching, or other topcoat damage occurs, the yellow or gray primer undercoats will
be exposed indicating that repainting is necessary. This is essential to protect aluminum or
magnesium composite structures.
d. Touchup. Using organizations may touch up
the battery areas after proper neutralization.
(1) Acid Battery. One coat acid-proof varnish
TT-V-51.
(2) Alkaline Battery. One coat MIL-C-83231,
Type II coating.
TM 55-1500-345-23
6-15.
HIGH TEMPERATURE AREAS.
a. Below 400° F (204° C).
(1) Surfaces exposed to exhaust gases, corrosive fluids, environmental elements, and areas known to
be subject to corrosive attacks for which ambient temperatures do not exceed 350 °F (177 °C), finish in accordance with (2) through (3) below.
(2) Apply two coats of MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039 paint, in appropriate color, over one coat of
epoxy primer, MIL-PRF-23377 or primer MIL-P-85582.
(3) Areas and components fabricated of magnesium or steel, other than corrosion resistant steel,
that are exposed to temperatures exceeding 300°F
(149°C), but not above 400°F (204°C), either on the
ground or in flight (other than momentarily), finish with
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 in appropriate color.
Use primer, MIL-P-52192, where ferrous metals are
involved.
Shade No. 34087 for Olive Drab and TT-P-28, Color
Shade No. 17178, for aluminum.
NOTE
These are modified silicone paints which require heating to 450° F (232° C) for an hour after application. However, when applied to turbine engine surfaces, the heat generated in normal operation is considered adequate for curing. Cured silicone paints will resist the attack
of diester oils.
(2) On areas and components fabricated of
magnesium or steel, other than corrosion resistant
steel, that are exposed to temperatures, from 400° F to
500° F (204° C to 260° C), use silicone finish systems
applied directly on the chemical surface-treated metal,
omitting the wash prime and primer. Unless authorized
by the government procuring activity, the color will conform to the color scheme for the aircraft. Above 500°
F (260° C) use heat-resistant finishes as approved in
each instance by the government procuring activity.
b. Above 400° F (204° C).
(1) Coat aluminum alloy surfaces with heat resistant paint, military specification MIL-P-14105 Color
(3) Deleted.
c.
Deleted.
Change 12
6-13
TM 55-1500-345-23
6-16. RUBBER. Do not paint rubber components, either natural or synthetic.
6-17.
ANTENNAS AND RADOMES.
a. If aircraft are painted without removing antennas and radomes, thoroughly mask the antennas and
radomes.
b. Use the applicable TM 11 series manual for
guidance on painting antennas.
6-14
Change 8
c. On fixed wing aircraft, finish leading edges of
antennas and radomes exposed to the airstream with
rain-erosion-resistant system conforming to Military
Specification MIL-C-83231 or MIL-C-83445 (See 6–33).
d.
Radomes are not to be stripped or painted.
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION V
6-18.
INTERIOR PAINTING
GENERAL.
a. General Information for Painting
Crewstations.
(1) All tactical rotary wing aircraft crewstations
shall be painted Aircraft Black, No. 37038, per MIL-DTL64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. Tactical fixed wing aircraft
shall be painted lusterless gray, per MIL-C-8779. Interior marking stencils shall be Aircraft White, No. 37875,
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. When decals are
used, they shall be white vinyl ink letters on a lusterless
black background.
Paint residue can retard free movement of flight
and power controls causing unsafe conditions
leading to a crash. Therefore, check all flight
and power controls before flights following
painting of aircraft interiors. Emergency handles should also be checked for freedom of
action.
(2) See Table 6-1 for items to be painted. See
Table 6-2 for items not to be painted.
(3) See Chapter 7 for general interior lettering
and marking instructions.
(4) Uninhabited enclosures in the crewstation
area will also be painted Aircraft Black No. 37038 (e.g.,
map holders, under console and circuit breaker panels
and equipment storage areas).
(5) Crewstations and passenger stations of
OH-58 aircraft will be painted Aircraft Black, No. 37038,
per MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. Passenger
compartments of fixed wing aircraft will be painted
lusterless gray or green per MIL-C-8779. Markings and
stenciling applied in passenger stations of these aircraft
will be in Aircraft White, No. 37875, MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039. Decals shall be white vinyl ink letters
on a lusterless black background.
NOTE
(6) Transilluminated console panels with crazing, scratches and gouges may be touched-up with lusterless black lacquer. Touch-up may be accomplished
by using a small bristled brush, wetted with MIL-L-19538
or MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, black #37038,
lacquer.
b. Cargo/Troop Compartments.
(1) The aircraft cargo/troop compartments will
be painted either in polyurethane, MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, or epoxy paint, MIL-C-22750. Epoxy
paint has characteristics equal to those of polyurethane
in applications not continuously exposed to sunlight.
(2) Aircraft cargo/troop compartments will
be painted in Interior Aircraft Gray No.
36231,
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
(3) Deleted
(4) Markings and stencils applied on the gray of
cargo/troop compartments will be in aircraft black, No.
37038, per MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. Markings applied on aircraft black will be in aircraft white, No.
37875, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
(5) Uninhabited enclosures and/or bays of
cargo/troop compartments will be painted in the same
manner as the compartment, e.g., avionics compartments, hydraulic components, areas under acoustical
mats.
c. External access and equipment bays and enclosures will be painted in aircraft black with markings
and stencils in Orange-Yellow, No. 33538, MIL-DTL64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
6-19. MIL-DTL-64159 OR MIL-DTL-53039,
AIRCRAFT BLACK, NO. 37038, POLYURETHANE
PAINT, CREWSTATION SURFACES.
a. The MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 topcoat is a plural component low reflective polyurethane
paint system, intended for use over epoxy polyamide
primer, MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-85582.
Do not spray paint transilluminated console
panels.
Change 12
6-14.1
TM 55-1500-345-23
b. This coating system and paint scheme constitute the Army standard interior crewstation paint system
for tactical aircraft. The system provides a non-specular chemical resistant surface for aircraft crewstations.
This paint system also enhances crewstation compati-
6-14.2
Change 4
bility with electro-optical assisting devices and reduces
the exterior electro-optical signature.
c. Field crewstation touch-up procedures will include brush and roller processes only.
TM 55-1500-345-23
Spray equipment for touching up interior crewstation surfaces is not to be used, except by
overhaul, manufacturer or other facilities qualified to appropriate safety procedures.
d. Maximum effectiveness of lighting and chemical/biological resistance is achieved when as much of
the aircraft crewstation is coated as possible. It is particularly important that surfaces which are touched or handled be properly maintained in this paint system.
6-20. EPOXY PAINT, MIL-C-22750, FOR INTERIOR
SURFACES OTHER THAN CREWSTATIONS.
a. This is a plural component paint which has
chemical agent resistance equal to MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 paints. It is formulated for interior surfaces which are not continuously exposed to sunlight.
b. MIL-C-22750 paint is applied in two coats. Apply a mist coat and air dry for 15 minutes. The second
coat should be applied until the total dry film thickness is
1.7 to 2.3 mils. The total thickness of the topcoat should
not exceed 2.3 roils.
c. MIL-C-22750 may be used to refinish internally
installed components, see paragraph 5-1.
d. This paint may be used in cargo/troop compartments or uninhabited areas in lieu of MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039. It should be painted in either gray or
black.
6-21. MIL-DTL-64159
OR
MIL-DTL-53039,
POLYURETHANE, INTERIOR AIRCRAFT GRAY,
NO. 36231. This is a plural component polyurethane
coating paint, intended for use over epoxy polyamide
primer, MIL-PRF-23377, or MIL-P-85582.
6-22.
PROCEDURES.
a. These procedures will be implemented by
maintenance personnel who have the proper training
and equipment to apply epoxy primers and plural component polyurethane paints.
(1) It is essential that all painting and cleaning
be performed according to safety procedures described
in this TM. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and National Institute of Safety and Health
(NIOSH) requirements. Prior to operations, the painting facility and processes must be approved by the local
safety office.
(2) It is imperative that crewstations be well ventilated during all painting operations, and proper respiratory equipment be used.
(3) Extreme care must be exercised to prevent
any paint or solvents from coming in contact with restraint belts or the belts may be damaged and require
replacement due to loss of tensile strength.
(4) There are four possible methods of applying
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint to crewstation
areas.
(a) Apply paint with spray equipment, after
appropriate masking, during manufacturing and production or aircraft overhaul only.
(b) Use of paint brushes or rollers at field
level applications and maintenance.
(c) Dismantle assemblies, spray the parts in
an appropriate facility and reassemble, as required.
(d) Combinations of the above.
(5) The choice of the proper method depends
on the model of aircraft, the facilities and trained manpower available at the location to do the painting, the
quantity of aircraft to be painted, condition of the existing coatings, and the specific areas to be painted. Any
method or combination of methods may be used with
adherence to proper safety procedures.
b. Evaluate the existing coating to determine if the
aircraft crewstation is in a condition to receive the MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 coating, or if the existing
coating must be stripped. If existing coatings are not
acceptable, process in accordance with Chapter 2, Surface Preparation.
Change 12
6-15
TM 55-1500-345-23
c. Aircraft crewstations painted with MIL-DTL64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 interior aircraft black are
rough textured and are not acceptable surfaces.
These surfaces must be stripped to the primer surface
and reprocessed when a complete repainting is performed. (For touch up of areas previously painted with
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, see 4-13.) Where
primer is worn through to the metal substrate, such
areas must be treated as metal substrate areas and
processed in accordance with provisions herein for
such areas.
d. Cabin areas of some UH-60A aircraft have a
topcoat of TT-L-20, Gray No. 36231, that should be
maintained and touched up as required with the TT-L-20
(camouflage lacquer) until these aircraft are converted
to an interior topcoat of MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039.
e. Mask all cabin areas that may be damaged by
paint, paint vapors and cleaning solvents. See paragraph 6-26 for areas and items to be painted. This is particularly important for acrylic surfaces such as canopies
and panels.
f. Primers required. Acceptable surfaces require
only a flash coat of epoxy primer to insure maximum adhesion of MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint. The
flash primer coat may be eliminated if the area to be
painted is extremely small and the surfaces are acceptable according to paragraph 4-12 and are appropriately
cleaned prior to topcoating. Primers may be applied with
brushes or rollers.
(1) Apply a full primer coat on all areas where
there is expected heavy abrasion wear (cabin decks,
pedals, foot rests, etc.)
areas.
(2) It is necessary to reprocess all bare metal
(3) Using the basic application procedure described in Chapter 3, apply MIL-PRF-23377 or MIL-P-
6-16
Change 12
85582 Primers. Apply 0.6 to 0.9 mil to surfaces to be
overcoated.
Allow the primer to dry one to two hours. Under some environmental conditions, shorter drying times
may be allowable and preferred.
NOTE
As the drying time of epoxy primer increases beyond two hours, the adhesion of the top coat
may decrease considerably. Care must be exercised to observe the maximum primer drying
time. When the time limit is exceeded, a mist
coat of primer must be applied to the surface
prior to topcoating.
6-23.
APPLICATION.
a. The amount of MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039, Aircraft Black, No. 37038 paint will be mixed
which will be used during the subsequent 6-8 hours.
The thoroughly mixed components A and B will be
allowed to set for a period of 30 minutes for aeration.
This aeration period is not necessary if spray equipment
is to be used.
Spray equipment will be used only in crewstations and similar confined areas when proper
ventilation and protective equipment is used.
b. Subsequent to the aeration period the paint will
be stirred frequently to assure suspension of solid particles and uniform surface application.
c. The mixture will be thinned in accordance with
Chapter 4. The exact thinning ratio and viscosity will be
determined by the user and the application method.
6-24.
a.
APPLICATION WITH SPRAY EQUIPMENT.
Assure facility and equipment adequacy.
TM 55-1500-345-23
b. Apply paint, after application of primer, where
required. Allowing the appropriate drying period, apply
first coat in continuous overlapping strokes. See Chapter 4 for additional instructions.
c. Allow first coat to set at least ten minutes before application of second coat in continuous overlapping strokes to achieve the required dry film thickness
of 1.8 - 3 mils
NOTE
Continuous or frequent agitation of the mixture
must be maintained to assure suspension of
solid matter and uniformity of topcoating.
e. Interior stencils and markings may be applied
any time subsequent to ten minutes after application of
final topcoat.
f. No heating or drying apparatus is required since
this paint is catalytic and will cure under most ambient
conditions. Full use cure will occur in 18-24 hours.
BRUSH
b. Type Size. It is preferable to use a lettering font
in accordance with MIL-HDBK-759 and a width to height
ratio of 1 to 8 to optimize readability under very low illumination levels.
c. Wire Bundles. For tactical aircraft, cover all exposed electric wire bundles with MIL-I-15126, black tape
to reduce reflections from light colored wires.
d.
areas:
d. The cured topcoating shall show no running,
sagging, streaking or other surface inconsistencies.
6-25. APPLICATION
WITH
ROLLERS. See Chapter 4.
following actions are necessary to subdue the markings
and take full advantage of the low reflective black paint
in the cockpit area.
OR
6-26. TYPICAL AIRCRAFT INTERIOR AREAS TO
BE PAINTED. Refer to Table 6-1.
6-27. TYPICAL AIRCRAFT INTERIOR AREAS NOT
TO BE PAINTED. Refer to Table 6-2.
6-28. DECALS, PLACARDS, MARKINGS,
LABELING IN COCKPIT AREA (WHEN USED).
a. General. Present decals, placards, markings
and labeling in the cockpit area of some helicopters may
cause reflections which interfere with night flight. The
Remove the following from helicopter cockpit
(1) Radio Magnetic Indicator Placard on CH-47.
(2) DC Electric Instrument Placard Label on
Turn and Slip Indicators.
(3) Instrument Panel Checklist.
(4) Radio Call Designator/Aircraft Identification
Placard. Replace with new placard containing the words
RADIO CALL in letters 3/16 inch high, and aircraft identification numerals 5/16 inch high. Use lusterless Aircraft
White #37875 letters and numbers on an aircraft black
placard.
(5) Deleted
(6) Compass Correction Card, RMI and Magnetic. Place information in the front of the aircraft log
book where it can be referred to easily.
NOTE
It is permissible to locally manufacture a metal
insert painted lusterless black for installation in
the front of the compass card holder during night
flight.
Change 12
6-17
TM 55-1500-345-23
(7) Communication/Navigation Control Box
Identification Labels on OH-58. These labels identify
the location of the control boxes in the console. Remove
these labels from the side of the center console.
(8) Deleted
(9) Airframe Overhaul Facility or Quality Control
Identification Decals. Remove these decals from the
crewstation area and reposition them to another location inside of the aircraft. The decals should be located
so that they will not be easily rubbed or subjected to unnecessary weathering. They should be readable during
daylight conditions.
(10) Deleted
(11) Deleted
(12) Crashworthy Fuel System Installed Decal.
(13) Operating Limits Decal on OH-58.
(14) Deleted
(15) GO-NO-GO Take-off Data Placard. Place
TEAC maximum N1, RPM% and data entries in the front
of the aircraft log book where it can be referred to easily.
(16) Deleted
(17) Deleted
(18) Deleted
(19) Warning Decal for use of Engine Condition
levers Below 17 °C on CH-47C.
(20) Radio Transmitter Select Identification
Placard.
6-18
Change 12
e. Redundant labels of Instrument on UH-1, and
OH-58. Several instruments on the OH-58 have their
function displayed on the instrument and also on a placard or label on the panel adjacent to the particular instrument. Remove all duplicate labeling from the instrument
panel. Judgement must be exercised before removing
these labels. For example, there are two temperature
displays having the same dial face, but one is used for
the engine and the other is used for the transmission;
both panel labels for these two instruments shall remain.
The gas producer display, on the other hand, has duplicate labeling on the instrument and on the instrument
panel; the panel label should be removed.
f. VNE Computer on CH-47. Do not make any
change to this computer.
g. Marking General. Any placards, decals, markings, or labeling not discussed above shall be retained
but modified if necessary to have lusterless Aircraft
White #37875 lettering/marking on a low reflective black
background.
h. Placard Material. Placards may be made of
L-P-387A plastic sheet, laminated, type NDP, 1/6 inch
thick, opaque, dull black face with white core; or equivalent.
i. Adhesives. Before applying decals, placards,
tape or labels, lightly sand the paint in the area of
application. Adhesive EC847 may be used for placards.
j. Touch-up. If the instrument panel was already
painted with black before receipt of this TM, remove
and/or replace markings, placards, labels, etc., according to the instructions in para 4-5. Touch up the panel.
k. Removal of Decals, Labels, etc. To remove
decals, labels, etc. follow TM 1-1500-204-23 (Series),
or use a razor blade.
TM 55-1500-345-23
6-29.
EMERGENCY EXIT MARKINGS.
a. General.
c.
Deleted
d. Emergency Exit Markings on OH-58.
(1) All lettering and markings shall be in
Orange-Yellow, No.
33538, MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039.
(1) Apply the words EMERGENCY RELEASE
on the diagonal forward portion of the door frames as
close to the door jettison handles as possible.
(2) Doors and door frames shall be painted Aircraft Black, No. 37038, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039, in accordance with para 6-22a.
(2) Apply the word PULL, with an arrow to indicate the hand motion required, adjacent and just below
the door jettison handles.
(3) The information in the following paragraphs
supplements information in Chapter 7, Section X and in
Chapter 8 concerning interior markings for the cockpit
area.
(3) The door jettison handles shall be painted
orange-yellow and black 1/8 inch wide alternate stripes.
(4) Striping on the door shall consist of
Orange-Yellow, No.
33538, MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, markings 1/2 inch by 1 inch (positioned
lengthwise) spaced one foot apart around the door.
b.
Deleted
(4) Place the words EMERGENCY EXIT on the
center of the side panel of the door.
(5) Apply the words OPEN-CLOSED.
e. Emergency Exit Markings on CH-47. Apply
the words EMERGENCY EXIT/TURN HANDLE marking adjacent to the door jettison handle.
Change 12
6-19
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VI
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
6-30. COATINGS FOR FIBER LAMINATE
MATERIALS.
a. Sandwich-type laminate parts in aircraft are
coated for several reasons with the type of coating
being chosen for the specific application of the part.
Plastic parts such as radomes are normally coated
primarily for rain erosion resistance. Paints shall not
be applied to radomes or antennas unless specifically
directed in 6-17.
b. In repairing sandwich-type laminate parts, the
final step is to refinish the part with a finish identical to
the original finish. (Refer to drawings and applicable
specifications of the parts).
NOTE
There will be no protective coating sprayed
upon radomes for prevention of scratching or
marring during transport” tion. As previously
emphasized, items constructed of fiberglass
material require special handling at all times to
prevent damage. Addition of protective coatings for prevention of such damage would not
prevent major damage and would tend to reemphasize special handling precautions. Surface
will be protected by covering with paper or
similar material.
6-31. PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR RAIN EROSION. Fiberglass laminated surface located on the
frontal areas of aircraft are subjected to considerable
erosive action when flying through rain. These areas must be protected to prevent severe damage to
the fiberglass surface. Rain erosion coating systems
conforming to Military Specification MIL-C-83231 and
MIL-C-83445 applied to affected surfaces will provide
protection from the effects of rain erosion. These materials will protect the fiberglass surface indefinitely,
providing the coating is replaced or repaired when
inspection indicates such work is necessary. Thermally reflective elastomeric coating system, Military
6-20
Specification MIL-C-83445 is a dual purpose coating
to be used as a thermally reflective coating on exterior
laminated plastic parts where protection from rain erosion is required. For economic reasons, the thermally
reflective coating will be used only where both thermal
and erosion protection is an established requirement.
a. Rain erosion resistant coating systems, Military
Specification MIL-C-83231.
(1) Class A, Type I, is a rain erosion resistant
coating furnished in complete kit form.
(2) Class A, Type II, is a rain erosion resistant
coating with antistatic surface treatment to minimize radio noise from precipitation charging of the coated surface furnished in complete kit form.
b. Thermally reflective coating system, Military
Specification MIL-C-83445, are classified as follows:
(1) Class I rain erosion resistant thermal coating
furnished in kit form complete with primer, erosion resistant (electrically nonconductive) component, and diluting solvent.
(2) The coatings are intended for exterior laminated plastic parts of aircraft for protection from rain
erosion and thermal energy while the aircraft is in flight.
These coatings cannot be used on radomes and other
plastic parts that have a requirement for protection
against static electrical charges because they are not
electrically conductive.
c. Provide rain erosion protection on wing tip assemblies and other aircraft parts constructed of fiber
laminates which present an in-flight angle of impact of 15
degrees or more. Do not provide rain erosion protection
on leading edges and areas of radomes and antenna
housings unless specifically directed in 6-17. Head-on
impact of a flat surface is defined as a 90-degree
TM 55-1500-345-23
angle of impact. Angular impact determinations must
be based on the position of the part when in a normal
inflight attitude.
NOTE
Only the amount of material to be used within
the following 8 hours should be accelerated at
one time. Material that has been mixed and allowed to stand beyond this period of time should
be discarded. Do not attempt to thin any coating material which has gelled beyond brushable
use. Keep containers tightly covered when not
in use.
6-32.
PREPARATION OF SURFACE.
Since materials used in coating removal and application procedures are flammable and toxic in
sufficient concentration, standard precautions
such as fire prevention and adequate ventilation
shall be exercised.
6-33. APPLICATION OF PRIMER AND COATING. Plastic parts to be coated with erosion resistant
coatings should be processed in a sheltered area free
from dust, and protected from weather conditions.
Best results are obtained if the coatings are applied at
relative humidities below 60 percent.
a. Application of Coating System, Military Specification MIL-C-83231.
Aliphatic Naphtha, TT-N-95
Aliphatic naphtha is flammable and toxic to
eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. Wear protective gloves and goggles/face shield. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Use only in well
ventilated areas (or use approved respirator as
determined by local safety/industrial hygiene
personnel). Keep away from open flames,
sparks or other sources of ignition.
Acetone
Acetone is extremely flammable and toxic to
eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. Wear protective gloves and goggles/face shield. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Use only in well
ventilated areas (or use approved respirator as
determined by local safety/industrial hygiene
personnel). Keep away from open flames,
sparks or other sources of ignition.
Failure to observe these precautions con result in serious injury or systemic poisoning of personnel.
a. Repair surfaces with pits, scars, scratches, or
other minor defects in accordance with TM 55-1500204-25/1. It has been found that coatings are more satisfactory if the surface to receive the coating is smooth
but not glossy.
b. Remove surface gloss with a fine grade of
emery or sandpaper, No 240 grit, after sanding lightly
with a coarser grade of abrasive so as to finely and uniformly scratch the surface. Remove sanding dust with a
clean, lint-free cloth dampened with aliphatic naphtha,
TT-N-95, followed by an acetone, ASTM-D329, wipe
used with the coating. Assure that surface is completely
dry before coating application.
(1) Mixing. Components of classes A and B,
types I and II coatings shall be individually mixed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The
resulting individual mixtures shall be smooth, homogeneous materials free from lumps, gelling, seeding, separation or other objectionable characteristics.
(2) Pot Life. Classes A and B coatings shall
have a minimum pot life of 4 hours at standard conditions. At the end of the 4 hour period, the coatings shall
show no signs of lumping, seeding, separation or an increase in viscosity of more than 20 percent from the initial viscosity.
(3) The class A and B coatings shall be applied
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to a
total dry film thickness of 12 to 14 mils. The total application time, including priming and intervals between
coatings shall not exceed 8 hours. The tack free drying
time for class A coatings shall not exceed 4 hours after
application of the final coat. The tack free drying time
for class B coatings shall not exceed 10 hours after application of the final coat.
(4) The rate-of-cure of the class A and B coatings shall have a maximum set-to-touch or recoat time
of one hour. For class B materials, the manufacturer
shall furnish instructions for catalyzing or accelerating
the polyurethane prepolymer materials for a temperature range from 10°C to 35°C (65°F to 95°F) and a relative humidity range from 40 percent to 75 percent.
(5) Class A coatings shall be fully cured within
5 days and shall be free of pinholes, cracks,
Change 12
6-21
TM 55-1500-345-23
bubbles or other .lm irregularities. Class B coatings
shall be fully cured within 10 days and shall be free of
pinholes, cracks, bubbles, or other film irregularities.
b. Application of Coating System, Military Specification MIL-C-83445.
(1) Mixing. Components of class 1 and 2 coatings shall be individually mixed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The resulting individual
mixtures shall be smooth, homogeneous materials
free from lumps, gelling, seeding, separation or other
objectionable characteristics.
(2) Pot Life. Class 1 and 2 base coating and
topcoating solutions shall have a minimum pot life of 4
hours after catalyzation. At the end of the 4 hour period,
the coatings shall show no signs of lumping, seeding,
separation or an increase in viscosity of more than 20
percent from the initial viscosity when tested in accordance with 4.7.9 and Table 6-1.
(3) The coatings shall be applied in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions to a total dry film
thickness of 12 to 14 mils. The total application time,
including intervals between coatings shall not exceed 8
hours and the tack free drying time shall not exceed 10
hours after final application of the coatings.
(4) The rate-of-cure of the coatings shall have a
maximum set-to-touch or recoat time of one hour. The
manufacturer shall furnish instructions for catalyzing or
accelerating the polyurethane base materials for a temperature range from 65° to 95°F (18° to 35°C) and a relative humidity range from 40 to 75 percent.
(5) Class 1 and 2 coatings shall be fully cured
within 5 days and shall be free of pinholes, cracks, bubbles or other film irregularities.
6-34. PATCHING OR RETOUCHING DAMAGED
COATINGS.
Acetone
Acetone is extremely flammable and toxic to
eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. Wear protective gloves and goggles/face shield. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Use only in well
ventilated areas (or use approved respirator as
determined by local safety/industrial hygiene
personnel). Keep away from open flames,
sparks or other sources of ignition.
6-22
Change 12
Aliphatic Naphtha, TT-N-95
Aliphatic naphtha is flammable and toxic to
eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. Wear protective gloves and goggles/face shield. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Use only in well
ventilated areas (or use approved respirator as
determined by local safety/industrial hygiene
personnel). Keep away from open flames,
sparks or other sources of ignition.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in serious injury or systemic poisoning of personnel.
Sand damaged surface to a feather edge. Extend
sanded surface beyond damaged area approximately
1 inch. Clean sanded surface with a clean, lint-free
cloth dampened with aliphatic naphtha followed by
an acetone wipe, Federal Secifications TT-N-95 and
ASTM D329. Immediately wipe with a second dry,
clean, lint-free cloth to remove residue and allow to
dry thoroughly. Apply primer and coating(s) as previously directed herein. Exercise extreme caution to
prevent uneven and excessive buildup of coating when
making repairs to radome coatings. Excessive coating
thickness will reduce radome electrical transmission
efficiency and in the case of doppler and fire control
radomes, could result in beam deflection errors beyond
tolerable limits.
6-35.
REMOVAL OF COATINGS.
METHYL ETHYL KETONE
Keep away from heat and open flame.
Keep container closed.
Use with adequate ventilation.
Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in serious injury or systemic poisoning of personnel.
a. Prior to application of neoprene, inspect
radomes for damages that penetrate face plies. To prevent the solvent from entering the radome core, cover
damages that penetrate face plies with tape, Federal
Specification PPP-T-60. Extend tape approximately 3
inches beyond edges of damaged area. Do not attempt
to remove coating under the tape. This coating will be
removed either with face ply when damaged area is
repaired, or by hand sanding.
b. Removal of erosion resistant coatings shall be
accomplished by one of the following methods:
TM55-1 500-345-23
Handling and use of coating removal
solvents requires normal precautions
commensurate with their toxicity and
flash.point characteristics. These
solvents tend to dry out the skin and
may cause skin disorders to some
individuals. Therefore, protection to
hands shall be provided by appropriate
gloves or gauntlets.
(1) Cover coating with a felt pad or rags
and saturate with 50/50 mixture of toluene, Federal Specification TT-T548, and methylethyketone,
Federal Specification TT-M-261. Maintain covering in a saturated condition until coating has loosened to the extent that it can be peeled off or
scraped off with a phenolic or plastic hand
scraper. If a hand scraper is used, care must be
exercised to prevent scratching the surface of the
radome. Remove residue with a cloth dampeness
with toluene or methylethylketone.
Change 1
6-22.1 /(6-22.2 blank)
TM55-1500-345-23
REMOVAL
6-36.
RADOMES.
Electrically ground table and pump to
guard against static discharge.
(2) The application of a continuous
stream of solvent mixture is an alternate method
of removing coatings. Suggested equipment consists of a metal table of suitable size with a metal
grid top and provisions for draining the solvent
through a filter to a low pressure explosion-proof
fluid pump. Position radome or part on table with
pipes or rods between radome and grid top. To
prevent possible delamination of solid laminate
edge bands, do not place part directly on, or drag
it across, the metal grid table top. Cover coated
area as previously described and apply a stream
of solvent mixture until coating loosens. Remove
coating as previously described.
NOTE
Solvent mixture must not contain more
than 50 percent methyethylketone,
Federal Specification TT-M-251. Methyethylketone in excess of 50 percent
will be harmful to materials. Toluene,
Federal Specification TT-T-548, used by
itself will satisfactorily remove neoprene coating, however, the reaction
time is longer than that for methylethylketone-toluene mixture.
OF
PAINT
FROM
Do not remove paint from radomes.
When stripping paint adjacent to
installed radomes, it is mandatory that
paint strippers and solvents do not contact the fiberglass, and are not
permitted to flow into edge band areas
of radomes. (Refer to Chapter 6.)
6-37. PROTECTIVE COATING FOR THE
POLYCARBONATE AND PVC/ACRYLIC
POLYMER COVERING ON THE CANOPY
EGRESS SYSTEM.
a. Clean the canopy egress system covering
with alcohol, Federal Specification 0-E-760.
b. Sand surface with 400 grit sandpaper.
c. Clean the covering again with alcohol,
Federal Specification 0-E-760.
d. Apply Lexcote G-3483 per manufacturer’s
instructions.
e. Infrared heat lamp may be used to aid in the
curing of the Lexcote .
6-23/(6-24 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 7
LETTERING AND MARKING
SECTION I
7-1.
GENERAL.
a. The color for the majority of markings and lettering will be aircraft black, shade number 37038, MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, on aircraft green or aircraft grey background. The crew areas will normally
be marked in orange-yellow, number 33538, MIL-DTL64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 on aircraft black background.
See details in Chapters 9 and 10.
b. Unless otherwise speci.ed, use 1/2-inch high
Arabic numerals and capital letters for markings. If lettering shown in Chapters 9 and 10 cannot be made
on standard Army stencil cutting machine due to odd
size letters, go to the nearest standard size. For example (shown in figure 8-2), 5/8 in., replace with 1/2 inch.
Markings and lettering may be reduced in size to suit
combat operation.
c. Center identification lettering UNITED STATES
ARMY as nearly as possible on each side of fuselage.
SECTION II
7-2.
MARKINGS
Use 6-inch vertical block letters. Letter dimensions, positions, and locations for each aircraft will be in accordance with instructions in Chapter 8. When identification
lettering UNITED STATES ARMY does not fit on allotted
space, use U.S. ARMY or ARMY.
Cutting of fuel, oil, hydraulic, or oxygen lines, or
electrical wiring under crash conditions may result in a fire or explosion or increase the severity of an existing fire. Such possibilities will be
taken into consideration when emergency escape areas are being chosen for identification
markings.
d. Outline corners of emergency exits and rescue
exit areas with right-angle corner bands 1 inch wide and
3 inches long at each leg. Paint corner marks with black,
shade number 37038, Military Specification MIL-DTL64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
INSIGNIA: GENERAL
LETTERING AND MARKING MATERIALS.
a. Apply insignia with approved paint as applicable and compatible with the existing finishes.
b. Use decals conforming to paragraph 6-5, in lieu
of paint, if approved by AMCOM, ATTN: AMSAM-DSAAMSS-FW, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898–5000.
7-3.
GENERAL.
a. The National Star Insignia will not be applied to
tactical aircraft. The National Star Insignia, of the design
shown in figure 8-1, will be placed on other Army aircraft
where required as part of an authorized paint scheme.
b. The insignia will portray an insignia white,
five-pointed star located within an insignia-blue circumscribed circle. This is referred to as the
Change 12
7-1
TM 55-1500-345-23
basic blue circle. An insignia-white rectangle will be located on each side of the star. The top edge of the rectangles will form a straight line with the upper edges of
the horizontal opposed star points. An insignia-red horizontal stripe will be centered in each end of the rectangle. The basic blue circle will outline the entire insignia.
c. The dimensions of the insignia will be determined by the diameter of the basic blue circle, which is
standardized in multiples of 5 inches.
7-4.
COLORS.
a. Gloss colors for insignia will conform to applicable shade numbers of Federal Standard 595. Insignia
red will conform to shade No. 11136. Insignia blue will
conform to shade No. 15044. Insignia white will conform to shade No. 17875.
7-2
Change 9
b. Corresponding lusterless colors will also conform to applicable shade numbers in Federal Standard
595.
7-5.
APPLICATIONS.
a. Mask off area and apply National Star Insignia
over finish top coat. Avoid any method that cause ridges
in the application of insignia and markings.
b. Remove masking tape as soon as practicable,
but in any case, not later than 2 hours after taping, in
order to avoid staining the painted surface.
7-6.
DELETED
TM 55-1500-345-23
7-7.
HELICOPTERS.
the star insignia may be placed on such other parts of
the fuselage as will permit its being readily seen.
a. Location.
(1) Four National Star Insignia will be applied on
the aircraft fuselage. The insignia will be located so that
it will be visible from each side, from above, and from below. Due to various design configurations, the insignia
will be located as near the center of the aircraft as is
practical so as to provide maximum discernment. Such
locations will be standardized on like model and series
helicopters. The insignia may be moved the minimum
distance required to avoid high heat areas. The insignia
may extend over doors and emergency exits but will not
be applied over windows or other such openings which
would change the design of the insignia.
(2) The National Star Insignia will be applied on
vertical surfaces so that in normal flight attitudes, the top
point of the star will point forward in the direction of flight.
(3) If the main fuselage section is not large
enough to accommodate the minimum size specified,
SECTION III
(4) If space limitations and configurations permit, additional insignia will be applied to the nose of helicopters to provide more positive air-to-air identification.
b. Dimensions of Fuselage Insignia
(1) The dimensions of the insignia will be determined by the diameter of the basic blue circle. The insignia will not exceed 50 inches in diameter, nor be less
than 10 inches. The selected insignia size will be nearest to, but not exceed, 75 percent of the fuselage height
at the point of application. Symmetry should be maintained when applying the insignia on each side of the
fuselage.
(2) If the above size is impractical for application, the most practical standard diameter will be selected.
MEDICAL INSIGNIA
7-8. AIRCRAFT. Those aircraft assigned to the Army
Medical service for use as ambulance aircraft will be
painted to the standard tactical paint scheme and will
be marked with a red cross centered on a white field as
shown in Chapter 9. The cross shall be painted MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Red, #31136.
7-9.
AIRCRAFT FIRST AID KITS AND LITTERS.
a. First Aid Kits.
(1) When painting identification markings on aircraft first aid kits, the red cross will be com-
Change 12
7-3
TM 55-1500-345-23
posed of five 1/2 inch squares arranged in a symmetrical cross. The lettering will be 1/2 inch high and National
Stock Number will be 5/6 inch high with 1/4 inch space
between lines (See figure 8-6). Markings will be applied using MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft
red #31136 for the cross, MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039, and aircraft black #37078, for the lettering.
(2) If the kit is enclosed in a cover or installed
in a bracket or holder which hinders the visibility of the
marking on the kit, an additional red cross will be placed
on such cover, bracket, or holder. If this is not practical,
the red cross will be placed on the structural part of the
aircraft near the cover, bracket, or holder.
SECTION IV
COLOR, LOCATION, AND SIZE.
a. Color. Because bright colors will aid in the visual acquisition of combat aircraft and degrade the effectiveness of the standard Army tactical paint schemes,
unit and organizational insignia on tactical aircraft will
only be painted lusterless black and olive drab. Non-tactical aircraft will have these insignia painted only in authorized topcoats and colors approved by Headquarters,
Department of the Army.
b. Location. On fixed wing aircraft, the command
insignia will be applied on the aircraft in the following
7-4
Change 12
b. Litters. Paint red cross markings on litters using
appropriate colors of paint MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039. Letters, where painted, will be painted in MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 forest green.
COMMAND AND ORGANIZATIONAL INSIGNIA AND NAME
7-10. GENERAL. Command and/or organizational insignia, which has previously been authorized by Headquarters Department of the Army, may be applied to
Army aircraft upon approval of major Army field commanders. Using organizations will be responsible for the
application and subsequent removal of insignia before
transfer of the aircraft to another activity. Depot maintenance facilities will not replace command and/or organization insignia. Such insignia will be applied over
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint.
7-11.
(3) If background areas on which the red cross
is to be painted will impair visibility of the cross, a solid
white square equal to or slightly larger than the overall dimensions of the red cross may first be painted in
that area to provide a contrasting background. Use MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft white #37875.
manner. They will be no larger than 12 inches wide
by 15 inches tall, and be in proportion to the patch or
distinctive crest that they represent. Decals will be applied with their vertical center 9 3/4 inches aft of the pilot/co-pilot “D” window (measured from the “D” window’s
aft most point) along the window’s bottom. They will
be horizontally centered along an imaginary longitudinal line running through the centers of the “D” window
and the first passenger window. On helicopters, the insignia will be applied to each side of the fuselage, aft of
the radio call numbers. However, on some helicopters,
adequate space may not be available at that exact location. In such cases, the insignia or lettering should be
positioned as near as possible to the specified location.
c. Size of Insignia. If placed on the verticle stabilizer, insignia will not exceed 75 percent of the height of
the allocated portion of the vertical stabilizer. If placed
above the cabin windows, the insignia will not exceed
the size of the U.S. Army on the vertical stabilizer.
d. Size of Lettering. Lettering for the name of the
command or home station will not exceed two-thirds of
the size of the U.S. ARMY on the vertical stabilizer.
TM 55-1500-345-23
Section
V.
IDENTIFICATION
LETTERING
7-12. GENERAL.
7-14. HELlCOPTERS, NON-TACTICAL.
a.
Style. Unless otherwise specified. identification lettering, ARMY, U.S. ARMY, or UNITED
STATES ARMY, will be presented in vertical block
letters. All letters should be of the same block
design.
a.
General. The identification lettering on
the fuselage of all Department of the Army, Army
National Guard, and United States Army Reserve
helicopters will consist of the letters ARMY placed on each side of the fuselage.
b.
Dimensions.
(1) For tactical TDA helicopters and fixed wing aircraft, the height and location of lettering
may vary on aircraft of different size and model and
space available, but the size and location of this
marking will be the same on all aircraft of the same
model.
(2) For non-tactical TDA helicopters and
fixed wing aircraft, letters will be of uniform size,
with the letters separated from the numerals with a
dash. Depending on the fuselage surface available,
letters will be in the largest size practicable:
however, in no case will they be smaller than 8 by
12 inches, or larger than 32 by 48 inches. The
height of identification lettering near the star will
be the diameter of the basic blue circle. Exception
of these dimensions will be taken when the alloted
space does not allow for the dimensions prescribed herein.
b.
Specific Application. The ARMY markings will be placed on each side of the fuselage of
helicopters as shown in appropriate illustrations.
NOTE
The paint to be used for application of
letters and markings specified in Sections VI thru X shall be the same as that
used to finish the surface to be marked.
Uniformity. Aircraft identification letterc.
ing will be standardized and uniformity maintained
on similar type aircraft in each organization.
Restriction. The Army identification letd.
tering and the National Star Insignia when appropriate, will not be altered in location, dimension.
or configuration from the specifications reflected
herein to accommodate any major command and
organizational insignia or marking.
7-13. DELETED
Figure 7-1, Page 7-5 DELETED
7-6
Change 9
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VI
WARNING STRIPES AND SIGNS
7-15. PROPELLER AND ROTOR BLADE
WARNINGS, NON-TACTICAL AIRCRAFT.
NOTE
Provisions of section VI are subject to an international standardization agreement (Cento
Stang 3250).
a. Exterior. That area of the fuselage which is behind the plane of the propeller path will be marked with
a gloss black paint # G-2017, mfg. US Paint 3 inches
wide, extending completely around the fuselage, except
through anti-glare areas and when it does not interfere
with standard ARMY markings or insignia. A 3-inch
space will be maintained between the ends of the propeller warning stripe and any standard ARMY marking
or insignia. The word DANGER will be applied perpendicular to each side of the warning stripe, with an arrow
pointing from the word DANGER toward the stripe. Letters in the word DANGER will be2 inches high and the
arrows will be 4 inches long. The word DANGER and the
arrows will be gloss black paint #G-2017, mfg. US Paint.
This marking applies to all non-tactical multiengine aircraft.
b. Interior. Openings used as exits within 6 feet of
the propeller disc will have an insignia-red warning stripe
3 inches wide painted on their inside surface. Stripes will
extend from the center of the fuselage or the top of the
opening, whichever is higher, to the lowest extremity of
the opening. The word PROPELLER, reading vertically
from top to bottom, will be super-imposed on the stripes
in glossy insignia-white letters 2 inches high, placed at
suf.ciently frequent intervals to indicate the dangerous
areas. The word DANGER in glossy insignia-red will
be applied perpendicular to and centered with respect
to the word propeller on each side of the stripe, with an
insignia-red arrow pointing toward the stripe. Letters will
be 2 inches high and arrows 4 inches long.
c.
(1) Tail rotor blades. See Chapter 6.
(2) Tail rotor warning markings, non-tactical.
See Chapter 9.
d.
Tail Rotor Markings, Tactical.
(1) Tail rotor blades. See Chapter 6.
(2) Tail rotor warning markings. Paint warning
arrows Aircraft Black, #37038. Paint word DANGER
above warning arrow in Aircraft Black #37038. See
Chapter 9 for dimensional data.
7-16.
7-17.
Deleted
NOISE HAZARD LEVELS AND STENCILS.
a. Sound pressure levels in Army aircraft during
some operating conditions exceed the Surgeon General’s hearing conservation criteria, as defined in TB
MED 251. Hearing protection devices, such as the aviator helmet or ear plugs, are required to be worn by all
personnel in and around the aircraft during its operation.
b. Noise hazard stencils will be applied to provide conformance to the standard details prescribed in
MIL-STD-1474 (Noise Limits for Army Material). The
stencil, in the orange-yellow #33538 shall read as shown
in figure 7-2.
c. The stencils will be applied in Army aircraft and
located so they are visible to all passengers who are
not normally required to wear aviator helmets or headphones. The aircraft affected, include the location of
stencils are as follows.
(1) Deleted
Tail Rotor Markings, Non-tactical.
Change 12
7-7
TM 55-1500-345-23
(2) Deleted
(3) CH-47 Helicopters. Apply stencil each side
of the interior surface of aircraft and locate over the back
of troop seats above each window (4 locations on each
side). (See paragraph d for stencil information.)
(4) Deleted
(5) Deleted
(6) OH-58 Helicopters. Apply stencil to blanket
assembly at approximately FS 97.50 and WL 67.
(7) C-12 and RC-12 Aircraft.
(a) Attach label (P/N 7690-EG-000-2) to the
exterior surface centered on the passenger door that is
on the left side of the aircraft.
7-8
Change 12
(8) AH-64 Aircraft. Apply stencil to right side
lower area of both crewstations.
(9) Deleted
(10) UH-60 Helicopter.
(a) Apply stencil to the interior surface of
cargo door centered on the center post between the
windows (both sides).
(b) Apply stencil to interior surface at station
300, water line 244 (both sides).
d. The adhesive backed labels are for use on aircraft hard surfaces only. For aircraft requiring labels
over fabric-lined or acoustical-blanketed interior areas,
cut or procure a stencil locally. For size and wording of
stencil, see figure 7-2.
TM 55-1500-345-23
The stenciled letters shall be lusterless
e.
black for gray backgrounds and lusterless orange
for black backgrounds.
Apply or remove pressure sensitive labels
f.
in accordance with instructions in TM
55-1500-204-25/1.
Figure 7-2. Size and Wording of Stencil
Section
VII.
RADIO
CALL
7-18. RADIO CALL NUMBERS.
a.
General.
(1) Radio call numbers for Army aircraft
will consist of five numerals, Radio call numbers
will be derived from the aircraft serial number.
Vertical block-type Arabic numerals will be used
when applying radio call numbers.
(2) First numeral of the contract year and
the hyphen in the aircraft serial number will not be
used in radio call numbers. If five numerals. are
not available in the aircraft serial number, zeros
will be used to produce the required five numerals.
Should more than five numerals be available, the
last five numerals of the aircraft serial number will
be used. Example: For serial number 59-5434, use
95434: for serial numbers 59-653472, use 53472: for
serial number 59-7, use 90007: for serial number
60-7, use 00007.
(3) Since numbers once assigned may
reach an age of 10 years or more, there is a possibility that two sets of radio call numbers could be
identical. To prevent this. the symbol (0) will precede derived numbers of more than 10 years of
age.
NUMBERS
Example:
AND
PREFIXES
for serial number 50-7, use 0-00007.
(4) All radio call panels installed with aircraft, including helicopters, will be revised to
reflect the five radio call numbers applied on the
aircraft, and the six numerals if aircraft are over 10
years old.
(5) Radio call numbers will be applied on
both sides and on each outboard side, as applicable, of vertical stabilizer and rudder
assembly, except that on helicopters they will be
applied to sides of fuselage or vertical fin.
(6) Radio call numbers on tactical aircraft will be 6 inches high. If space is not available
for this standard size, the size will be of largest
size which can be applied and compatible with
existing space. For non-tactical aircraft only, the
suggested minimum size for space occupied by
one call number or designator is 12 inches high by
8 inches wide. If space is not available for this
standard size, the size will be of largest size which
can be applied and compatible with existing
space. Alternate numerical size will be established by the width equaling two-thirds the height,
and the stroke and space will equal one-sixth the
height. Vertical block-type numbers will be used
for radio call numbers.
Change 9
7-9
TM 55-1500-345-23
b.
Decals. Decalcomanias conforming to
paragraph 6-5 may be used in lieu of paint when
applying and maintaining radio call numbers on
non-tactical aircraft.
the space normally occupied by “US ARMY”
above the radio call numbers, Identification will.
be applied on vertical fin of fixed wing aircraft and
above or adjacent to call numbers on rotary wing
aircraft depending on space available. Letters wil
be 6 inches high in black color shade 37038.
Where space is not available, the “NG” and state
abbreviation will be reduced to 2/3 its size to
accommodate space available
Prefix — National Guard. Army National
c.
Guard will have a compound prefix in black lusterless letters consisting of the state abbreviation
(table 8-4) followed by a dash and letter "NG" in
Section
Vlll.
SERIAL
NUMBER
a.
Example.
U.S. Army U H - I D *
U.S.A. Serial No. XX-XXXX
Service this aircraft with MIL-T-5624 Grade
JP-4* Aviation Fuel. If not available, refer
to TB 55-9150-200-24 for Alternate
(Emergency) * f u e l .
* Underlined items applicable to specific aircraft
types.
7-10
FUEL
SPECIFICATION
b.
Location. On left side of aircraft in vicinity of cockpit window.
7-19. FUSELAGE. The aircraft model designation, serial number and fuel data will be applied
to all Army aircraft. See Chapters 9 and 10 for
specific guidance for a particular aircraft. Use
paragraph 7-20 if no specific guidance for a particular aircraft is shown in Chapters 9 and 10.
7 - 2 0 . M A R K I N G S . Show aircraft type
serial number and specific fuel from operator’s
manual.
AND
c.
Letters and numerals to be 7/8 in. plus or
minus 1/8 in. for model and serial number and 1/2
in. for fuel information.
,
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION IX
MARKINGS FOR EMERGENCY ENTRY OR EXIT
7-21. GENERAL. Markings for emergency exit from
aircraft will be orange-yellow shade 33538. Emergency
entry will be marked with a broken band in the colors
speci.ed in Chapters 9 and 10.
7-22. SECONDARY OPENINGS. Secondary openings, such as auxiliary exits, windows, and navigator’s
domes are usually smaller than primary openings,
making entrance or exit more difficult. If the structure
immediately surrounding secondary openings is free
from heavy structural members (such as bulkheads and
main longitudinal members), oxygen, fuel, and oil lines,
and battery leads, it will be marked with a broken band
in the colors specified in Chapters 9 and 10. The band
will be placed at the extreme boundary of the above
described area, both inside and outside of the fuselage.
Segments of the broken band will be 1/2 inch wide, 1
inch long and approximately 12 inches apart. Where
the band will be covered by soundproofing (or lining),
the soundproofing (or lining), will also be marked. CUT
HERE FOR EMERGENCY RESCUE will be marked
or stenciled inside of, parallel with, and adjacent to,
the broken band identifying the area on the outside of
the aircraft where forced entry can be made for rescue
purposes. CUT HERE FOR EMERGENCY EXIT will
be marked on a similar location inside the aircraft.
Letters will be 1 inch high. If the letters (on the skin) are
covered by soundproofing (or lining), the letters will also
be marked on that part of the soundproofing (or lining)
that covers that area.
7-23. RELOCATION. Each aircraft will be visually inspected for areas which may be cut through for rescue
when entrance or exit cannot be made in any other manner. Visual inspection must be used, as relocation and
reinstallation of equipment and furnishings may have
been made which would not be indicated on the installation drawing of the aircraft. These areas should be as
close to normal stations of personnel as possible, except that they will not be placed at spots where personal
injury to occupants probably would result from forced entry. Corner markings will be painted or stenciled on the
inside and outside of the fuselage marking the limits of
these areas. The horizontal and vertical bars of the corner markings will be 3 inches long and 1 inch wide. CUT
HERE FOR EMERGENCY RESCUE will be painted or
stenciled in the center of the four corner markings on
the outside of the aircraft and CUT HERE FOR EMERGENCY EXIT will be placed in a similar location inside
the aircraft. Letters will be 1 inch high. Soundproofing
also will be painted if it covers markings or words. These
markings need not be placed on aircraft so constructed
that openings could not be cut with safety.
Do not use a knife or metal blade on aircraft
during application procedure.
7-24. ESCAPE PANELS — INTERNAL
MARKINGS.
a. Markings for identification of escape hatches,
doors, and exits on the inside of aircraft will be marked
orange-yellow, shade No. 33538.
b. An orange-yellow #33538 broken band will
mark the complete periphery of escape exits or doors.
The broken band will be only on the door, and not on the
frame of the door. Segments of the broken band will be
1/2 inch wide, 1 inch long, and approximately 12 inches
apart (See MIL-A-25165). When the soundproofing (or
lining) will cover the identification marking band on the
inside of the aircraft, it will also be appropriately marked.
c. The words EMERGENCY EXIT in orange-yellow No. 33538, will be marked or stenciled on the escape hatch, door, or exit, in the most readily visible location. Letters preferably will be 2 inches high, and will
be not less than 1 inch. If the letters (on the skin) are
covered by soundproofing (or lining), the letters also will
be stenciled on that part of the soundproofing (or lining).
Change 1
7-11
TM 55-1500-345-23
d. Small handles or levers used to actuate doors
or hatches shall be identified by alternate orange-yellow and black stripes, 1/8 inch in width, painted on the
background of the panel. Alternate orange-yellow and
black stripes 1/8 to 1/4 inch in width, shall be applied
directly onto large levers or exit controls. Background
striping shall be applied at a 45-degree angle from the
vertical, rotated clockwise. Handles and small levers
shall be striped with alternate colored rings. The striping
shall not interfere with other types of markings or codings. Suitable descriptive wording, readily visible, will be
marked or stenciled on the door or structure of the aircraft, whichever is nearer to the emergency release, to
identify and explain its operation. This wording preferably will be 1 inch high, and will be not less than 1/2 inch
high. Standard English terminology will be used, such
as PULL, PUSH, TURN, or SLIDE.
e. Exits which are adequate for air, ground, and
ditching escape shall have the words EMERGENCY
EXIT centered in the most visible location on the inside
of the door or hatch.
f. Exits which are not adequate for all three
phases of escape shall be marked EMERGENCY EXIT,
SECTION X
7-27. BILINGUAL MARKINGS. Bilingual markings
will be applied to aircraft assigned to remote areas
when authorized by the major Army field commander.
Change 12
Example: GROUND USE ONLY, GROUND, AND
DITCHING USE ONLY, etc.
7-25. ESCAPE PANELS — EXTERNAL MARKINGS
(NON-TACTICAL AIRCRAFT).
a. Markings identifying escape hatches, doors,
and exits on the outside of aircraft will be marked
gloss yellow on dark surfaces, and gloss black on light
surfaces. If enamel is used, it will conform to Federal
Specification TT-E-489; if urethane is used, it will conform to Military Specification MIL-C-83286.
b. All external releases for operation of emergency exit panels will be marked EXIT RELEASE on
the outside of the aircraft to facilitate quick identification.
The wording that describes the operation of the exit
release will be standard English terminology, such as
PULL, PUSH, TURN, or SLIDE. Letters preferably will
be 2 inches high and will be not less than 1 inch high.
MISCELLANEOUS MARKINGS
7-26. GENERAL. Markings of interior and exterior
surfaces, labels, decals, placards, and stencils will be
applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
The materials (polyurethane, lacquer or enamel) used
applying the background will be the same as that used
to finish the surface. Installations in aircraft cockpits
of placards required by TB’s or MWO’s will be accomplished by coating the back of the placard with a clear
lacquer, varnish, or similar substance. The placard
will be further secured by an additional coat of clear
lacquer, varnish, or similar substance over the front of
the placard. If desired. such placards may be made of
photosensitive anodized aluminum. Military Specification MIL-P-10524, Type H, or other metal, and attached
to the surface of the aircraft cockpit by bolts or screws.
7-12
followed by the words AIR, GROUND, OR DITCHING
USE ONLY, as applicable.
7-28. MARKINGS FOR TANK AREAS AND
INTERNAL STATION MARKINGS.
a. Data Markings. Additional data, such as
coolant mixture, water, alcohol mixture, oil tank level
restrictions, and fuel grade (specified) will be applied
near the filler caps in letters 1/2 inch high.
b. Fuel Nozzle Groundings. The grounding receptacle symbol indicates where the grounding plug
shall be inserted to accomplish the grounding process.
The symbol and lettering will be painted MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black, number 37038 per
MIL-C-83413/9-2. See figure 7-12 for dimensions.
TM 55-1500-345-23
Fuel Tank Filler Areas. Fuel tank filler
c.
caps will be painted the same as the color
scheme of the aircraft. A 1 inch wide ring (annulus) with a 6.0 inch inside diameter (or as indicated in Chapter 9 or 10) will be painted around
the filler cap, black for tactical aircraft, red for all
other paint schemes.
Example:
CAUTION
Disconnect electrical wiring before
removing wings.
Internal Station and Compartment Markd.
ings. When applicable, internal station and
compartment markings will be retained. Aircraft
-10 or the -20 manuals will be used to deterapmine station location. Station markings will
pear as indicated in figure 8-4.
7-29. OXYGEN OUTLETS. Mark all oxygen outlets — WARNING, NO SMOKING WHILE
OXYGEN IN USE.
L I F T P O I N T S . All lift points will
7-30.
indicated by an arrow pointing to the lift point.
The word LIFT will be marked above the lift point
in letters 1/2 inch high. Notations, such as NO
LIFT or NO PUSH, should be applied on areas of
aircraft which would be subject to damage by
such action.
be
7-31 . S T R U T N U M B E R S . All wing struts
will be numbered with the part number. The
number will be located at the lower end, with the
top of the letters and numerals forward.
7-32. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS. A
warning will be painted at the points where it is
necessary to break electrical connections when
removing wings, tail booms, or other assemblies
containing hidden wiring. The letters will be of
sufficient height to provide a permanent, distinct,
and legible marking.
7 - 3 3 . W A L K W A Y S . Areas immediately adjacent to the walkways will be marked NO STEP in
accordance with chapters 9 and 10.
7-34. NATO SYMBOL MARKINGS
AIRCRAFT SERVICING POINTS.
OF
a.
The U.S. Army has ratified a NATO Standardization Agreement (STANAG) NO. 3109., ABC
AIR STD 51/2, and STANAG 3230 which promulgates standard aircraft markings. The standard
markings will facilitate cross-servicing of NATO
aircraft, thereby insuring more effective crossservice operations. NATO symbols will be
retained only on aircraft assigned to NATO areas.
b.
The servicing and precautionary markings
of Army aircraft will be in accordance with the
symbols shown and described herein.
c.
Symbols will be approximately 4 inches in
the longest dimension, except where otherwise
specified. However, smaller sized symbols may
be used if required by the item or area to be marked. (See Chapter 8).
d.
Lettering which supplements the symbols
will be in the scale of 1 to 4 in relation to the symbol. (See Chapter 8).
Access doors or panels to the servicing
e.
points will be marked with appropriate servicing
symbol or symbols.
7-13
TM55-1500-345-23
f.
Normally markings will be in black, except
ground handling and safety point which will be
marked in orange.
Material and Size, Plates wiII be conb.
structed of sheet metal 6 inches high by 9 inches
wide.
Colors will be in accordance with Federal
g.
Standard FED-STD-595. The following basic colo rS , which are specified with symbol or function,
will be used unless otherwise indicated:
Method of Marking. Grade will b
c.
designated by five-pointed white stars, 2 inches in
diameter, with one point upward, equally spaced
on the horizontal center of the line of the pIate.
The plates will be painted with gloss red, shade
No. 11136, and the 5 pointed stars will be painted
gloss white, shade No. 17875.
COLOR
NON-TACTICAL
TACTICAL
Black
No. 17038
37038
White
No. 17875
37875
Red
No. 11136
31136
Orange-yellow
No. 13538
33538
Yellow
No. 13655
33538
Green
No. 14110
34110
h.
For NATO symbols or codes on fuels and
lubricants, refer to TB 34-9-25.
The symbols and colors are in accordance
i.
with international agreements. (See Chapter 8).
Any changes or recommendations will be processed through departmental standardization offices so that appropriate action may be taken
respecting the international agreement concerned.
7-35. AIRCRAFT
GENERAL OFFICERS.
PLATES
FOR
a.
General. If desired, star plates may be
displayed on Army aircraft. Star plates will be
mounted on both sides of the aircraft; however a
specific location for mounting the plates is not
prescribed herein due to the various design
characteristics involved.
7-14
Change 1
e
7-36. JETTISONABLE COMPONENTS.
a.
Canopies. Jettisonable aircraft canopies
will have the aircraft serial number stenciled on
the outside of the canopy frame, on the left-hand
side, 6 inches from forward end. using 1-inch
numbers and letters provided sufficient space is
available. If sufficient space is not available to accommodate 1-inch numbers and letters, they will
be as large as space permits. Also, aircraft utilizing cartridge actuated devices will be marked in
accordance with Chapter 10.
b.
Ejection Seats . A b l a c k e q u i l a t e r a l
triangle with 9-inch sides and with apex pointing
downward, with the word DANGER on each side
of the triangle, will be applied on each side of the
fuselage. The words EJECTION SEAT in black letters will be painted above the triangle. Additional
notations will be optional.
7-37.
FLUID LINE IDENTIFICATION.
Fluid lines will be identified as specified in Military Standard MIL-STD-1247.
7-38. STORAGE BATTERIES. The nota tion “BATTERY LOCATION” with location given
will be placed on the left side of the fuselage or
tail boom as viewed from the rear of the aircraft.
The label “BATTERY LOCATION” may be omitted
only if the battery access is located where label
would normally be placed.
TM55-1500-345-23
The fore and aft location of the marking
a.
will be approximately in line with the trailing edge
of the wing.
The vertical location of the marking will be
b.
at a point 2 to 3 feet off the ground with the
airplane in the wheels-up position and resting on
the ground, or in the case of airplanes having fixed landing gear, with the landing gear collapsed.
When battery is accessible via a panel or door, the
notation “BATTERY ACCESS” will be marked in
block letters not less than 1/2 inch high on battery
access door. In the event of interference with windows, enclosures, etc. the marking will be placed
as near the above mentioned location as practicable. Either stencils, or a decalcomania, conforming to paragraph 6-5 may be used to apply the
marking.
The lettering of battery location will be 7/8
c.
inch plus or minus 1/8 inch in height. The marking
will be black shade No. 37038, on aircraft green
and gloss black, on aluminized or international
orange and white painted surfaces.
7-39. AMERICAN FLAG DECALS.
a. The American flag will be applied to Army
aircraft which support relief operations outside
continental limits of the United States, unless
specifically prohibited by the Unit Commander.
b. Decals should be placed in a horizontal position on each aircraft. Minimum decal size for CH47 and larger aircraft should be 34 inches X 17-1/2
inches, and for UH-60 and smaller aircraft, 17-3/4
inches X 9-3/4 inches.
c. The American flag decal is to be positioned
on vertical stabilizer of fixed wing aircraft, on CH47, and the cargo door of Utility Rotary Wing Aircraft. Decals will be placed on major sheet metal
structure of medical service aircraft and other
rotary wing aircraft.
d. The American flag, when located on aircraft,
should be positioned horizontally in such a manner that union (blue field) should be upper-most
with stripes of the flag trailing at all times.
e. Flags printed on pressure-sensitive tapes are
to be procured locally.
7-40. DESCRIPTION
PAINT SYSTEM.
OF
EXTERIOR
Use this paragraph if no specific guidance
a.
for a particular aircraft is shown in Chapters 9 and
10.
b. Show painter’s name or code, date, wash
Primer (WP), primer (P), and top coat (L for lacquer,
C for coatings, etc.) and quantity of coats. Painter
can be Government, for example, “NCAD”, or
Commercial.
c.
Example:
** WPI-P2-L3 Date
WP
— indicates wash primer used
P
— indicates primer used
L
— indicates lacquer used (if
req’d)
C
— indicates coating used (if
req’d)
Location. On left side of aircraft below
d.
the Serial Number and Fuel Specification. Also
enter the above information in the applicable DA
form 2408-15.
Change 1 7-15
TM55-1500-345-23
Section Xl.
7-41.
MARKING OF INSTRUMENTS
GENERAL.
a. This Section provides the general method of
marking aircraft instruments, the interpretation of these
markings, and specific instructions for the application
of the markings.
NOTE
This Section is the subject of International
Standardization Agreement STANAG No.
3436.
b. ACTUAL MARKINGS AND FUEL GRADE FOR
SPECIFIC AIRCRAFT.
The actual markings for specific aircraft and the
fuel grade to which any set of markings apply may be
determined by reference to the instrument markings
presented in the -10 Operator’s Manual for the aircraft
involved.
c. INTERPRETATION OF THE RANGE
MARKINGS.
The instrument range markings are designed to
7-16 Change 3
indicate to the pilot, at a glance, that flight operation is
being accomplished in a safe, desirable, or unsafe
region. Generally speaking the instrument marking
system consists of four colors and intermediate blank
spaces as illustrated in the fictitious instrument in figure
7-3.
d. INDEX MARK.
The index mark is used to indicate any movement between the glass and the case and thus reveal
any errors in the location of the markers by such movement.
e. Deleted.
f.
MIXTURE CONTROL
MARKINGS.
QUADRANT
These markings are used to identify the automatic
lean and automatic rich positions on the control
quadrant.
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 7-3.Sample Markings
Change 1
7-17
7-42. METHOD OF MARKING.
7-43. APPLICATION OF MARKINGS.
a. Normally the markings will be placed directly
over the instrument graduations as in the sample instruments. However, if in this position the markings
should interfere with instrument readings from the
normal crew position, it is permissible to move the
marker above or below the graduations as required.
Care must be taken to assure that the markings cover
the correct range when they are moved towards the
center. It will be noted that the length of the marking
required to cover given instrument range becomes
smaller as it is moved closer to the center of the dial.
(See figure 7-4, detail A.) To avoid possible error, it is
suggested that lines be drawn from the extremities of
the graduations to be encompassed, to the center of
the dial. The marking can then be placed anywhere
within these two lines. Every effort should be made,
however, to keep the markings as far from the center
of the dial as possible.
a. RANGE MARKINGS. The instrument range
marking will be made using tape, Federal Specification A-A-113, the altermate method range marking
may be made using lacquer, Federal Specification
TT-L-32, in the color desired. For night vision use
tape, reflective Federal Specification L-S-300, in the
color desired. (Reference Table 8-3).
b. Instruments with multirotation pointers will
have the number of times that the pointer crosses zero
indicated by short dashes at right angles to the marking, as illustrated in figure 7-4, Detail B. It will be
noted that the green arc extends from 1700 to 2300
and that the red radial is at 2500.
(1) Clean the surface of the gage to be marked, making sure all dirt, oil and grease have been
removed.
(2) Cut the tape to desired ARC length and
color desired, approximately 1/16 of an inch thick.
(3) Apply the tape making sure all bubbles
and wrinkles have been removed.
(4) For lacquer marking clean surface as (a)
above, making the range markings approximately
1/16 of an inch thick in the color and range desired.
NOTE
All operating ranges will be established using the applicable Aircraft Operators Manual.
Figure 7-4. Method of Marking
7-18
Change 3
TM 55-1500-345-23
NOTE
Where conditions permit on 1 inch ond 2
inch clamp mounted indicators, which
have the numerals and graduations on the
outer circumference of the dial the fluorescent range marks wilI be installed on
the front edge of the case just outside the
cover glass. In those instances where the
foregoing does not apply refer to the
instrument markings presented in the -10
Operator’s Manual.
(5) After allowing the applied marker to air dry for
30 minutes, trim to exact size and paint over the marker with
another coat of varnish.
NOTE
If it is desired to remove any excess varnish, this may be done within 1/2 hour
after application with a cloth dampened
with naphtha.
Figure 7-5. Mixture Control Quadrant
NOTE
b. INDEX MARK. A white index mark not over 1/16inch wide will be painted across the joint between the glass
and the case at the bottom of the center (6 o’ clock) position,
or in the uncalibrated area of all instruments having range
markings on the glass. On panel installed clamp mount type
instruments, the mark will be extended across the edge of
the instrument case onto the mounting panel. On clamp
mount type instruments, not panel installed, the mark will be
extended across the rim of the case, onto the case. On instruments utilizing the entire circumference of the dial for calibration increments the location of the index mark will be
left to the discretion of the using activity.
c. MIXTURE CONTROL QUADRANT MARKINGS.
Mark the automatic lean position with gloss cellulose nitrate
lacquer, light blue, Federal Specification TT-L-32. Mark the
automatic rich position with gloss cellulose nitrate lacquer,
light green, Federal Specification TT-L-32. (See figure 7-5).
The following paragraphs describing the
markings for the various types of instruments attempt to cover all possible markings for each instrument. It should be
noted that the illustrated instruments are
typical and may or may not include all the
markings mentioned in the descriptive
paragraphs.
NOTE
It is not intended in this technical manual
to set forth the exact ranges to be covered
by these instrument markings for all aircraft but to illustrate the correct method of
marking the various types of instruments.
For example, the manifold pressure gage
(figure 7-6 detail A) shows a takeoff value
of 49 inches; for one aircraft it might be
55 inches; for another it might be 72 inches; for another, 100 inches, and the like.
The exact ranges to be covered on each
instrument for a given aircraft can by
determined only through reference to the
instrument marking page of the appropriate -10 Operator’s Manual.
Change 5
7-19
TM55-1500-345-23
7-44. MARKINGS FOR RECIPROCATING ENGINE AIRCRAFT
a. MANIFOLD PRESSURE GAGE. (See figure 76, detail A.)
(1) BLUE ARC. Indicates the range within which
operation is permitted in auto-lean. The bottom of this
arc indicates the minimum manifold pressure desirable
in flight determined by engine characteristics. The
top of this arc indicates the manifold pressure at which
mixture control must be moved into auto-rich.
(2) GREEN RADIAL OR ARC. Describes the range
within which operation must be in auto-rich. The
radial or top of this arc indicates maximum continuous
power. All operation above this manifold pressure is
limited in time (usually 5 or 15 minutes).
(3) SHORT RED RADIAL.. Indicates manifold pressure for takeoff.
(4) LONG RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum dry
war emergency manifold pressure.
(5) LONG RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum war
emergency manifold pressure with water injection.
b. TACHOMETER. (See figure 7-6, detail B.)
(1) BLUE ARC. Indicates rpm range within which
auto-lean, operation is permitted. The bottom of this
arc indicates the minimum rpm desirable in flight
because of engine limitations, generator cut-out, etc.
The top of this arc indicates the rpm at which the mixture control must be moved to auto-rich.
(2) GREEN RADIAL OR ARC. Indicates rpm range
within which auto-rich operation is required. The
radial or top of this arc indicates maximum continuous
power. All operation above this rpm is limited in time
(usually 5 or 15 minutes).
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum rpm.
(4) RED ARC. May be used to show region of
prohibited operation because of dangerous vibration or
similar reasons.
c. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE GAGE. (See
figure 7-6, detail C.)
(1) BLUE ARC. Indicates the range within which
operation is permitted in auto-Iean. The bottom of this
arc indicates the minimum temperature desirable for
flight (minimum engine warmth required for good fuel
vaporization and efficient engine operation). The top
of this arc indicates the temperature at which the mixture control must be moved to auto-rich.
(2) GREEN ARC. Describes the range within
which operation must be in auto-rich. The top of this
7-20 Change 1
arc indicates maximum continuous power; all operation
above this temperature is limited in time (usually 5
or 15 minutes).
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
temperature.
d. CARBURETOR AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE.
(See figure 7-6, detail D.)
(1) YELLOW ARC. Indicates the temperature range
within which undesirable conditions may exist such as
danger of icing or poor fuel vaporization.
(2) GREEN ARC. Indicates the temperature range
o! best operation and assures good vaporization.
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
temperature, usually because of detonation danger.
e. COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAGE. (See figure
7-7, detail A.)
(1) GREEN ARC. Describes the range within
which the temperature must remain during continuous
operation. The bottom of this arc indicates minimum
desirable temperature for flight. The top of this arc
indicates maximum continuous power. All operation
above this temperature is limited in time (usually 5 or
15 minutes).
(2) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
temperature.
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates war emergency maximum temperature.
f. TORQUEMETER. (See figure 7-7, detail B.)
(1) BLUE ARC. Indicates the range within which
operation is permitted in auto-lean. The bottom of this
arc indicates the minimum torque pressure desirable
in flight determined by engine characteristics. The
top of this arc indicates the torque pressure at which
mixture control must be moved into auto-rich.
(2) GREEN RADIAL OR ARC. Describes the
range within which operation must be in auto-rich.
The radial or top of this arc indicates maximum continuous power. All operation above this torque pressure
is limited in time (usually 5 or 15 minutes).
(3) SHORT RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum dry
torque pressure.
(4) LONG RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum wet
torque pressure.
Figure 7-6. Typical Manifold Pressure Gage, Tachometer, Cylinder Head Temperature Gage, and Air Temperature Gage Markings.
Change 1
7-21
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 7-7. Typical Coolant Temperature Gage and Torquemeter Markings
7-22 Change 1
TM 55-1500-345-23
7-45.
MARKINGS
FOR
a. TACHOMETER. (See figure 7-8, detail A.)
(1) GREEN ARC. Describes the range within which
the rpm must falI during continuous flight operation.
The bottom of this arc describes the minimum rpm
for best cruising. Considerable range will be lost
when operating below this rpm. The top of this arc
indicates maximum continuous rpm; operation above
which is limited to a specified length of time.
(2) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum rpm.
(3) RED ARC. May be used to show region of prohibited operation because of dangerous vibration or
similar reasons.
JET
ENGINE
AIRCRAFT
b. EXHAUST TEMPERATURE GAGE. (See figure 7-8,
detail B.)
(1) RED RADIAL. Indicates minimum permissible
temperature during flight.
(2) GREEN ARC. Indicates desirable temperature
during continuous operation.
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
temperature for flight.
(4) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
temperature during starting or acceleration.
Figure 7-8. Typical Tachometer and Engine Exhaust Temperature Gage Markings
Change 1 7-23
7-46. MARKINGS FOR HELICOPTERS
a.
DUEL TACHOMETER. (See figure 7-9.)
(1) ROTOR.
(2) GREEN ARC. Indicates rotor rpm range
during powered flight. The bottom of this arc
describes minimum rotor rpm for continuous
flight. The top of this arc indicates maximum
rotor rpm with power.
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible autorotative rpm.
(4) RED ARC OR RADIAL. May be used to
show regions of prohibited operation because of
dangerous vibration or similar reasons.
(5) ENGINE.
(6) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum rpm.
b. NON CALIBRATED ROTOR SCALE. To locate
a particular rotor speed on a universal type dual
tachometer on which the rotor scale is not
calibrated, use the following procedure.
(1) Find the speed on the engine scale corresponding to the desired rotor speed point by
multiplying the desired rotor speed by the engine
rotor gear ratio of the particular aircraft.
(2) Draw a line from the engine speed point
on the engine scale, as determined above, to the
center of the dial. The point where this line
crosses the rotor scale is the desired rpm point on
that scale.
(3) The above procedure can be used to
locate any point on the rotor scale. The reverse of
this procedure can be used to determine the rpm
value of any point marked on the rotor scale.
Figure 7-9. Typical Dual Tachometer Markings
7-24 Change 1
TM55-1500-345-23
7-47. MARKINGS FOR ALL AIRCRAFT
a. OIL PRESSURE GAGE. (See figure 7-10, detail
A.)
(2) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
positive acceleration at design gross weight.
(1) LOWER RED RADIAL. Indicate. minimum oil
pressure permissible in flight.
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
negative acceleration at maximum gross weight.
(2) GREEN ARC. Indicates desirable oil pressure
range during continuous operation.
(3) UPPER RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible oil pressure.
b. OIL TEMPERATURE GAGE. (See figure 7-10,
detail B.)
(1) LOWER RED RADIAL. Indicates minimum permissible temperature during flight.
(2) GREEN ARC. Indicates desirable temperature
during continuous operation.
e. HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GAGE. (See figure 711, detail B.)
(1) YELLOW RADIAL. Indicates pressure required for one brake application.
(2) GREEN ARC. Indicates normal operating pressure. The lower end of this arc indicates hydraulic
pump cut-in pressure and the upper end indicates cutout pressure.
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
pressure.
(3) UPPER RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible temperature.
f. SUCTION GAGE. (See figure 7-11, detail C.)
c. AIRSPEED INDICATOR. (See figure 7-10,
details C and D.)
(1) RED RADIAL. Indicates minimum desirable
suction.
(1) YELLOW RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible airspeed with either full flaps or landing
gear extended. When the maximum permissible speed
with flaps down differs from that with gear down, the
lower speed and condition will be given. A notation
in parenthesis will also be included to show the higher
limiting speed and condition.
(2) GREEN ARC. Indicates desirable suction
range.
(2) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
diving speed at design gross weight.
(3) YELLOW ARC. Defines the range of maximum
permissible diving speeds from maximum to design
gross weight.
d. ACCELEROMETER. (See figure 7-11, detail A.)
(1) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum permissible
positive acceleration at maximum gross weight.
(3) RED RADIAL. Indicates maximum desirable
suction.
g. DEICER GAGE. (See figure 7-11, detail D.)
(1) GREEN ARC.
range.
Indicates desirable pressure
(2) RED RADIAL.
pressure.
Indicates maximum permissible
h. FUEL PRESSURE GAGE. (See figure 7-11, detail
E.)
Same as oil pressure gage. (Refer to subparagraph a).
Change 1 7-25
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 7-10. Typical Oil Pressure Gage, Oil Temperature Gage, and Airspeed Indicator Markings
7-26 Change 1
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 7-11. Typical Accelerometer, Hydraulic Pressure Gage, Deicer Gage, and Fuel Pressure Goge Markings.
Change 3
Page 7-28 has been deleted.
7-27
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 7-12. Fuel Nozzle Ground Dimensions.
Change 5
7-29/(7-30 blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 8
MISCELLANEOUS TABLES AND ILLUSTRATIONS
Table 8-1.
Technical Manuals, Technical Bulletins, and AR’s
TM 5-618
Painting, Repairs and Utilities
TB 55-9150-200-24
Engine and Transmission Oil, Fuels, and Additives for
Army Aircraft
TM 1-1500-344-23 Series
Aircraft Weapons Systems Cleaning and Corrosion
Control
AR 200-1
Environmental Protection and Enhancement
TB 43-0101
Handling, Storage and Disposal of Army Aircraft
components containing Radioactive Materials
TB 43-0242
WD Carc Spot Painting
TB MED 501
Occupational and Environmental Health: Hearing
conservation
TB MED 502
Occupational and Environmental Health: Respiratory
Protection Program
TM 1-1500-204-23 (Series)
General Aircraft Maintenance Manual
Table 8-2.
Standards-American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D1193-Reagent Water
Federal Standard 595
- Colors
Military Standard 795
- Colors
Change 12
8-1
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-3.
Nomenclature
Consumable Items List
Speci.cation
NSN
Quantity
1.
Acid, Chromic
O-C-303
6810-00-264-6517
5 lb can
2.
Alcohol, Ethyl
O-E-760
6810-00-201-0907
5 gal
3.
Barrier Material
MIL-B-131
8135-00-282-0565
200 yds
4.
Bicarbonate, Sodium
O-S-576
6810-00-264-6618
1 lb
5.
Brush, Long Handle, Non-Metallic
MIL-B-23958
7920-00-051-4384
Each
6.
Cloth, Abrasive, Aluminum Oxide,
180 grit
P-C-451
5350-00-192-5051
Sheet
7.
Cloth, Abrasive, Aluminum Oxide,
240 grit
P-C-451
5350-00-161-9715
Sheet
8.
Cloth, Abrasive, Aluminum Oxide,
320 grit
P-C-451
5350-00-246-0330
Sheet
9.
Cloth, Lint-Free
CCC-C-46
8305-00-753-2967
50 yds
10.
Coating, Compound, Metal
Pretreatment
MIL-C-8514
8030-01-015-6104
1 gal kit
11.
Coating, Fluorescent Red-Orange
Paint
MIL-P-21600
8010-00-082-2421
1 gal
12.
Coating Kit, Rain Erosion Resistant,
CLA TY 11
MIL-C-83231
8010-00-459-1756
1 gal kit
13.
Coating, Polyurethane, Rain Erosion,
Thermally Re.ective
MIL-C-83445
8010-01-132-2976
1 gal kit
14.
Coating, Polyurethane, Olive Drab,
No. 34088
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-055-2319
1 gal kit
15.
Coating, Polyurethane, Olive Drab,
No. 34088
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9875
5 gal kit
16.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Black,
No. 37038
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9879
5 gal kit
16.1
White Paint, General Purpose
8010-00-087-0107
1 qt
17.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Black,
No. 37038
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9885
1 qt
18.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Black,
No. 37038
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-146-2646
1 gal
19.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft
Green, No. 34031
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-129-9348*
55 gal
(Component
A)
8-2
Change 11
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-3.
Consumable Items List — Continued
Nomenclature
Speci.cation
NSN
Quantity
20.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft
Green, No. 34031
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-131-6255
1 gal
21.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft
Green, No. 34031
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-131-6262
5 gal
22.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft
Green, No. 34031
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-141-2420
1 qt
23.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Gray,
Exterior, No. 36300
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-127-8908
1 gal
24.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Gray,
Exterior, No. 36300
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9876
5 gal
25.
Coating, Polyurethane,
Orange/Yellow, No. 33538
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
26.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Gray,
Exterior, No. 36300
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9882
1 qt
27.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Gray,
Interior, No. 36231
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-146-2649
1 gal
28.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Red,
No. 31136
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9873
1 gal
29.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Red,
No. 31136
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9878
5 gal
30.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft Red,
No. 31136
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9884
1 qt
31.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft
White, No. 37875
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9872
1 gal
32.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft
White, No. 37875
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9877
5 gal
33.
Coating, Polyurethane, Aircraft
White, No. 37875
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9883
1 qt
Change 11
8-3
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-3.
Consumable Items List — Continued
Nomenclature
Specification
NSN
Quantity
34.
Coating, Polyurethane, Component
B (for all 55 gallon drum kits)
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
35.
Coating, Polyurethane, Dark Sand
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
36.
Coating, Polyurethane, Insignia Blue,
No. 35044
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9880
5 gal
37.
Coating, Polyurethane, Insignia Blue,
No. 35044
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-144-9887
1 qt
38.
Coating, Polyurethane Insignia Blue,
35044
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039
8010-01-146-2648
1 gal
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
DELETED
Coating, Walkway, Type II
Compound, Sealing
Dichloromethane
Dichromate, Potassium
Ethylene, Glycol, Monoethyl Ether
Acetate
MIL-W-5044
MIL-S-7124
MIL-D-6998
O-P-559
MIL-E-7125
5610-00-641-0427
8030-00-024-9634
6810-00-244-0290
6810-00-264-6525
6810-00-263-0563
1 gal
1 pt
5 gal
5 lb
1 Gal can
45.
Films, Chemical, Corrosion Resistant
for Aluminum, Class 1A
MIL-C-5541
8030-00-811-3723
2 lb can
46.
Foil, Metal, 5052 Aluminum Alloy
QQ-A-1876
9535-00-541-2453
Roll
47.
Lacquer, Lusterless Black, Shade
37038
MIL-L-19538
8010-00-527-2884
1 gal
48.
Lacquer, Black
MIL-DTL-53059
or MIL-DTL64159
8010-01-042-9438
1 gal
49.
50.
Lacquer, Gray No. 36231
Lacquer, Cellulose Nitrate Aluminum,
Shade 17178
TT-L-20
TT-L-32
8010-00-515-1568
8010-00-241-8406
1 gal can
1 gal
51.
52.
Lacquer, Gray Shade 36231
Lacquer, Lusterless Aircraft Green
TT-L-20
MIL-DTL-53059
or MIL-DTL64159
8010-00-515-1568
8010-00-083-6588
1 gal
5 gal can
53.
Lacquer, Lusterless Aircraft Green
MIL-DTL-53059
or MIL-DTL64159
8010-01-033-8917
1 gal
53.1
53.2
Lacquer, Acrylic, Blue Shade 15044
MIL-PRF-81352C
Lacquer, Acrylic, Green Shade 14187 MIL-PRF-81352C
8010-00-551-7933
8010-00-527-2483
1 Gal
1 Gal
53.3
Lacquer, Acrylic, Red Shade 11136
8010-00-551-7934
1 Qt
8-4
Change 12
MIL-PRF-81352C
8010-01-132-0205**
55 gal
1 gal
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-3.
Consumable Items List — Continued
Nomenclature
Specification
NSN
Quantity
53.4
Lacquer, Acrylic, Yellow Shade 13538
MIL-PRF-81352C
8010-00-527-2496
1 Qt
54.
Mat, Abrasive Nylon
MIL-A-9962
5350-00-967-5089
Sheet
55.
Methyl Ethyl Ketone
TT-M-261
6810-00-281-2785
1 gal
56.
Paint, Epoxy, Gray, No. 36231
MIL-C-22750
8010-01-082-3060
1 qt
57.
Paper, Abrasive, No. 400
P-P-101
5350-00-224-7201
Sheet
58.
Paper, Abrasive, 280 Grit
P-P-105
5350-00-264-3489
Sheet
59.
Primer, Lead and Chromatic Free
MIL-P-85582
8010-01-218-0857
1 gal kit
60.
Paper, Barrier, Grade A, Type I, Class
2
MIL-B-121
8135-00-753-4661
Roll
61.
Deleted.
62.
Primer, Red
MIL-P-52192
8010-00-082-1714
5 qt kit
63.
Primer, Wash
DOD-P-15328
8030-00-281-2726
1 gal kit
64.
Corrosion Preventive Compound,
Petrolatum Hot Application, Grade 1
MIL-C-11796
8030-00-285-1570
35 lb pail
65.
Corrosion Preventive Compound,
Solvent Cutback Cold Application,
Grade 1
MIL-C-16173
8030-00-231-2345
1 gal
66.
Remover, Paint
MIL-R-25134
8010-00-815-2970
1 gal
67.
Remover, Paint, Type I
MIL-R-81294
8010-00-181-7568
1 gal
68.
Sealant, Class B
MIL-S-8784
8030-00-152-0021
8 oz
69.
Sealant, Safety Walk, Pressure
Sensitive Material, Type III
MIL-D-17951
8030-00-264-3886
5 oz
70.
Deleted
71.
Deleted
72.
Sealing Compound Class B
MIL-S-7124
8030-00-024-9634
1 pt
73.
Sheet, Plastic, Laminated Type ADP,
.062 Thick
L-P-387A
9330-00-282-5640
Sheet
74.
Deleted
75.
Solvent, Ethyl Acetate
TT-E-751
6810-00-245-6694
5 gal
76.
Tape, Insulation
MIL-I-15126
5970-00-137-9501
Roll
77.
Tape, Masking
PPP-T-42
7510-00-266-6712
60 yd roll
78.
Tape, Pressure Sensitive
MIL-T-21595
7510-00-680-2395
2" wide roll
79.
Tape, Pressure Sensitive Adhesive
PPP-T-60
7510-00-281-2700
3" wide roll
Change 12
8-5
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-3.
Consumable Items List — Continued
Nomenclature
Specification
NSN
Quantity
80.
Tape, Pressure Sensitive Adhesive,
Type II
MIL-T-23397
7510-00-473-9513
2" wide roll
80.1
Tape, Pressure Sensitive, Blue
A-A-113
7510-00-550-7124
1/2 X 2592 in
roll
80.2
Tape, Pressure Sensitive, Green
A-A-113
7510-00-550-7129
1/2 X 2592 in
roll
80.3
Tape, Pressure Sensitive, Red
A-A-113
7510-00-550-7126
1/2 X 2592 in
roll
80.4
Tape, Pressure Sensitive, Yellow
A-A-113
7510-00-550-7125
1/2 X 2592 in
roll
80.5
Tape, Pressure
A-A113
7510-00-550-7127
80.6
Tape, Reflective, Yellow
L-S-300
9390-00-057-4545
50 yd roll
80.7
Tape, Reflective, Green
L-S-300
9390-00-106-2466
50 yd roll
80.8
Tape, Reflective, Red
L-S-300
9390-00-106-2467
50 yd roll
81.
Thinner
MIL-T-6096
8010-00-165-5582
1 gal
82.
Thinner, Aliphatic Polyurethane
Coating
MIL-T-81772
8010-00-181-8080
1 gal
83.
Thinner, Lacquer
TT-T-266
8010-00-160-5787
1 gal
84.
Toluene
TT-T-548
6810-00-290-0048
5 gal
85.
Xylene
ASTM D 846
6810-00-584-4070
5 gal
86.
Deleted
87.
Urethane, Gloss
MIL-C-83286
Local Purchase ***
88.
Varnish, Acid-Proof
TT-V-51
8010-00-160-5856
5 gal
89.
Wax, Paraffin
VV-W-95
9160-00-285-2044
1 lb cake
90.
Wool, Aluminum
MIL-A-4864
5350-00-286-4851
1 lb
91.
Litmus, Paper AC (Blue)
MS 36253-2
6640-00-290-0146
100 ea
92.
Litmus, Paper AC (Red)
MS 36253-1
6640-00-290-0147
100 ea
93.
Paint Heat Resistant, Gray
MIL-P-14105
8010-00-877-6415
1 gal
94.
Lacquer, Aluminum, Heat Resisting,
Shade 17178
TT-P-28
8010-00-815-2592
1 gal
95.
Paint, Heat Resisting Shade 34087
MIL-P-14105
8010-00-616-4009
1 gal
96.
Epoxy Primer Coating
MIL-P-53022
8010-01-193-0516
1 qt kit
8-6
Change 11
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-3.
Consumable Items List — Continued
Nomenclature
Specification
NSN
Quantity
97.
Coating Polyurethane aircraft green,
No. 34031
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039 TY4
8010-01-316-2219
1 gal
98.
Coating Polyurethane aircraft black,
No. 37038
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039 TY4
8010-01-340-5176
4 gal
99.
Coating Polyurethane aircraft yellow,
No. 33538
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039 TY4
8010-01-247-8885
1 qt
100.
Coating Polyurethane aircraft tan,
No. 33446
MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL53039 TY4
8010-01-306-9680
1 gal
101.
Primer Coating, epoxy
MIL-P-53030
8010-01-193-0520
1 gal
102.
Acetone, Technical
ASTM-D329
6810-01-003-0262
1 gal
103.
Naphtha, Aliphatic
TT-N-95
6810-00-238-8119
1 gal
*
55 gallon drums Component A: If these NSNs are used, order four, and one 55-gallon drum of Component B will
also be shipped. This is consistent with the mixing ratio required of 4 (Component A) to 1 (Component B).
**
Component B.
***
Although Olive Drab is not listed in the Military Specification or Qualified Products List (QPL), it is available
from the companies listed on the QPL.
Change 12
8-7
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-4.
State Abbreviations
Alaska
AK
Montana
MT
Alabama
AL
Nebraska
NE
Arizona
AZ
Nevada
NV
Arkansas
AR
New Hampshire
NH
California
CA
New Jersey
NJ
Colorado
CO
New Mexico
NM
Connecticut
CT
New York
NY
Delaware
DE
North Carolina
NC
District of Columbia
DC
North Dakota
ND
Florida
FL
Ohio
OH
Georgia
GA
Oklahoma
OK
Guam
GU
Oregon
OR
Hawaii
HI
Pennsylvania
PA
Idaho
ID
Puerto Rico
PR
Illinois
IL
Rhode Island
RI
Indiana
IN
South Carolina
SC
Iowa
IA
South Dakota
SD
Kansas
KS
Tennessee
TN
Kentucky
KY
Texas
TX
Louisiana
LA
Utah
UT
Maine
ME
Vermont
VT
Maryland
MD
Virginia
VA
Massachusetts
MA
Virgin Islands
VI
Michigan
MI
Washington
WA
Minnesota
MN
West Virginia
WV
Mississippi
MS
Wisconsin
WI
Missouri
MO
Wyoming
WY
8-8
Change 11
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-5. Definitions of Common Painting Terms
Common Painting Terms
Definitions
Abrasion Resistance
The resistance of a surface to being worn by rubbing or friction.
Acrylic
A family of synthetic resins made by polymerizing esters of acrylic
acids.
Aliphatic
The name applied to petroleum products which are straight-chain
hydrocarbons derived from a paraffin-base crude oil.
Alkyd
Asynthetic resin which is the condensation product of a Polybasic
acid such as phthalic, a polyhydric alcohol such as glycerin and an
oil fatty acid.
Alligatoring
A form of paint failure in which cracks form on the surface layer only. It is caused by the application of thick films where the underlying surface remains relatively soft.
Binder
The nonvolatile portion of a coating vehicle which is the filmforming ingredient used to bind the pigment particles together.
Bleeding
A condition which exists when the color of a dye, stain or pigment
passes through the top coat producing a stain. It occurs when the
pigment is somewhat soluble in the vehicle of the top coat.
Blistering
A paint film failure usually caused by application of paint on a surface containing an excessive amount of moisture or other volatile
material.
Blushing
A term applied to lacquers when they become partially opaque,
cloudy or translucent upon application or drying. Fast-evaporating
solvents may cool the film enough to cause water condensation,
and resultant precipitation of solid materials.
Catalyst
A substance which accelerates the speed of a chemical reaction.
Chalking
The presence of a loose powder on the surface of a paint after exposure to the elements.
Checking
A phenomenon manifested by slight breaks in the surface of the
paint film.
Coalescence
The fusing together of a latex film upon evaporation of water.
Cobwebbing
Same as webbing - see webbing.
8-9
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-5. Definitions of Common Painting Terms — Continued
Common Painting Terms
Color
Definitions
A generic term referring inclusively to all colors of the spectrum,
and white and black. Color is described by three properties: hue,
lightness and saturation.
(1) Hue (color, character, dominant wavelength), blue, green, red,
etc.
(2) Lightness (brightness, reflectance, value)
scale between pure black and pure white.
position on the gray
(3) Saturation (purity, grayness, cleanliness,
purity or intensity of color.
muddiness, chroma),
Color Retention
Color stability after exposure to the elements.
Compatibility
The ability of two or more materials to mix with each other without
separation or adverse reaction.
Corrosion
Detrimental change in a material usually a metal under condition of
exposure.
Crawling
The tendency of a liquid to draw up because of high surface tension.
Crocking
Removal of color on abrasion or rubbing.
Defoamer
Products used for controlling undesirable foams.
Dew Point
The temperature at which the air becomes saturated with water
vapor.
Diluent
A liquid which is blended with an active solvent to reduce cost.
Drier
Any catalytic material which when added to a drying oil accelerates
drying or hardening of the film.
Dry Bulb Temperature
The temperature as indicated by an ordinary thermometer.
Efflorescence
A phenomenon whereby a whitish crust of fine crystals forms on a
painted surface. These are usually sodium salts which diffuse
through the paint film from the substrate.
8-10
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-5. Definitions of Common Painting Terms — Continued
Common Painting Terms
Definitions
Elastomeric Compound
Any of a variety of elastic compounds resembling rubber. Rubber is
an elastomeric compound.
Emulsifier
A material which when added to a mixture of dissimilar materials
such as oil and water will produce a stable homogeneous emulsion.
Emulsion
A suspension of fine particles of globules of a liquid within a liquid.
False Body
A composition which thins down on stirring is said to exhibit false
body.
Faying Surfaces
Surfaces fitted or joined closely or tightly.
Firepoint
The temperature at which a material takes fire without flame from
an external source.
Flash Point
Lowest temperature at which a substance in an open vessel gives
off enough vapors to produce a flash of fire when a flame is passed
near the surface.
Hue
Color, character, dominant wavelength, blue, green, red, etc.
Hydrogen Embrittlement
Embrittlement of a metal caused by absorption of hydrogen.
Hydrophilic
Attracted by water or water loving.
Hydrophobic
Repelled by water or water hating.
Hygroscopic
Absorbs and retains moisture from atmosphere or other sources.
Immiscible
Not miscible. Any liquid which will not mix with another liquid, in
which case it forms two separate layers or exhibits cloudiness or
turbidity.
Incompatible
This term is applied to liquid and solid systems to indicate that one
material cannot be mixed with another specified material without
separation or impairment of properties.
Inert
The term applied to various extended pigments such as asbestine,
barytes, silica calcium sulfate, mica, talc, etc. In general, they have
poor hiding power but they are inert from a chemical and physical
standpoint. While they contribute some desirable properties to a
paint, they are primarily used to lower the cost.
8-11
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-5. Definitions of Common Painting Terms — Continued
Definitions
Common Painting Terms
Inhibitor
Any substance which slows or prevents chemical reaction or
corrosion.
Intensity
The intensity of a color is its purity or saturation. For example, an
intense red is one which is a very strong, pure red color.
Lacquer
A term which usually indicates that the material dries by evaporation and forms a film from the nonvolatile constituents.
Lightness
(Brightness, reflectance, value) Position on the gray scale between
pure black and pure white.
Lipophilic
Oil loving.
Livering
An increase in the consistency of a paint resulting in a rubbery or
coagulated mass.
Luster
The gloss of a finish.
Mildew
Organic surfaces exposed to high temperature-humidity atmospheres are attacked by fungus growth. This is a dark discoloration.
Usually a mold type of fungus but more commonly called “mildew”.
Mineral Spirits
A petroleum fraction with boiling range between 300° and 400°F.
Mottling
A film defect associated with spraying. Appears as circular
imperfections.
Nitrocellulose
A substance produced by the treatment of cotton or wood fibers
with nitric acid. Used in lacquers.
Opaque
Impervious to light or not translucent.
Orange Peel
A pebbled film surface similar to the skin of an orange in appearance. It is caused by too rapid drying before leveling takes
place.
Organic
A compound containing carbon and hydrogen and in some cases
other elements such as oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, the
halogens, etc.
Pastel
A tint. A color to which white has been added.
8-12
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-5. Definitions of Common Painting Terms — Continued
Common Painting Terms
Definitions
PH Value
The numerical expression used to describe the hydrogen ion concentration. The PH value denotes the degree of acidity or alkalinity.
Phenolic Resins
A class of resins produced as the condensation product of phenol
or substituted phenol and formaldehyde or derivatives.
Pigment
A finely divided, insoluble substance which imparts color to the
material to which it is added.
Pigment Volume Concentration
The ratio of the total volume of pigment to the total volume of nonvolatile matter in a paint.
Pinholing
The appearance of fine, pimply elevations or tiny holes on a
coating.
Plasticizers
Materials which are added to resins to soften and improve flexibility.
Polymer
A large molecule formed when many molecules are linked together
by polymerization.
Primary Colors
In theory, those colors from which all other colors and white may be
made. The primary colors in visible light are red, green, and blue.
The so-called pigment primaries, each absorbing a light primary,
would then be blue green or cyan (minus red), majenta (minus
green), and yellow (minus blue). Because of deficiencies in the
available cyan and majenta colorants, confusion developed, so that
red, yellow and blue are now often referred to as the pigment
primaries.
A volatile compound which is employed to bring coatings to the
proper consistency. Also called thinner.
A measure of the deviation from normal that a beam of light
undergoes upon passing through a given substance.
Reducer
Reflective Index
Relative Humidity
A method for expressing the amount of moisture in the air. It is expressed in per cent of saturation and is an indication of the proportional amount of moisture that could be absorbed or held at that
temperature.
Resin
An organic polymer in the form of a crystalline or amorphous solid,
or viscous liquid, of either natural or synthetic origin.
Sagging
The tendency of a wet paint film to flow downward and become
thicker on vertical surfaces.
8-13
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-5. Definitions of Common Painting Terms — Continued
Definitions
Common Painting Terms
Saturation
Purity or intensity of color. Degree of freedom from grayness.
Seeds
Undesirable particles which develop in a liquid coating by partial
gelation of the vehicle or by agglomeration of pigment particles.
Shade
The difference in appearance between colors of similar hue.
Sheen
A specular reflectance taken at a low angle, usually 85°.
Skinning
The formation of a solid surface layer on a liquid varnish or paint
when exposed to air.
Solution
A homogeneous liquid mixture, the proportion of whose constituents may be varied within certain limits. A solid is said to be in
solution when the molecules of the liquid have exceeded the attraction of those of the solid.
Solvent
The term applied to products which dissolve the film forming constituents.
Specific Gravity
The ratio of the weight of an equal volume of a substance to the
weight of an equal volume of water at stated temperature.
Spreading Rate
The area of a surface over which a unit volume of paint will spread;
usually expressed in square feet per gallon.
Strength
The strength of a pigment is its opacity or tinting power.
Substrate
The basis metal.
Tint
A color produced by mixing a colored material, dye or pigment with
white pigment or paint.
Tinting Strength
The coloring power of a given quantity of pigment or paint.
Tone
A modification of a full-strength color (mass tone) secured by blending with other colors.
Toughness
The ability of a material to take bending, impact, etc. without cracking.
Vehicle
The liquid portion of any paint, enamel or lacquer.
8-14
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-5. Definitions of Common Painting Terms — Continued
Common Painting Terms
Definitions
Viscometer
Any instrument that measures viscosity or the internal friction of
fluidity of a liquid.
Viscosity
A property of fluids which can be described as the resistance to
flow.
Webbing
A stringy paint deposit similar to that of a spider web.
Wrinkle Finish
A varnish or enamel film which exhibits a novelty effect similar to
fine wrinkles.
8-15
TM55-1500-345-23
Table 8-6. Ventilation and Respirator Requirements for Application of Paints
Air Flow
(CFM/Sq Ft Open
Face Area, FPM)*
Facility
Walk-in room or deep booth
(crossdraft up to 50 FPM)#
(crossdraft up to 100 FPM)
(crossdraft up to 50 FPM)
(crossdraft up to 100 FPM)
Spray cabinets (less than
4 sq ft. open face area)
(crossdraft up to 100 FPM)
Spray cabinet (more than 4 sq ft
open face area)
(crossdraft up to 100 FPM)
<75
<125
>75
>125
Airline
Airline
Chemical Cartridge
Chemical Cartridge
<150
>150
Airline
Chemical Cartridge
<125
>125
Airline
Chemical Cartridge
Confined spaces
(for example inside or underneath vehicles or other equipment)
Airline
Outdoor application
Brush or roller application
Spray application
Indoor application
Respirator
Chemical Cartridge
Airline
No mechanical
ventilation
Airline
Cubic feet per minute per square foot of open face area (CFM/sq ft) is equivalent to feet per
minute (FPM). CFM is a volumetric flow rate; FPM is a linear flow rate. Values listed are the
minimum allowed.
(< – less than, > – greater than)
+
Respirator — Airline means NIOSE/MSEA-approved Type C positive
pressure device with a
full facepiece.
— Chemical cartridge means a NIOSE/MSEA-approved paint spray
respirator with organic
vapor cartridge(s), paint prefilter(s), full facepiece.
— Chemical cartridges and paint spray prefilters shall be changed with appropriate replacement elements based on the following:
— Daily
— When breakthrough (solvent odor) is detected by the wearer
— When breathing resistance is too great
#
Crossdrafts greater than 100 FPM should not be permitted.
8-16
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-7.
Current Safety Guidelines for Application of MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039B Paint
Type Of Painting
Facility
Walk-in Room or Deep
Booth (e.g., Vehicular
Booth)
Maximum
Crossdraft
(Feet per
Minute)
50
100
Spray Cabinet (Less
Than 4 ft2 Open Face
Area)
100
Spray Booth (More
Than 4 ft2 Open Face
Area)
100
Con.ned Spaces (e.g.,
Inside or Underneath
Vehicle)
- - -
Outdoor application
- - -
Indoor Application (No
Validation)
- - -
Application Safety Procedures
Minimum Cross-Section Air Flow Velocity (Feet per Minute)b
25
50
75
100
Airline
Respiratorc
125
150
175+
Chemical Cartridge Respirator
c
Airline Respirator
Chemical Cartridge Respirator
Chemical Cartridge
Respirator
Airline Respiratorc
Airline Respiratorc
Chemical Cartridge Respirator
Airline Respiratorc
Chemical Cartridge Respiratord
Airline Respiratorc/Facility Dedication/No Unprotected Personnelf
a
Worker protection also includes full skin cover clothing and gloves, exclusion of sensitized personnel and
job-related medical surveillance.
b
Feet per minute = ft3/min/ft2 of open face area perpendicular to air flow.
c
Airline respirator = NIOSH/MSHA-approved Type C positive-pressure airline hose mask with full facepiece.
d
Chemical cartridge respirator = NIOSH/MSHA-approved paint spray respirator with organic vapor cartridge(s),
paint/mist prefilter(s), and full facepiece. Cartridges and prefilters are to be replaced when one of the following
occurs:
—new workday begins
— chemical or solvent odor is detected inside mask by wearer
— breathing resistance becomes too great
e
Unprotected personnel should remain outside a 50-ft radius until 30 minutes after painting is completed.
f
Exclusion of unprotected personnel during painting and for 30 minutes after cessation of painting.
Change 12
8-17
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-8.
Recommended Respiratory Protection Guidelines for Spray Finishing Operations
Air Flow, CFM/Sq Ft Cross Section (FPM)*
Facility
Compressed Air Spray
Airless Spray
Electrostatic Coating
Walk-in Room or Deep Booth
(Example—Vehicular Booth)
75-100
60
—
Spray Cabinet (Less Than 4
sq. ft. Open Face Area)
150
100
100
Spray Booth (More Than 4
sq. ft. Open Face Area)
200
125
100
Confined Spaces
(Example—Inside or
Underneath Vehicle)
— Positive Pressure Air Line Respirator —
*Approved Organic Vapor Cartridge/Paint Spray Respirator and Eye Protection is Normally Required
8-18
TM 55-1500-345-23
Table 8-9.
Occupational Health Protection Requirements for Paint Spray Workers Using MIL-E-52798A
Alkyd Enamel and MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039B Polyurethane Coating
Hazards
Recommended Protection
Alkyd Enamel and Lacquer
Polyurethane Coating
Pigments (May Include Pb and Cr03)
Pigments (May Include Pb and Cr03
Driers
Isocyanates
Solvent
Solvents
Ventilation Control
Ventilation Control
Paint Spray Respirator* or Supplied
Air-mask
Paint Spray Respirator** or
Supplied-Air Mask
Eye Protection*
Eye Protection
Medical Evaluation
Basis for Recommendations
OSHA Standards
OSHA Standards
NIOSH Recommended Standards
NIOSH Recommended Standards
ACGIH Recommendations
ACGIH Recommendations
ANSI Standards
ANSI Standards
Industry Practice
Industry Practice
* Depending on Concentration of Overspray.
** Pending Outcome of Tests to Determine Suitability and Depending on Concentration of Overspray.
Change 12
8-19
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-1. National Star Insignia (Sheet 1 of 2)
8-20
TM55-1500-345-23
D
R
A
B
c
L
9.5
4.75
2.375
0.80
0.59
5.6
10.0
5.00
2.500
0.83
0.63
5.9
15.0
7.50
3.750
1.25
0.94
8.8
20.0
10.00
5.000
1.66
1.25
11.8
25.0
12.50
6.250
2.08
1.56
14.77
30.0
15.00
7.500
2.50
1.88
17.6
35.0
17.50
8.750
2.92
2.19
20.6
40.0
20.00
10.000
3.33
2.50
23.5
45.0
22.50
11.250
3.75
2.81
26.5
50.0
25.00
12.500
4.17
3.13
29.4
55.0
27.50
13.750
4.58
3.44
32.3
60.0
30.00
15.000
5.00
3.75
35.3
l Note: 1.
All Dimensions in Inches.
2. D = DIAMETER OF BASIC BLUE CIRCLE
R = RADIUS OF BASIC BLUE CIRCLE 1/2D
A = 1/2 RADIUS
B = 1/6 RADIUS
Figure 8-1.
C = 1/8 RADIUS
L = 1.176 RADIUS
National Star Insignia (sheet 2 of 2)
8-21
8-22
TM55-1500-345-23
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-3. NATO Marking Symbols (sheet 1 of 5)
Change 1
8-23
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-3. NATO Marking Symbols (Sheet 2 of 5)
8-24
Chonge 1
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-3. NATO Markings Symbols (Sheet 3 of 5)
Change 1
8.24.1 /(8-24.2 blank)
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-3. NATO Marking Symbols (Sheet 4 of 5)
Change 1
8-25
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-3. NATO Marking Symbols (sheet 5 of 5)
8-26 Change 1
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-4.
Sidedraft Paint Booths
8-27
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-5. Downdraft Paint Booths
8-28
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-7.
First Aid Kit
8-29
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-9. Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Two Blades,
Helicopter Tail Rotor Only
Page 8-32, Figure 8-10 DELETED
Change 9 8-31/(8-32 blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
B = Flat Black P/N G2002 (MFG U.S. PAINT)
W
W = White
P/N G-8022 (MFG U.S. PAINT)
B
W
B
W
B
W
* SPINNER
REMAINDER OF PROPELLER
BLADE, TO BE BLACK
6 INCHES
FROM TIP
TO BE WHITE
6
APPLIES TO PROPELLERS ONLY.
*SPINNER SHALL BE PAINTED WHITE- UNLESS RECEIVED
UNPAINTED, IN WHICH CASE IT SHALL BE POLISHED.
FIGURE 8-12. Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Three Props, with Spinner.
8-34
Change 9
TM 55-1500-345-23
B = Flat Black P/N G2002 (MFG U.S. PAINT)
W
W = White
P/N G-8022 (MFG U.S. PAINT)
B
B
W
B
W
W
B
W
* SPINNER
REMAINDER OF PROPELLER
BLADE, TO BE BLACK
6 INCHES
FROM TIP
TO BE WHITE
6
APPLIES TO PROPELLERS ONLY.
*SPINNER SHALL BE PAINTED WHITE- UNLESS RECEIVED
UNPAINTED, IN WHICH CASE IT SHALL BE POLISHED.
Figure 8-13.
Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Four Props, with Spinner.
Change 9
8-35
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 8-14. Optimum High Visibility Paint Scheme, Four Blades,
Helicopter Tail Rotor Only
8-36
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 9
HELICOPTER ILLUSTRATIONS
SECTION I
DELETED
Pages 9-2 through 9-12 and Figures 9-1 through 9-3
have been deleted.
Change 12
9-1/(9-2 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION II
AH-64 ILLUSTRATIONS
1.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Green (entire aircraft, except as noted).
2.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 Aircraft Black.
3.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Dark Sand (entire aircraft or high conspicuous paint scheme
when authorized, desert operations only). See Paragraph 5-11.
4.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 Aircraft White (entire aircraft or high conspicuous paint scheme
when authorized, arctic operations only). See Paragraph 5-11.
5.
MIL-P-21600, Fluorescent Red-Orange. ANA #633 (training aircraft-high visibility, only where
authorized).
Figure 9-4. Tactical Paint Scheme, AH-64
Change 12
9-13
Change 6
TM 55-1500-345-23
9-14
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 1 of 19)
9-15
TM55-1500.345.23
Change 6
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 3 of 19)
9-16 Change 6
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 4 of 19)
Change 6
9-17
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-5. Extetior end Intetior Markings, AH-84 (Sheet 5 of 19)
9-18 Change 6
9-19
TM55-1500-345~23
Change 6
9-20
Change 6
TM55-1500-345-23
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-5, Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 8 of 19)
Change 6 9-21
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 9 of 19)
9-22 Change 7
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-6. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 10 of 19)
Change 6
9-23
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Makings, AH-64 (Sheet 11 of 19)
9-24
Change 6
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
I
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
1 Deleted
2
LH side of canopy at FS 103.50. Locate below
sill and center for best fit with Codes 87 and 89.
l-in. aircraft black letters.
Us. ARMY AH-64A
U.S. A SERIAL NO. 00000
3 1/2-in. aircratft black letters, 13 required.
NO STEP
4
LH side of cannopy above louvers at FS 150.00,
,
I WL 157.20, l/2-m aircraft black Ietters.
EMERGENCY AIR INLET
5
LH and RH side of fuselage on transmiss i o n
access doors, LH side of fuselage at FS 160.00,
WL 135.00, on fuselage lower surface at FS
60.00, BL 0.00 and FS 75.00, BL 0.00, l/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
6
Both sides of fuselage at FS 147.00, WL 13500
1/4-in. aircraft black letters.
7
Both sides of fuselage, 2 on each side at FS
65.00 and FS 140.00 l/2-in. aircraft black letters
and triangle.
8
Both sides of fuselage on access door on ammo
chute fairing at FS 120.00, l/2-m . aircraft black
letters.
MOORING LUG ACCESS
9
Both avionics bays centered on doors, l/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
AVONICS BAY
10
RH side of fuselage at ground service jacks, 2
places, FS 249.830, WL 129.640 and FS
189.470, WL 129.640. (See figure 7-12 for
dimensions (MIL-C-83413/9-2).
11
RH side of fuselage above access panel at FS
155.00, WL 136.00, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
CONTROLS
ACCESS
REFUEL CONTROL PANEL
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Makings, AH-64 (Sheet 12 of 19)
Change 6 9-25
TM55-1500-345-23
CODEl
No.
12
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
RH side of fuselage at canopy handles, aircraft black.
13
Inside pilots’s cockpit, RH side, on fwd side
of CPG hold-open device, l/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
NO HOLD
14
RH side of fuselage on access door on ammo chute fairing at FS 155.00, l/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER INSIDE
15
RH side of fuselage at fwd fuel filler cap.
l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
GRAVITY FUEL FILLER
CAPACITY 155 U.S. GAL.
16
Both sides of fuselage at FS 40.00 with arrow pointing toward hatch on centerline, aircraft black.
IFF TRANSPONDER
17
1. Centered on BL0.000 on doghouse faking
assembly at FS 168.00 1/2-in, aircraft black
letters.
2. Left of BL0.000, lower fuselage surface fwd
of antenna at FS 468.00 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
18
See item 16 above
19
Both sides of fuselage on transmission access
door, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
MAIN TRANSMISSION
OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAUGE
INSIDE
20
RH side of fuselage, above aft fuel drain valve
and below fwd fuel drain valve, l/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
FUEL SUMP DRAIN
CONTROL
21
Both sides aft FABs at FS 195.8& WL 123.65,
I/2-in. aircraft black letters.
INERTING SYSTEM VENT INSIDE
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 13 of 19)
9-26 Change 6
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
22
Fwd fuselage lower surface on access hatch
FS 65.00, l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
CYCLIC STICK ACCESS
23
Bottom of fuselage, fwd of jack pads, 3
places; at FS 120.00(2 places) and FS 450.00
(1 place). 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
JACK PAD
24
RH side of fuselage below drain at FS
312.00, WL 116.20, l/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
HVDRALIC OVERFOLW
DRAIN
25
Fuselage lower surface on access panels at
FS 170,00 and FS 255.00, l/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
FUEL DUMP VALVE
26
LH side of fuselage on transmission access
door. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
HYDRAULIC
RESERVOIR OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GAUGE INSIDE
27
Bottom aftside of firewall, both nacelles.
l/2-in, aircraft black letters.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GAUGE
SERVICE ENGINE WITH
MIL-L-23699 OR MIL-L-7808 OIL
28
Both nacelles, interior surface of engine fire
doors below hinges. Readable when door is
open. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
WORK PLATFORM
LOAD LIMIT
400 POUNDS
29
Both nacelles on engine fire doors. l/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
ENGINE FIRE DOORS
30
Both nacelles on engine exhaust fairing.
l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
DANGER – ENGINE EXHAUST
31
Beside ECU exhaust outlet, LH side. 1/2.in.
aircraft black letters.
DANGER – ECU EXHAUST
32
LH side of fuselage at FS 257.00 and WL
148.50. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
DISCHARGE DISK
33
Both sides of fuselage near trailing edge of
wing. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
CAUTION – DISCONNECT HYD.
ELECTRICAL & PITOT CONNECTORS
BEFORE REMOVING WING
34
Beside APU exhaust duct, RH side. 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
DANGER – APU EXHAUST
Figure 9-5, Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 14 of 19)
Change 6
9-27
TM 55-1500-345-23
COD]
NO.
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
Delete
RH side o fuselage on transmission access
panel at FS 200.00, WL 175,001/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
FILLER SPOUT INSIDE
SERVICE TRANSMISSION WITH
MIL-L-23699 OR MIL-L-7808 OIL
RH side of fuselage, below exhaust port at FS
202.00, WL 132.00. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
TRANSFER PUMP EXHAUST
RH side of fuselage, fwd of drain atFS211.00,
WL 116.00 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
TRANSFER PUMP DRAIN
Underside of fuselage, fwd of drain at FS
278.00, RBL 6.00. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
FUEL BOOST PUMP DRAIN
RH side of fuselage at aft fuel filler cap. 1/2in.
aircraft black letters.
GRAVITY FUEL FILLER CAPACITY 220 U.S. GAL.
41
RH side of fuselage below exhaust port at FS
278.00. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
DANGER - FUEL PUMP
EXHAUST PORT
42
LH side of doppler fairing at FS 315.00, top
of letters at WL 104.00.
RADAR ALTIMETER
RECEIVER ANTENNA
43
RH side of fuselage on access door. l/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
AFT AVIONICS BAY
44
Aft surface of main rotor mast Wing. l/2-in.
aircraft bIack letters.
AIR PARTICLE
SEPARATOR EXHAUST
45
Both engine nacelles. 2-in. aircraft black
bands.
46
Aft surface of main rotor mast doghouse
faking. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
SURGE VALVE
EXHAUST
47
Letters centerd aft of vent in ammo bay
door at FS 180.00, LBL 20.00 and at FS
281.00, LBL 2.00.
FUEL VENT
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-54 (Sheet 15 of 19)
9-28
Change 6
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
48
Top of doghouse fairing, LH side of antenna
housing, FS 158.00. l/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
RADAR JAMMER
RCVR ANTENNA
49
Bottom of RH nacelle, adjacent to sight
gauge access door. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
APU GEARRBOX OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GAUGE
SERVICE GEARBOX WITH
MIL-L-23699 OR MIL-L.7608 OIL
50
Underside of both nacelles at FS 237.50, BL
26.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters
ENGINE DRAIN
51
Underside of RH nacelle at FS 273.40, BL
26.85. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
APU TURBINE
PLENUM DRAIN
52
Both wingtips adjacent to access door. 1/2in. aircraft black letters.
INTER-COMM
RECEPTACLE
53
Underside of RH nacelle at FS 250.75, BL
26.50. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
APU FUEL DRAIN
54
Underside of RH nacelle at FS 252.00, BL
26.85. l/2-in. aircraft black letters.
APU VENT
55
Upper surface of both wings, on access
panel at BL 28.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
WING ACCESS
56
Both ammo bay doors, centered at FS
205.00, bottom of letters at W L 106.00, l/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
AMMO BAY
57
Underside of both nacelles, on access panel
at FS 225.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
WATER WASH
ACCESS
58
Bottom of LH nacelle on access door. l/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
GROUND AIR INPUT
59
Lower fuselage surface, centered aft of
blade antenna at FS 355.00. 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
VHF AM/FM NO. 2
60
Both sides of fuselage, most fwd letter (“U”
left side, “Y” right side) at FS 271.00, tops of
letters at WL 137.50, aircraft black letters
Figure 9-5.
UNITED STATES ARMY
6 INCH HIGH 4 INCH WIDE
DISTANCE BETWEEN LETTERS 1 INCH,
DISTANCE BETWEEN WORDS 4 INCH.
Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 16 of 19)
Change 6 9-29
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 17 of 19)
9-30 Change 7
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
DIRECTIONS
LH side of doppler fairing at FS 345.00, top
of letters WL 104.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
RH side of fuselage aft of access door at FS
344.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
Both sides of aft fairing upper surface.
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
Lower fuselage surface aft on antenna
fairing at FS 355.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
Lower fuselage surface aft on antenna
fairing at FS 355.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
Lower fuselage surface aft on antenna
fairing at FS 355.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
Locate aft of drains at FS 133.36, LBL 1.60;
FS 152.10, RBL 1.60; FS 245.47, RBL 1.60;
FS 267.06, RBL 1.20. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters, 4 places.
Lower fuselage surface aft of antenna blade
at FS 393.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
Locate on centerline of aircraft, top of nose
at FS 39.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters and
border.
WORDING
RADAR ALTIMETER
XMTR ANTENNA
EXTERNAL POWER
CONNECTOR — 115VAC/DC
3PH 400HZ
— DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS BEFORE REMOVING FAIRING
ADF LOOP ANTENNA
ADF SENSE ANTENNA
ADF AMPLIFIER
IMPEDANCE MATCHING
FUEL DRAIN
UHF/IFF TRANSPONDER
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 18 of 20)
Change 12
9-30.1
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
80
Marking on pilot and co-pilot/gunner
collective stick chop collar will have black
letters on orange-yellow background.
81
Forward upper corner of right hand ammo
chute fairing at approximately FS 115.00
and WL 128.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters
and border.
WORDING
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 19 of 20)
9-30.2
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
82
RH underside at FS 87.00 adjacent to
access door, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
UTILITY LIGHT & GROUND
POWER RECEPTACLE
83
LH side and RH side of fuselage at WL
114.87, FS 220.62 (one marking under both
drains) 1/2-in. black letters.
TRANSMISSION DRAINS
84
On underside of both nacelles, outboard of
drain LBL 26.50, FS 245.00 and RBL 26.50,
FS 244.50. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
COMBUSTOR DRAIN
85
RH side of fuselage at WL 114.44, and FS
223.65. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
AIR SEPARATOR DRAIN
86
On RH side of fuselage at WL 114.50, FS
228.12. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
APU PUMP DRAIN
87
LH side of canopy at FS 103.00 below Code
89, 1/4-in. aircraft black letters.
WP -Indicates wash primer used
P -Indicates primer used
L -Indicates lacquer used (if required)
C -Indicates coating used (if required)
88
LH side of canopy at FS 105.00 above Code
2. 1/4-in. aircraft black letters.
NOTE
Date shown on stencil is date aircraft
painted with MIL-DTL-64159 or MILDTL-53039 paint.
89
On LH side of canopy at FS 103.50 below
Code 2. 1/2 in. aircraft black letters.
90
On underside of LH and RH wing assembly,
centered on WG STA 31.570 with arrow
pointing inboard towards ground service
jack. Arrow tip should end 1-in from ground
service jack (BL 66.540). Aircraft black
letters.
91
LH and RH wings upper surface at FS
228.00, BL 28.00. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
SERVICE THIS AIRCRAFT WITH MIL-T-83133
GRADE JP8 AVIATION FUEL. IF NOT AVAILABLE,
REFER TO TB 55-9150-200-24 FOR ALTERNATE
FUEL.
AUX FUEL SYSTEM QUICK DISCONNECT
Figure 9-5. Exterior and Interior Markings, AH-64 (Sheet 20 of 20)
Change 12
9-31
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-6. Station Diagram, AH-64
9-32
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION III
CH-47 ILLUSTRATIONS
1.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Green (entire aircraft, except as noted).
2.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Black.
3.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Dark Sand (entire aircraft or high conspicuous paint scheme
when authorized, desert operations only). See Paragraph 5-11.
4.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft White (entire aircraft or high conspicuous paint scheme
when authorized, arctic operations only). See Paragraph 5-11.
5.
MIL-P-21600, Fluorescent Red-Orange. ANA #633 (training aircraft-high visibility, only where
authorized).
Figure 9-7. Tactical Paint Scheme. CH-47
Change 12
9-33
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
9-34
1.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft green (entire aircraft,
except where noted).
2.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black.
3.
MIL-P-21600, .uorescent red-orange, ANA #633 (shaded areas only).
Figure 9-8. Non-Tactical Arctic/Desert Paint Scheme, CH-47
TM55-1500-345-23
9-35
TM55-1500-345-23
9-36
TM55-1500-345-23
9-37
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9–9.
9-38
Interior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 4 of 20)
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9–9.
Interior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 5 of 20)
9-39
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9–9.
9-40
Interior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 6 of 20)
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9–9.
Interior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 7 of 20)
9-41
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9–9.
9-42
Interior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 8 of 20)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
1
Left side of fuselage at station 106.5, WL 32.5.3 in.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft white,
No. 37875, circle with 1-in. MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft red, No. 31136, cross.
2
Left side of fuselage at station 106.5, WL 45.2.
1/2-in. white letters.
NO 2 CONTROL
SYSTEM FILTER
3
Right side, sta 157, above door 1/2-in. white
letters.
LEVELING BRACKET
4
Both sides, station 163.5, WL 27.6. 1-in. white
letters.
MAX CONCENTRATED FLOOR LOADING FWD
OF STA 160.0 NOT TO EXCEED 1000 LBS
CONCENTRATED LOAD.
5
Both sides of fuselage centered on station 181,
303, 425 at WL 35.0.3 in. MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black, No. 37038 and
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft white,
No. 37875. See Detail J for type.
6
Both sides of fuselage. Station 249 and 348 at WL
8.0 1-in white letters.
7
Both sides of fuselage at station 249 and 348 at
WL 6.0 1/2-in white letters.
8
Both sides of fuselage at station 317. WL 44.9.
1/2’ white letters.
115V, 3PH, 400CY, 15AMP
8
CH-47D, both sides of fuselage at station 317, WL
44.9, 1/2-in. white letters.
115V, 1PH, 15AMP
115V, 3PH, 15AMP
9
Both sides of fuselage at station 317.0, WL 41.9.
1’ white letters.
MISSILE HEAT PLUG
9
CH-47D, both sides of fuselage at station 317.0,
WL 41.9, 1-in white letters.
400 CYCLE AC UTILITY RECEPTACLE
10
Right side of fuselage at station 335.0, WL 23.9.
1-in. white letters
HOIST OPER STATION
11
Arrow white 1/2-in. X 3 in. See Detail C, E and F.
12
Right side of fuselage. Station 363.3, WL 37.1.
1-in. white letters.
HOIST OPER ATTACH.
13
Right side of fuselage at station 506, WL 36.0.
1/2-in. white letters.
RAMP MANUAL OVERRIDE
UT RECP
28VDC
AMPS: 1 = 15A 2 = 7.5A 3 = 5A
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 9 of 20)
Change 12
9-43
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
14
DIRECTIONS
See View G-G, and Detail C, station 549.3, WL
53.0; station 538.8 WL 8.5. 1/2" white letters
WORDING
ACCUMULATOR CHARGE
1400 PSI—AIR OR NITROGEN
NOTE
5 req’d on S/N 59-4983 thru 66-19028. 4
req’d on S/N 66-19029 and subsequent.
15
Station 525, WL 22.5. Right side of fuselage.
Finish half of .ller cap, orange; the other half
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft gray
interior, No. 36231
FILLER
UTILITY TANK
16
Right side of fuselage, station 550, WL 33.5. 1/2"
white letters. Eff. on CH-47 S/N 65-7978 and
subsequent.
UTILITY RETURN FILTER
17
Right side of fuselage, station 538.8, WL 8.5. 1/2"
white letters.
INITIAL 1800 PSI CHARGE
REQ’D FOR -65°F OPERATION
18
Right side of fuselage, station 517.5, WL 36. 1/2
in. white letters.
UTILITY PRESSURE FILTER
19
Both sides of fuselage. Two places, station 220,
391 and 460. WL-21.5. 1" white letters. Arrow is 1"
X 3". 3 places on heater dust on each side.
20
Both sides of fuselage. Centered on station 425.
WL -21.5. 1/2" white letters. Eff on S/N 64-13117
thru 65-7977. S/N 56-7978 and subsequent.
CARGO E
STA 425 CAP 15250 LBS.
CAP 22875 LBS.
21
Both sides of fuselage, station 160, 225 and 438.
WL -21.5. 1" white letters.
ALL TIE DOWN RINGS
500 LBS UNLESS NOTED
21
CH-47D, Both sides of fuselage, station 160, 225,
and 438, WL -21.5, 1" white letters.
ALL TIE DOWN RINGS
5000 LBS UNLESS NOTED
22
Both sides of fuselage. Station 306.8 WL -21.5
White letters.
Eff S/N 64-13117 thru 65-7977. S/N 65-7978 and
subsequent.
CARGO D
STA 303
CAP 15250 LBS.
*CAP 22875 LBS.
23
Both sides of fuselage at 14 places at heater
outlets. 1st line 1" letters. Remainder 1/2" letters
(white).
24
Right side of fuselgae on beam. BL 18 beam 1"
white letters
TO STOW SEAT-FOLD BACK FWD
& SECURE WITH STRAP — FOLD
DOWN SEAT
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 10 of 20)
9-44
Change 12
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
25
Left side of fuselage at station 561. WL 33.4,
1/2” white letters
MIRROR STOWAGE
26
Left side of fuselage station 492. WL 28.4.
First line, 1/2” letters. Second line, 1/4” letters, white
FUEL VALVE NO 1 ENGINE
OPEN
CLOSE
27
Left side of fuselage. Station 198, WL-6.3.
1” white letters.
DO NOT COVER AIR INLET
28
Left side of fueselage. Station 106. WL26.0.
1/4” white letters, mount on 114S1610, BL
8.0 beam. Eff on S/N 59-4983 thru 65-7989
TORQUE MTG BOLTS FOR
114CS101 and 114CS103 TO
–o
40
in. Ibs.
+4
Eff on: S/N 65-7990 and subsequent, except
CH-47D
TORQUE MTG BOLTS FOR
114CS101 and 114CS117 T0
–o
40
in. Ibs.
+4
29
Left side of fuselage. Station 100.0. WL 45.2.
1/2” white letters. CH-47A, B and C only.
NO 1
SAS FILTER
30
Left side of fuselage, station 94.0, WL 45.2.
1/2” white letters. CH-47A, B and C only.
NO 2
SAS FILTER
31
Left side of fuselage. Station 85.0. WL 50.8.
1/2” white letters.
NO 1 CONTROL
SYSTEM FILTER
32
Left side of fuselage. Station 106.0, WL 13.5.
l/2-in. white letters.
PITOT AND STATIC DRAINS
33
See Detail J. Station 184, on heater duct. 1st
line, 1” letters, remainder 1/2 letters, white,
eff on S/N 64-13117 thru 65-7977
CARGO C
STA 181
CAP 15250 LBS
Eff on S/N 65-7978 and subsequent.
CARGO C
STA 181
CAP 22875 LBS
34
1/2 wide black and aircraft white stripes, vertical on station 482 from WL-9.0 to WL-21.5.
Eff on S/N 62-2114 and subsequent.
Figure 9–9.
Interior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 11 of 20)
9-45
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
35
Left side of fuselage centered on station 486
and WL-2.0.1” white letters.
STA 486
36
3 places in fuslage. 1” black letters on
orange-yellow background. Station 492,
-6.5, BL37.0, WL38.7, View B—B.
FIRE EXIT
37
Left side of fuselage, station 537, WL + 3.5.
1/2” white letters. Eff on S/N 59-4982 thru
65-7977
J–2 COMPASS FLUX VALVE
Eff on S/N 65-7978 and subsequent
COMPASS FLUX VALVE
38
Left side of fuselage, station 537, WL 22.2.
1st two lines 1/2”, last line 1/4” white.
EMERGENCY APU FLUID SHUTOFF
39
Left side of fuselage, station 334.0, WL-12.0.
1” white letters.
CRANK STOWAGE –
RESCUE HATCH &
RAMP MECH.
40
Centered on door, 1/2” white letters
ACCESS- PITOT AN D STATIC
DRAIN LINES
41
On floor, station 340 approx. Arrow 1/2” X
3.50 aircraft white on black, see View S-S.
42
Right side, sta 526, 1/2” white letters.
FILLING
43
Right side, sta 526, 1/2” white letters.
NORMAL
44
Centered on rear door, first line 1”, remainder 1/2” orange-yellow, refer to View
U—U and Detail H.
EMERGENCY EXIT
PULL STRAP OUT – PUSH PANEL
45
Fig 8, Detail G, 1” white letters L.H. and R.H.
side, station 173.3, 220.5, 265.5, 302.5, 342.3,
381.5, 420.3, and 442.3.
46
On lower door, station 345, 1” aircraft white
letters.
47
On lower door, station 322.1” aircraft white
letters and arrow.
Figure 9–9.
9-46
WL
W.L.
O
TURN LATCH TO UNLOCK & LOCK
OUTER HATCH-CAUTION-UNLOCK
BEFORE TURNING CRANK TO OPEN
HATCH
Interior Markings, CH-47
UNLOCK
(Sheet 12 of 20)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
48
View A—A, looking up, station 143 BL 11.0. 1/2"
white letters.
STATIC LINE DRAIN
49
View A—A and D—D (looking up), station 152 and
442. 1/2" white letters.
CRANE ACCESS
50
View B—B, 1" white letters, sta 120.0, BL 38, WL
40.5, BL 28 WL 43.0.
STA 120.0
51
View B—B, 1/4" white letters, BL 25, WL 49.0.
TROOP WARNING SYSTEM
52
View B—B, 1/2" white letters, BL 15.5, WL 48.0.
RESCUE PULLEY ATTACH
53
View B—B 1" white letters station 120, BL 17, WL
3.9
LITTER POLE STORAGE
54
View B—B. 1" white letters sta 120, BL 12.0 WL
45.0. Eff on quantity of 1 ea S/N 65-7966-65-7977,
Quantity of 2 ea, S/N 65-7978 and sub. Also
station 594 (see View G—G).
ANCHOR LINE ATTACH.
55
View B—B, 1/4" white letters, station 95. BL 29.0,
WL 15.5
CABIN LIGHT RELAYS
RED WHITE
56
View B—B, 1" white letters Sta 120, BL 17.2, WL
-20.
WINCH CABLE STOWAGE
57
View C—C (looking up). Center of helicopter,
station 320 and 338. 1/4" white letters.
RESCUE CABLE CUTTER
PULLEY ATTACH
58
View C—C (looking up), BL 8.4, station 337.0. 1/2" CABLE CUTTER
white letters.
PLUG
59
View D—D (looking up), 1/2" white letters, 4 places.
ACCESS
MIX BOX
MOUNTING BOLTS
60
View E—E, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 482.0
61
View F—F (looking up), 1/2" white top center of
fuselage, fwd of sta 534 on door.
ACCESS-SYNCH SHAFT
THOMAS CPLG.
62
View G—G (looking up). 1/2" white letters. 2
places.
ACCESS XMSN
UNLATCH DROP PANEL
63
View G—G (looking up). 1/2" white letters.
ACCESS — MAG PLUG
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 13 of 20)
9-47
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
64
View G—G (looking up). 1" white letters, 2 places
to be read from either side.
NO HANDHOLD
65
View G—G (looking up). 1/2" white letters, 2
places.
XMSN OIL LEVEL SIGHT
GAGE VIEW PLATE
66
View H—H, 1/2" black letters.
SEQUENCE VALVE
67
View J—J, 1" white letters, station 594.0, left and
right side.
STA 594.0
68
View J—J, 1" orange-yellow letters.
69
View K—K, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 575.0
70
View L—L, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 554.0
71
View M—M, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 534.0
72
View N—N, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 502.4
73
View N—N, 1/2" white letters.
74
View P—P, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 200.0
75
View P—P, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 240.0
76
View P—P, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 280.0
77
View P—P, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 320.1
78
View P—P, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 360.0
79
View P—P, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 400.0
80
View P—P, 1" white letters, 4 places.
STA 440.0
81
View P—P, 1" white letters, 3 places.
STA 160.0
82
View Q—Q, 1" white letter stencil to be readable
from centerline A/C with door closed. Mount to
under surface of step.
83
View R—R, 1" black letters. Center hook.
CARGO HOOK CAP
16000 LB. (CH-47A)
CARGO HOOK CAP
20000 LB.(CH-47B/C)
CARGO HOOK CAP
26000 LB. (CH-47D)
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 14 of 20)
9-48
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
84
1 in. black letters.
CARGO HOOK CAP
20000 LB (CH-47D)
85
View S—S, 1" black letters.
HOOK STOWAGE STRAP
86
View T—T (ref Fig 9-9 (Sheet 6 of 20). 1/2" white
letters. (Stencil to be readable when rotated into
work platform position).
MAX. WEIGHT 200 LBS
ON WORK PLATFORM
87
View V—V, .rst line, 1/2" white, second line, 1/4"
white, station 502.4
88
Detail A, first line 1" orange-yellow, second line 1/2
orange-yellow with arrow, 1/2" x 2-1/2" on black
handles in cockpit. See arrow position in Detail A.
For information on marking pilot and co-pilot doors,
see paragraph 7-24.
89
Detail B, 1" orange-yellow letters, left side between
station 280 and 320. Right side between station
360 and 400 place stencil on sides of window as
shown. Refer to paragraph 7-22.
NOTE
Items 89 and 90 Eff on S/N 59-4983 thru
66-097.
90
Detail B, cut out corners, 1" X 3" aircraft white as
shown in item 89.
91
Detail C, Station 493, WL 28.4, first line 1/2"
second line 1/4" white letters.
92
Detail C, Station 505, WL 19.6, first line 1/2"
second line 1/4" white letters.
93
Two places aft of station 95, 1" white letters.
Stencil to be readable from centerline of acft.
ACCESS PANELS — HYDRAULIC
LINES, TRANSFORMERS
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 15 of 20)
Change 12
9-49
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
94
DIRECTIONS
Detail C, 1/2" black letters, station 491. Top line on
one stringer bottom line on lower stringer at WL 0.
WORDING
UP
STOP
DN
RAMP CONTROL
95
Detail C, 1" black, station 486, WL -2.0. Arrow 1/2"
X 3".
96
Detail D, 1/2" orange-yellow letters. Refer to
paragraph 7-22.
97
Detail E, 1" white letters with arrow. Arrow located
on Station 242.
98
Detail F, 1" white letters. Arrow located on station
364.
STA. 364.0
99
Detail H, 1" white letters. Right side at fwd door.
TURN HANDLE UP
LIFT DOOR
100
Detail I, View B—B, aft side, station 95.0, 1/4"
white letters.
CABLE CUTTER
101
Detail I, and View B—B, aft side, station 95.0, 1/4"
white letters.
HOIST CONTROL
102
View M—M, 1/2" white fwd side, station 534.
HYDRAULIC RES. GAGE
103
Aircraft white letters, 1/2", station 440, BL 26 and
station 165.
LOCATION FOR
MAINT CRANE
BASE PLATE
104
Aircraft white dot, 1" station 138.5, 166.5, 427 and
455, BL 26.
105
Black corner markings, 1" X 3" station 133.86,
174.36, 424.25 and 464.75 BL 34.44 and BL 19.94,
8 places.
EMERGENCY EXIT
PULL STRAP OUT
PUSH PANEL
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 16 of 20)
9-50
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
106
Orange-yellow letters, 1” station 348, center
of A/C floor. To be read facing fwd of acft on
upper door.
107
Stripe 1” wide across cabin floor at station
120, 242, 364, and 486. Stripe to be aircraft
white
108
Center floor on ramp, 1” white letters.
109
White 1/2” letters, station 500 on floor.
WORDING
ALTERNATE GROUND
EMERGENCY ESCAPE
LIFT
MAX WEIGHT 200 LBS.
ON WORK PLATFORM
LIFT PLUG FOR MANUAL
CARGO DOOR CRANKING
OPEN
110
Aircraft white 1” letters, fwd edge of stencil
on station 360, OB edge of stencil on BL
17.25.
CRANK HERE TO OPEN
AND CLOSE OUTER HATCH
OPEN
111
White 1/2” letter, station 132.5, BL 24.5, top
of letters facing outboard.
112
Non-skid material on floor. Material required
is MIL-W-5044. Type II aft of sta 120 and
Type I fwd of sta 120. Refer to paragraph
3—11.
113
At rear emer. exit, 1” black letters on 15”
Orange-yellow arrow. Pointing toward handle. Eff on S/N 66-, 118 and subsequent.
Refer to paragragh 7-22.
114
Right side station 516, WL 53. 1/2” white letters.
Eff on S/N 65-7978 and subsequent.
115
White 1/2” letters, station 525, WL 53 and
station 554, WL 29.5, eff on: Qty of 1- S/N
65-7978 thru 65-7994, Qty of 2-S/N 65-7995 &
sub.
Figure 9-9.
RESCUE PULLEY ATTACH
BRAKE RETURN
LINE FILTER
I
WARNING FILTER MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED WHEN RED
INDICATOR IS EXTENDED.
Interior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 17 of 20)
9-51
TM55-1500345-23
CODE
NO.
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
116
White 1/2” letters, station 95, WL 21 above
114S1655 back-up panel. Eff on S/N 65-7990
& sub.
117
First line, 1/2”, lower line 1/8” white, location, station 116, WL 12.0, adjacent to flow
regulator. L. S., eff on S/N 65-1995 & sub.
WARNING
INSTALL BACK-UP
PANEL BEFORE FLIGHT
FLOW REGULATORS
REGULATED FLOW DIRECTION
118
Typical for 8 windows. Both sides at station
220, 300, 380, 460, first line 1” letters, remainder 1/2” orange-yellow or reflective letters. 1/2” x 1” orange-yellow stripe around
window at 6 places (positions 12, 2, 4, 6,8,
and 10 o’clock). Eff on S/N 66-098 and subsequent. Refer to paragraphs 7-19 thru 7-22.
119
View N–N, both sides at station 502.33, WL
19.0, black letters 1/8” (metal-cal) eff on S/N
66-19059 and subsequent.
120
View B—B, 5“ white letters, station 120
center of mounting holes.
Eff on S/N 65-8014 and subsequent.
EMERGENCY EXIT
PULL STRAP OUT
PUSH WINDOW OUT
FUEL VALVE
WARNING LIGHT
XM 24
GUN MTG
XM 2 4
S/N 66-118 and subsequent
121
A two (2”) wide lusterless aircraft white
stripe across the floor. Centered on station
160.
122
Above the fire axe on right side on the
upholstery at station 200, black 1” letters on
an aircraft white rectangle.
FIRE AXE
123
CH-47D, 3/8” white letters, station 522.5, WL
+35.5
APU CONTROL BOX
124
CH-47D, Left side of fuselage, 1/2” white letters, station 553.5, WL+8.0
INTERPHONE
WALKING CORD
STOWAGE
125
CH-47D, left side of fuselage, 1/2” white arrow, station 492, WL+16.0
Figure 9-9.
9-52
Interior Markings, CH-47
/’GUN MTG
(Sheet 18 of 20)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
126
CH-47D, 1" white letters, 8 required
ALL TIEDOWN RINGS
5000 LB UNLESS NOTED
127
CH-47D left side of fuselage, 1/2" white letters,
station 206.0, WL +40
N1 CONT ENG 1
128
CH-47D right side of fuselage, 1/2" white letters,
station 206.0, WL +40
N1 CONT ENG 2
129
CH-47D right side of fuselage, 1/2" white letters,
station 585.0, WL +48.5
APU START MDL
130
CH-47D right side of fuselage, 1/2" white letters,
station 560.0, WL +30.5
131
CH-47D right side of fuselage, 1/4" white letters
and arrow, station 538.0, WL +41.5
132
CH-47D right side of fuselage, 1/4" white letters,
station 538.0, WL +38.0
133
CH-47D right side of fuselage, white letters, station
538.0, WL +34.5
134
CH-47D right side of fuselage, white letters, and
1/2" arrow, station 515.5, WL +16.0
135
CH-47D right side of fuselage, 1/2" white letters,
station 515.5, WL +14.5
136
CH-47D right side of fuselage, 3/8" white letters,
station 517.0, WL +7.5
At temps below minus 25°F precharge
accumulator 2050 psi with air or nitrogen.
Accumulator will bottom at 3350 psi.
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 19 of 20)
Change 1
9-53
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
137
CH-47D, right side of fuselage, 1/2" white letters,
station 523.0, WL +7.5
138
CH-47D, center of f oor, 3/8" white letters and
arrow, station 330.0
139
On inside of aft transmission servicing access door.
1/4-in. aircraft black letters.
WORDING
HYDR SYS FILL . . .
MIL-L-7808 — CAP. 27
QUARTS, SUMP — 9 QUART
SYSTEM. RUN FOR
3 MINUTES, SHUT DOWN — REFILL
TO FULL MARK ON XMSN CASE
Figure 9-9. Interior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 20 of 20)
9-54
Change 11
9-55
TM 55
5-1500-345-23
Chan
nge 12
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 1 of 29)
Change
e 12
TM 55-1500-345
5-23
9-56
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 2 of 29)
9-57
TM 55
5-1500-345-23
Chan
nge 12
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 3 of 29)
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345
5-23
9-58
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 4 of 29)
TM55-1500-345-23
9-59
9-60
TM55-1500-345-23
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 7 of 29)
9-61
TM55-1500-345-23
9-62
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-10.
Exterior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 9 of 29)
9-63
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-10.
9-64
Exterior Markings, CH-47
(Sheet 10 of 29)
TM55-1500-345-23
9-65
9-66
TM55-1500-345-23
TM 55-1500-345-23
1.
Unless otherwise noted, all lettering is to be 1-in.
2. A standard size arrow will be used, when required, in the following
stencil.
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
1.
Fixed portion of cowl between nacelle and
vertical .n. Bottom of letters facing fwd.
Also top of engine nacelle facing outbd.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 aircraft
black, No. 37038
2
DELETE
3
Used with each set of steps, both sides of
fuselage. Also, above handgrip, top and side
of rear pylon, both sides, aircraft black.
HAND HOLD
4
Adjacent to access doors. To be read from
walkway, aircraft black.
INSTALL COVER
BEFORE FLIGHT
5
Paint a black ground symbol, shade 37038,
dimensions per MIL-C-83413/9-2. Remove the
outside circle at sta 206 & 246 left fuselage.
(Due to Emergency cut-out).
NO STEP
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 13 of 29)
Change 12
9-67
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
6
Both sides of fuselage, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
WORDING
FUEL VENT
NOTE
CH-47, serial No. 68-15812 and subsequent, sta 330. CH-47, serial No. 6718494
thru 68-15811, sta 245 and 386. CH-47, serial No. 66-19098 thru 67-18493, sta 231
and 395. CH-47, serial No. 67-18594 and
subsequent, sta 189, 243, 387, and 442.
CH-47D, both sides of fuselage, sta 242,
378, 443, WL +.5.
7
Right side top of fuselage, 2 in. below walkway,
positioned between bulkheads (rivet line) between
sta 179.5 and sta 400. 1-in. aircraft black letters to
be read from walkway.
NO STEP
8
Both sides of fuselage adjacent to step
*STEP
NOTE
On CH-47B, serial No. 66-19098, the lower
right side of the fuselage has a hinge type
folding step. This stencil is applied on the
door under the release knob. First line is
1-in., remainder is 1/2-in. aircraft black.
9
On generator control, engine control access
door, both sides of fuselage (inside compartment)
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, orange-yellow,
No. 33538 letters, sta 176, WL -10.
10
Aft of fwd entrance door on right side, sta 162, WL
8, in lusterless black letters.
11
On emergency exit panel in fwd entrance door on
right side fwd of pull tab, aircraft black.
12
Below lower flight compartment side window in
line with door jettison handle on right side, aircraft
black.
13
Below door jettison handle on right side of fuselage,
sta 93, WL -24, lusterless black letters.
14
Lower section of fwd entrance door on right side
aft of door handle in lusterless black letters, sta
133, WL -12.
15
Upper section of fwd entrance door on right side,
aft of door release, in lusterless black letters, sta
157, WL -2.5.
STEP
PULL KNOB DOWN
AND OUT TO
OPEN STEP
DANGER HIGH
VOLTAGE
PULL TAB
OUT PUSH
PANEL IN
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 14 of 29)
9-68
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
16
1/2-in. aircraft black letters inside pylon.
REMOVE BONDING JUMPER WHEN DOOR IS TO
BE REMOVED. INSTALL BONDING JUMPER WHEN
INSTALLING DOOR.
17
Below engine nacelles, both sides, aft of air
intake screen, 1” aircraft black. Sta 491, WL 52.
ENGINE ACCESS
FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER
18
DELETE
19
Around emergency exit panels. On both sides
of fuselage and on rear cargo door, Emer. exit
outlines at each corner with corner bands 1 in.
wide and 3 in. long at each leg and painted
aircraft black.
20
Centered under cargo ramp, above emergency
exit, sta 610, 1” aircraft black.
EMERGENCY EXIT
PULL STRAP OUT
PUSH PANEL
21
Top center of engine nacelles between oil f ller
access and oil quantity indicator access doors.
Top of letters facing outbd, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
LUB OIL
MIL-L-23699 ABOVE -25°F
MIL-L-7808 BELOW -25°F
22
DELETE
23
Adjacent to fwd edge of fwd emergency exit.
Left side, sta 119, WL 6. Arrow should point to
pull tab. 1” Aircraft black.
24
Left side, on bottom corner of emergency exit
above pull tab. Aircraft black.
PULL TAB
OUT PUSH
PANEL IN
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 15 of 29)
Change 11
9-69
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
25
Top of fuselage, right side of walk way from Sta 160
to Sta 420, 1-in. aircraft black letters 37038, top of
letters facing outboard, Word NO STEP 2" out from
walk way, 6 places. On left side of tunnel, word NO
STEP 4" out from tunnel on bulk head 6 places.
26
DELETED
27
Both sides of fuselage at static ports. 1 3/4-in.
unpainted area within rivet pattern, 1/2-in. black
circle around static port, 6-in. I.D. 1/2-in. letters.
Remainder of stencil 1/4-in. letters.
WORDING
STATIC PORT
DO NOT PLUG OR DEFORM
HOLES; AREA WITHIN CIRCLE
MUST BE SMOOTH AND CLEAN.
28
Both sides of fuselage. Aft side of f ller cap on left
side and fwd side of f ller cap on right side. The
early model helicopters have one tank on each
side of the center of the fuselage. Later helicopters
have three tanks, one fwd and one aft of the center
tank. Aircraft black. Also on CH-47D, right side of
fuselage, sta 257., WL -17.
29
Cut out corners 3 x 3 x 1 in. CH-47 prior to serial
No. 68-15812, left side centered around window at
sta 300 and right side at sta 380. CH-47, serial No.
68-15812 and subsequent, left side centered on
sta 221.30 and 420, and right side at sta 416.50.
See sheet 12 and 13. Aircraft black.
FUEL SERVICE THIS AIRCRAFT
WITH MIL-T-83133GRADE NO.
JP-8 AVIATION FUEL. IF NOT
AVAILABLE, REFER TO
TB 55-9150-200-24 FOR
ALTERNATE FUEL
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 16 of 29)
9-70
Change 11
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
30
Top of fwd pylon aft of rain shield at sta 114. Top
of letters facing inboard. Effective on CH-47, serial
No. 66-19098 aircraft black.
HAND HOLD
31
Both sides of pylon on WL 118.00, start at sta 557
and extend aft. Lettering 6-in. lusterless black.
(insert serial no.)
32
DELETED
33
Left side of pylon adjacent to kick in step panels,
aircraft black.
34
Lower aft section of fuselage in line with towing eye
on tail gear both sides, sta 514, WL -28, aircraft
black.
35
Left side fuselage, sta 95, WL -25. CH-47D only,
left side fuselage, sta 95, WL -25 and both sides of
fuselage sta 488.5, WL -28. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters and arrows.
36
DELETED
37
Both side of Aircraft. Most forward letter (U-left
side, Y-right side) to start at STA 280.00, Top
of letters will be at WL-12. Letters to be 6 in.
high lusterless black. Additional dimensions and
spacing in accordance with Fig 8-2.
STEP
UNITED STATES ARMY
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 17 of 29)
Change 11
9-71
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
38
Both sides fuselage at sta 241, WL-34, aircraft
black.
FUSLG JACK
POINT AND
MOORING
POINT UNDER
39
Both sides of fuselage, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters
and arrow, sta 496, WL -28
MOORING
POINT UNDER
40
Aircraft black.
115/208 V 400 CYCLE A.C.
NOTE
Below access door at sta 169, sta 163,
WL-23.
41
Above external power access panel, Sta 169, on
left side, aircraft black.
EXT PWR
DC-AC
42
Fwd of external power access panel on left side,
Sta 166, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
28 V.D.C.
43
Below door jettison handle on left side, Sta 93, WL
24, aircraft black.
44
Left side of fuselage aft of cabin window, Sta 93,
WL 11.50. First two lines 1-in, remaining lines
1/2-in. aircraft black.
U.S. ARMY MODEL CH-47A (B, C or D)
U.S.A. SERIAL NO. (insert serial no.)
Service this aircraft with MIL-T-83133 grade No.
JP-8 aviation fuel. If not available refer to TB
55-9150-200-24for alternate fuel.
45
Below lower .ight compartment side window in line
with door jettison handle on left side aircraft black.
FOR TACTICAL HELICOPTERS ONLY.
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 18 of 29)
9-72
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
46
DELETE
47
DELETED
48
DELETED
49
Authorized placement of unit insignia is on nose
access panel.
50
Above battery vent, left side of fuselage, Sta 188.
1/4-in. aircraft black letters.
BATTERY VENT
51
On battery access panel, left side of fuselage, Sta
188, WL 16, aircraft black.
BATTERY
INSIDE
52
Black walkway material on indicated shaded areas
53
Paint code 1/4-in. black letters left side of fuselage,
Sta 118, WL -28.
**Contractor will insert their name code.
54
DELETED
55
Both sides of fwd pylon fairing, 1/2-in. black letters, ACCESS
Sta 97.50 WL +67.
FWD ROTOR SYS
HYDR COMPT
WORK PLATFORM
56
DELETED
57
Both sides of fwd pylon, Sta 123, WL 63.50 aircraft
black.
**WP1-P2-L3 Date
WP - indicate wash primer used
P - indicate primer used
L - indicate lacquer used (if req’d)
C - indicate coating used (if req’d)
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 19 of 29)
Change 12
9-73
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
TUNNEL DRAIN
58
Left side of fuselage, Sta 204, above drain
tube. 1/4-in. black letters.
59
Both sides of fuselage, 3places, Sta 226, 355
and 485, WL -34.0. 1/2-in. black letters.
60
DELETE
61
Both sides of fuselage, Sta 436.0, WL -23.0.
ACCESS FUEL SYSTEM INSP.
Centered on forward landing gear access door,
black.
62
On landing gear struts, 1/4-in. black letters.
TIRE
PRESSURE
*88PSI
63
Both sides of fuselage, aircraft black. CH-47D,
both sides of fuselage, 14 places at Sta 194.1,
235.2, 261.2, 363.6, 379.0, 396.2.
FUEL
DRAIN
64
Both sides of fuselage, 2 places, Sta 261 and
355. CH-47D only, Sta 261, 370.50. Black
letters.
Disconnect electrical plugs in fuel cell access
panel before dropping tank.
65
DELETE
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 20 of 29)
9-74
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
66
DELETE
67
Both sides of fuselage centered on access plate,
aircraft black, Sta 381 and 449.
ACCESS FUEL
SYSTEM INSP
68
Left and right aft work platform, centered on
platform at WL -2.50, black letters.
WORK PLATFORM
69
Both sides of fuselage, fore and aft of work platform
above support point at Sta 474.0 and 521.0, WL
-6.0 black letters.
70
Both sides of fuselage, Sta 485, WL -34. 1/2-in.
black letters as required per model helicopter.
71
Left side of fuselage, Sta 546.50, WL 15, black
letters.
ACCESS
APP EMERG
FLUID SHUT OFF
72
Left side of fuselage, Sta 543, WL 50. First line
1-in. black letters, remaining letters 1/4-in., located
in front of each overboard drain tube.
ENGINE
DRAINS
*STARTER RELIEF
VALVE DRAIN
HYDRAULIC DRAIN
AFT XMSN DRIP PAN
ENGINE COMB CHAMB
ENGINE BREATHER
ENGINE MANF
NOTE
Applicable on CH-47, serial No. 67-18494
and subsequent.
73
Both sides of engine cowling below screened air
intake, Sta 486, WL 46.0, black letters.
74
Both sides of rear pylon, Sta 471, WL 79, black
letters.
ACCESS ENGINE
QUICK
DISCONNECT
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 21 of 29)
Change 12
9-75
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
75
Both sides of rear pylon, Sta 457, WL 106.5, fwd of
screened air intake, black letters.
ACCESS XMSN
OIL COOLER
76
On CH-47, serial No. 65-7966 to 65-8025, left side
of rear pylon, below screened area, black letters.
ACCESS ENGINE GEAR
BOX CHIP DETECTORS
77
On outboard side of #1 engine and inboard side of
#2 engine, aft of access door, black letters.
ACCESS
OIL QUANTITY
INDICATOR
78
DELETE
79
DELETE
80
Left side of fuselage near top of rear pylon, Sta
550, WL 128, black letters
81
DELETE
82
Both side of pylon centered on access door, Sta
564, WL 85.0, black letters.
83
DELETE
84
Right side of fuselage under overboard drain, Sta
107, WL 15, 1/2 in. black letters.
WATER DRAIN
HEATER INLET
85
Right side of fuselage above access door, Sta 114,
WL -1, black letters.
INPH
JACK
86
DELETE
87
Right side of fuselage above overboard drain line,
Sta 101, WL -34.5 1/2-in. black letters.
88
Right side of fuselage on upper door, fwd of release LIFT DOOR UP
handle, Sta 127, WL -2.5, black letters.
ACCESS THRUST BEARING
& WORK PLATFORM
ACCESS
XMSN
HEATER FUEL DRAIN
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 22 of 29)
9-76
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
89
Both sides of aft fuselage inside insp panel,
black letters.
NO HAND HOLD
90
Right side of fwd pylon fairing, Sta 78, WL 66,
black letters.
XMSN OIL
FILLER INSIDE
91
Right side of fuselage on access door, Sta
187, WL -15, black letters.
ACCESS
A.C. POWER
EQUIP
92
Right side of fuselage adjacent to each side of
step kick in door panel above water line
STEP
NOTE
The first two lower steps on the right
side of the pod have a folding hinge
type door. This marking goes on the
door of the step below the door knob.
First line is 1-in, remainder is 1/2-in.
black letters.
STEP
PULL KNOB DOWN
AND OUT TO
OPEN STEP
93
Both sides of fuselage, step guide above each
step. 1/4-in. wide, 12-in., 15-in., or 27-in.
lengths, black letters.
94
Outboard side of each mounting pitot tube.
First line centered horizontally on tube, second
line below center. 1/2-in. black letters.
NO PUSH
KEEP OFF
95
Right side of fuselage, aft small access plate,
on larger access plate, Sta 494.50, black
letters.
ACCESS
RAMP
CONTROL
DN-STOP-UP
96
Right side of fuselage above access plate, Sta
487.50 black letters.
INPH
JACK
97
Right side of fuselage on aft access panel near HYD SYSTEM
tail, Sta 561, WL 15, black letters.
TEST
PANEL
98
DELETE
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 23 of 29)
Change 12
9-77
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTION
WORDING
99 Both aft landing gear drag struts, 1/2 in. aircraft
black letters.
DO NOT LOAD
GEAR WITH STATIC
LOCK ENGAGED
100 Both aft landing gear drag links. MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft red. No. 31136, arrow 1
in. x 3 in. Effective CH-47 serial No. 63-7922 and
subsequent.
101 Both sides of ramp at sta 24, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters. Stencil vertical on ramp.
REFER TO
MANUAL BEFORE
DISCONN HYD LINES
102 Right side of fuselage, near tail, first two lines 1-in.
black letters. Remainder of stencil 1/4 in. Each line
will be placed fwd of overboard drain tube.
ENGINE
DRAINS
103 Finish of door handle and emergency door and
cockpit handles, both sides of helicopter. Paint
aircraft black.
104 On top of tunnel facing left of walkway area.
Starting at Sta 200, BL6 right hand side, and
spaced 40-in. apart, black letters.
NO STEP
105 Centered on top of fwd pylon at Sta 134, black
letters.
NO STEP
106 Top of fuselage around all walkway areas, 2-in.
black border.
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 24 of 29)
9-78
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
107
Top of fuselage, right side, fwd on access door, ACCESS
Sta 152. Top of black letters facing outboard.
MAINT
Also right side aft, Sta 443.5 on CH-47 serial
DAVIT
No. 66-19098 thru 67-18484.
108
Top of fuselage, right side aft of walkway
indent, Sta 175. Also aft right side, of fuselage
at Sta 416. 1/2-in. black letters.
MAINT CRANE AZIMUTH PT.
REPLACE SCREW AFTER USING
109
Three places on top of fuselage tunnel, Sta
180, 303, and 384. Top of black letters facing
left.
ACCESS DRIVE
SHAFT COUPLING
110
Top center of both sides of fuselage, Sta 317.
A 2-in. lusterless black circle on the fitting
cover.
111
Top center of both sides of fuselage at fitting.
Stencil to be outboard of fitting, top of black
letters facing outboard.
SPT. PT
BLADE RACK
112
Top and bottom of left and right gear box
access cover. Top of black letters face aft.
REMOVE
GEAR BOX
ACCESS
113
DELETED
114
Top of left and right engine pod drive shaft
fairing. Top of black letters facing aft.
115
On top of left and right nacelle on access plate. ACCESS
Top of black letters facing aft.
OIL FILTER
116
Two places on top of left and right nacelle. Aft
of oil filler access and fwd of circular hole in
fairing. Top of black letters face aft.
ACCESS
ENGINE HOIST
117
Top of left and right engine nacelle, fwd of
tail pipe. Top of black letters facing outboard,
arrows to point aft.
NO STEP
OR HAND HOLD
118
On top sides of fwd and aft rotor blade rain
shield. Paint rain shield lusterless black
(overspray rain shield). Apply stencils 120°
apart, 3 places on each rain shield. This stencil
is located outboard of each rotor blade pitch
link cutout hole.
NO STEP
ACCESS
DRIVE SHAFT
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 25 of 29)
Change 12
9-79
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
119
DELETED
120
Bottom centerline of fuselage. One place on front
lower section of nose area. Two places on nose at
mirror support brackets. 1/2-in. black letters.
MIRROR
SPT PT
121
Bottom of fuselage, right side, at sta 98.0. 1/4-in.
black letters.
XMSN OIL DRAIN
122
Bottom of fuselage at drain lines, black letters.
123
Left side of fuselage, bottom of acft. sta 187, 1/4-in.
black letters.
124
On aft loading ramp emergency escape panel.
1-1/2 in. black band around push button
125
DELETED
126
DELETED
127
DELETE
128
Centered on nose panel, above door catch black
letters.
129
DELETE
BATTERY DRAIN
MAGNETIC PLUG
ACCESS
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 26 of 29)
9-80
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
130
DELETED
131
With ARC-102 antenna installed, 7 places besides
antenna standoffs, black letters.
NO HANDHOLD
132
On lower cockpit windshield, curves around upper
side slip port, black letters.
HIGH TEMP #1 SIDE SLIP DANGER
DO NOT PLUG OR DEFORM HOLES
133
On lower cockpit windshield, curves around lower
side slip port. Aircraft black letters on a transparent
background.
DO NOT PLUG OR DEFORM HOLES
HIGH TEMP #2 SIDE SLIP DANGER
NOTE
Area around static port must be smooth and
clean.
134
Outboard side of fwd pylon work platform when
platform is open. Facing aft, black letters.
MAX WEIGHT
400 LBS
135
On left and right fwd pylon work platform. 5 places,
facing outboard on outboard side, facing aft on fwd
and aft sides. Black letters.
NO STEP
136
On aft work platform one facing fwd, one facing aft
black letters.
MAX WEIGHT
400 LBS
137
On work platform. 6 places, 2 facing inboard, 2
NO STEP
facing outboard, 1 facing fwd, and 1 facing aft black
letters.
138
Engine work platform area. On side of fuselage
when engine work platform is open. Between Sta
502 and 518, WL -2.50 black letters.
MAX WEIGHT — 400 LBS
ON WORK PLATFORM
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 27 of 29)
Change 12
9-81
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
139
DELETED
140
DELETED
141
DELETED
142
DELETED
143
Both sides of fwd fuselage, 1/2-in. black letters,
sta 72, WL -19.
WORDING
WHEN INSTALLING DOOR REFER TO
TM 1-1520-240-23&P FOR PROPER INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
144
Left side aft pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters, sta
472, WL 73.
145
Left side fuselage, below Code 52, paint aircraft
black.
LS ENGINE XMSN
FILTER AND DRAIN ACCESS
NOTE
Date shown on stencil is date aircraft was
painted with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL53039
146
Left side fuselage, 1/2-in. black letters, sta 157.50,
WL -14.
GROUND TEST CONNECTION
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM 1
3000 PSI
USE HYDRAULIC FLUID
MIL-H-83282
147
Both sides fuselage, 1/2-in. black letters, sta 173,
WL -15.
ACCESS
AC-DC POWER EQPT
148
Right side fwd pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 153, WL 72.
ACCESS HYDR
RESERVOIR
149
Both sides fuselage, 1/2-in. black letters, sta 245,
WL -13.
ACCESS
LANDING GEAR
SERVICE
150
Both sides of pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 490.5, WL 81.5.
ACS HYDR
RSVR INSP
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 28 of 29)
9-82
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
151
Both sides of aft pylon inside reservoir cooler
access covers, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
REMOVE BONDING JUMPER
WHEN DOOR IS TO BE REMOVED
INSTALL BONDING JUMPER
WHEN INSTALLING DOOR
152
Both sides aft pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 525.80, WL 84.50.
ACCESS HYDRAULIC
COMPARTMENT
153
Both sides of aft pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 613.70, WL 102.0.
FRAGILE ANTENNA
DO NOT PUSH
154
Right side aft fuselage, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 565.25, WL 15.50.
GROUND TEST CONNECTION
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM 2
UTILITY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, REFER TO TM
1-1520-240-23–1
USE HYDRAULIC FLUID
MIL-H-83282
155
Both engine cowlings, fwd of screened air intake,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters, sta 486, WL 46.
ACCESS
ENGINE QUICK
DISCONNECTS
156
Right side aft pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 472, WL 73.
RS ENGINE XMSN
FILTER AND DRAIN ACCESS
157
Right side aft pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 505, WL 27.
ACCESS HYDR
COOLING FANS
158
Front of aircraft, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters, center,
WL 41.
NO HAND HOLD
159
Bottom of fuselage, both sides, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters, sta 434, 368, 233, BL 53.
FUEL DRAIN - VENT
160
Both sides of fuselage, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
sta 395, 267, 194, BL 53.
FUEL DRAIN
161
Sta 98 on the right side under fuselage area.
HYD SEAL DRAIN
162
Sta 204 bottom of fuselage left side.
TUNNEL DRAIN
163
0.50 in. high capital block letters centered under
the 145S3918–3 doubler, both sides of fuselage
below engine.
ENGINE AFT MOUNT LINK ADJ FIXTURE
164
Sta 110 on left underside of the fuselage area.
INSTR AIR DRAINS
Figure 9-10. Exterior Markings, CH-47 (Sheet 29 of 29)
Change 12
9-83
TM 55-1500-345-23
9-84
Figure 9-11. Station Diagram, CH-47.
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION IV
DELETED
Pages 9-86 through 9-100 and Figures 9-12 through
9-16 have been deleted
Change 12
9-85/(9-86 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION V
DELETED
Pages 9-102 through 9-108 and Figures 9-17 through
9-20 have been deleted
Change 12
9-101/(9-102 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VI
OH-58 ILLUSTRATIONS
1. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Green (entire aircraft,
except as noted).
2. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Black.
3. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Dark Sand (entire aircraft or high
conspicuous paint scheme when authorized, desert operations only).
See Paragraph 5-11.
4. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft White (entire aircraft or
high conspicuous paint scheme when authorized, arctic operations
only). See Paragraph 5-11.
5. MIL-P-21600, Fluorescent Red-Orange. ANA #633 (training
aircraft-high visibility, only where authorized).
Figure 9-21. Tactical Paint Scheme, OH-58
Change 12
9-109
TM 55-1500-345-23
1. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft green (entire aircraft,
except as noted).
2. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black.
3. MIL-P-21600, fluorescent red-orange, ANA #633 (shaded areas only).
Figure 9-22. Non-Tactical Arctic/Desert Paint Scheme, OH-58
9-110
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 1 of 13).
Change 5 9-111
9-112
Figure 9-23. Interior
Change 8
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-23
9-113
TM55-1500-345-23
Change 5
9-114
Change 5
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-23
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 5 of 13)
9-115
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
1
Right side, aft of engine compartment
on aft fairing. 5/8-in. MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039 aircraft black, #37038
letters.
ENGINE OIL
ABOVE 25°F MIL-L-23699
BELOW 25°F MIL-L-7808
2
Right side, above Code 1. 5/8-in. aircraft
black letters.
ENGINE OIL FILLER CAP ACCESS
3
Paint a black ground symbol, shade 37038,
dimensions per MIL-C-83413/9-2.
4
Below forward edge of engine cowl side
panel, right side. 5/8-in. aircraft black
letters.
5
Paint fuel .ller cap same color as the
fuselage. Paint a 1 inch wide ring around
filler aircraft black. 1 inch ring to be 2 inch
from cap center.
6
Right side below right air intake screen.
5/8-in. aircraft black letters, OH-58A, C and
D.
OH-58D(I) see NOTE in wording.
CABIN ROOF DRAIN
TRANSMISSION OIL
LEVEL ACCESS
ABOVE - 25°F MIL-L-23699
BELOW - 25°F MIL-L-7808
NOTE
TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL ACCESS
ABOVE - 40°F DOD-L-85734 BELOW -40°F
MIL-L-7808
7
Locate on both sides fwd fairing, 2 1/2
in. above roof skin and 3 in. fwd of mast
centerline. 6 in. high and 4 in. wide aircraft
black letters with 1 in. spacing between
letters.
(RADIO CALL NUMBER)
8
Inside both passenger doors. 5/8-in.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft
white #37875 letters.
OPEN
9
Inside both passenger doors. 5/8-in. aircraft
white letters.
CLOSED
10
Inside of both crew doors. 5/8-in. aircraft
white letters.
OPEN
11
Inside of both crew doors. 5/8-in. aircraft
white letters.
CLOSED
12
Above static ports, both sides of fuselage.
3/8-in. aircraft black letters.
DO NOT PLUG
OR DEFORM HOLES
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 6 of 13)
9-116
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
13
Both side of helicopters, a 5/8 inch wide band
with a 2-5/8 inch outside diameter, aircraft
black.
14
Below static port, both sides. 3/8-in. aircraft
black letters.
STATIC PORT
15
Both sides of aircraft, fwd of sta 55.16 on lower
side, aircraft black.
JACK POINT
16
Both sides of aircraft, fwd of sta 55.16 near
jack points aircraft black.
MOOR
17
Exterior on fwd and aft doors, above door
handles, both sides of fuselage. 1-3/8 in.
aircraft black letters.
EXIT RELEASE
18
Exterior on fwd and aft doors, below door
handles, both sides of fuselage. 1-3/8 in.
aircraft black letters.
TURN
19
Exterior on fwd and aft doors, below door
handles, both sides of fuselage. 1-3/8 in.
aircraft black letters.
PULL
20
Exterior on fwd and aft doors, below door
handles, both sides of fuselage. Aircraft black
letters.
21
On back of panel, right side of aircraft, above
fuel filler. 5/8-in. orange-yellow letters.
STRUCTURAL PANEL
REQUIRED FOR GROUND
RUN AND FLIGHT
22
On right side of aircraft, below fuel filler cap.
5/8 in. aircraft black letters.
CAP .71.5 U.S. GAL USE MIL-T-5624 GRADE JP-4 or
JP-5. If not available refer to TB 55-9150-200-24 for
alternate fuel
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 7 of 13)
Change 5
9-117
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
23
On right side of aircraft, below fuel filler cap.
1/4-in. aircraft black letters.
24
On right side of aircraft, below and aft of fuel
filler cap. NATO refueling symbol aircraft black.
25
Right side of aircraft aft and below fuel filler,
above external power receptacle. 5/8 in.
aircraft black letters.
BATTERY VENT
26
Right side of aircraft on external power door.
1/2 in. aircraft black letters.
EXTERNAL POWER
27
AFT of external Power Receptacle.
28
Located on interior and exterior of tail boom
inspection plate. 5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
STRUCTURAL PANEL REQUIRED GROUND RUN AND
FLIGHT
29
Both sides of aircraft fwd of tail boom on
intermediate section. 5/8-in. aircraft black
letters.
NO PUSH
30
OH-58A. On both sides of tail boom, centerline
19 in. aft of stabilizer. OH-58C. 15-in. aft of
stabilizer, aircraft black letters and arrows.
31
Both sides of tail cone, 5/8 inch aircraft black
letters.
NO PUSH
32
Locate on inside door post in two places both
sides of aircraft. 5/8in. orange-yellow letters.
EMERGENCY RELEASE
33
Below jettison handles, both sides. Inside on
door posts, 1-in. aircraft white letters.
PULL
FOR OPERATING TEMPERATURES
BELOW 40°F O.A.T., FUEL USED
MUST CONTAIN PFA 55MB ADDITIVE.
CONCENTRATION TO BE .06% - .15%
BY VOLUME
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 8 of 13)
9-118
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
34
Below jettison handles on pilot and copilot
door posts. Aircraft white arrows pointing aft.
35
Paint both jettison handles inside of aircraft
with 1/8 inch wide alternate orange-yellow
and black stripes.
36
Left side of aircraft, aft of air louvers, on aft
fairing. 5/8 in. aircraft black letters.
37
Aft end of aft fairing, both sides. 5/8 in.
aircraft black letters.
WORDING
OIL TANK DRAIN
ACCESS
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL WIRING BEFORE REMOVING TAIL BOOM.
38
0.30 in. diameter dot on one end of tail rotor
yoke, corresponding end of crosshead and
corresponding pitch link assembly. Paint
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 aircraft
red, #31136.
39
0.30 in. diameter dot on one end of tail rotor
yoke, corresponding end of crosshead and
corresponding pitch link assembly. Paint
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 aircraft
white, #37875.
40
Left side of vertical fin, adjacent to tail rotor
gear box. 5/8-in. aircraft black letters, 0.38
in. space between lines, OH-58A, C and D.
SERVICE GEAR BOX
MIL-L-23699 ABOVE - 25°F
MIL-L-7808 BELOW - 25°F
OH-58D(I) see NOTE in wording.
NOTE
ABOVE - 40°F DOD-L-85734
BELOW- 40°F MIL-L-7808
41
Both sides of Tail Boom, most AFT letter
(Y-left side U-right side) to be 4.0 inch
forward of stabilizer. Letters centered on
center line of tail boom. Letters to be 6
in. high aircraft black #37038. Additional
dimensions and spacing in accordance with
Fig. 8-2.
UNITED STATES ARMY
42
Left side of aircraft, upper aft corner of
avionics compartment door. 5/8-in. aircraft
black letters.
BATTERY ACCESS
43
Left side of aircraft, on small door forward
of the RF antenna and above the Avionics
compartment door. 5/8 inch aircraft black
letters.
STEP
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 9 of 13)
Change 12
9-119
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
44
DIRECTIONS
Left side of aircraft, aft of passenger door.
First two lines 1-in. aircraft black letters.
Remainder 1/2-in. letters.
NOTE
WORDING
U.S. ARMY OH-58A
U.S.A. SERIAL NO. (Insert serial no.)
Service this aircraft
with MIL-T-5624 Grade
JP-4 aviation fuel
Transfer data to right side of helicopter above the fuel filler cap when
MWO 55-1520-228-50-53, ATS, has
been applied.
45
Left side of aircraft, lower fuselage, fwd of
antenna. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
IF NOT AVAILABLE REFER TO TB 55-9150-200-24
FOR ALTERNATE FUEL
46
Interior, center on crew and passenger
doors. 1-in. orange-yellow letters.
EMERGENCY EXIT
47
Interior of aircraft on passenger door post,
below upper hinges. Paint aircraft white
arrows pointing fwd.
48
Interior of aircraft on passenger door posts,
below upper hinges. 5/8 inch aircraft white
arrow pointing fwd.
PUSH
49
Interior of aircraft on passenger door posts,
below upper hinges. Tops of letters pointing
forward. 1-3/8-in. orange-yellow letters.
EMERGENCY RELEASE
50
Lower left and right sides of aircraft, below
crew doors. Aircraft black arrows pointing
down at jack points.
51
52
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 10 of 13)
9-120
Change 5
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
53
Outside surface of left and right antennas. To
NO HAND HOLD
be read from fwd side of antennas. 5/8-in.
letters. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039,
olive drab, #34037 letters on black background.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Black
#37038 letters on aircraft green background.
54
Center and lower flat areas of left and right
antennas. To be read from fwd side of aircraft
5/8-in. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039,
olive drab #34037 letters in black background.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, black
#37038 letters on aircraft green background.
NO STEP
55
Center and lower outboard surface of left and
right antennas. To be read from fwd side
of aircraft. 5/8-in. letters. MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039 olive drab #34037 letters
on black background. MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, black #37038 letters on
aircraft green background.
NO PUSH
56
Top side of both landing skids above tow rings.
Aircraft black.
57
Top side of both landing skids above tow rings.
5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
58
Upper and lower surfaces of main rotor grip
and attaching linkage for each grip. 1/2-in.
aircraft red dots.
59
Upper and lower surfaces of main rotor grip
and attaching linkage for each grip. 1/2-in.
aircraft white dots.
TOW
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 11 of 13)
Change 12
9-121
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
60
Leading and trailing edge of stabilizer, both
sides 5/8 in aircraft black letters. OH-58C
(VOR antenna, right and left side, 4 places).
5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
61
Apply walkway coating MIL-W-5044, Type II,
both sides of aircraft between skin splices at
sta 88.27 to 122.0. Paint to match existing
color scheme.
62
Underside of fuselage, on centerline, aft of jack
point 5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
63
Underside of fuselage, right of centerline, left
of jack point. Aircraft black.
64
Underside of fuselage, left of centerline, fwd of
jack point. 5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
65
Underside of fuselage, right side aft of aft cross ENGINE DECK DRAIN
tube. 5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
66
Underside of fuselage, right side aft of aft cross FUEL CELL VENT
tube. 5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
67
Underside of fuselage. Right side of centerline, PUMP SEAL DRAIN
between cross tubes. 5/8-in. aircraft black
letters.
68
Underside of fuselage. Left of centerline,
between cross tubes. 5/8-in. aircraft black
letters.
69
Underside of fuselage. Left of centerline and
jack point Aircraft black.
70
Underside of fuselage, fwd of jack point along
centerline, 5/8-in. aircraft black letters.
71
Non-tactical aircraft only. Paint tail skid orange.
72
Approved unit insignia.
NO PUSH
JACK POINT
ENGINE OIL TANK
DRAIN
DRAIN
MOOR
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 12 of 13)
9-122
Change 5
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
73
Immediately above fuel filler cap. 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
74
Non-tactical aircraft only. Paint last 6 in. of
antenna orange.
75
OH-58C, center outboard of curved section fwd NO PUSH
and aft of left and right antenna. 5/8-in. aircraft
black letters.
76
Aft of fuel shut off lever, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters on aircraft red background.
FUEL OFF
77
Fwd of fuel shut off lever, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters on aircraft red background.
FUEL ON
78
Left side of aircraft, aft of passenger door,
above Code 44, paint aircraft black. NOTE:
Date shown on stencil is date aircraft painted
with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 paint.
79
Paint tail rotor gear box filler cap, orange-yellow.
AVOID CONTACT WITH INTERNAL FUEL LINES
DURING SERVICING
Figure 9-23. Interior and Exterior Markings, OH-58 (Sheet 13 of 13)
Change 12
9-123
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-24. Interior Requirements to be Stenciled on the Back of Pilot’s and Co-Pilot’s Seat Backs,
OH-58A/C (Sheet 1 of 2)
9-124
TM55-1500-345-23
NOTE Use this caution when seat back armor is not installed.
Paint MIL-C-46168, orange-yellow, No. 33538.
Figure 9-24. Interior Requirements to be Stenciled on the Back of Pilot’s
and Co-Pilot’s Seat Backs, OH-58A/C (Sheet 2 of 2)
9-125
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-25. Station Diagram, OH-58
9-126
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VII
DELETED
Figure 9-26 has been deleted.
Change 12
9-127
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VIII
Pages 9-129 through 9-176.1/(9-176.2 blank) and .gures 9-27 through 9-37 have been deleted.
9-128
Change 12
DELETED
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-38 has been deleted.
Change 12
9-177
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION IX
UH-60 ILLUSTRATIONS
1. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Green (entire aircraft, except as noted).
2. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Black.
3. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Dark Sand (entire aircraft or high conspicuous
paint scheme when authorized, desert operations only). See Paragraph 5-11.
4. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft White (entire aircraft or high conspicuous
paint scheme when authorized, arctic operations only). See Paragraph 5-11.
5. MIL-P-21600, Fluorescent Red-Orange. ANA #633 (training aircraft-high visibility,
only where authorized).
6. MIL-C-83231, CLA TY2, Coating, Rain Erosion Resistant.
7. Do not paint.
Figure 9-39. Tactical Paint Scheme, UH-60
9-178
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
1. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Green (entire aircraft, except as
noted).
2. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Aircraft Black.
3. MIL-P-21600, fluorescent red-orange, ANA #633 (shaded areas only).
4. MIL-C-83231, CLA TY2, Cooling, Rain Erosion Resistant.
5. Do not paint
Figure 9-40. Non-Tactical Arctic/Desert Paint Scheme, UH-60
Change 12
9-179
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-41. Army Medical Service (Ambulance), UH-60
9-180
Change 1
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 1 of 20).
Change 5 9-181
Change 5 9-183
TM 55-1500-345-23
TM55-1500-345-23
ESSS PECULIAR STENCILS
Figure 9-42. Exterior and lnterior Markings, UH-60(Sheet 4 of 20)
9-184
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
1
1B-2B-1
Top surface of access panel (nose door
electronics, hinged) 1/2-in. MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black, No. 37038,
letters.
2
Top surface of sliding fairing, M.R.P. controls 3T-4T-2
and accessories, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
3
Above gunners window, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
4
Apply non-skid coating to all walkways,
steps, and platforms, MIL-W-5044, Type II,
paint aircraft black.
HAND HOLD
NOTE
Step area of gunners window
sill,
paint MIL-DTL-64159 or
MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft interior grey,
No. 36231.
5
Place stencil on air-oil strut access panel
and above on fuselage.
3T-3 LH side
4T-4 RH side
NOTE
Do not apply this stencil on aircraft
provisioned for ESSS.
6
Above and fwd of cargo door FS 308, WL
261, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
7
Inlet fairing LH side of A/C, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
HAND HOLD
8
Top surface access panel anti-icing valve,
and above on fuselage, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
3T-5 LH side
4T-6 RH side
9
Engine inlet duct (cross hatching zone). Do
not block any slots or holes. Do not paint
anodized areas. Paint aircraft black.
10
Engine cowl hinged (engine) 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
3T-7 LH side
4T-8 RH side
11
LH top surface of oil cooler access panel,
1/2-in. olive drab No. 34087, letters,
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
3T-25
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 5 of 22)
Change 12
9-185
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
12
LH and RH module station 412, 2 places,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
HAND HOLD
13
Below LH engine exhaust and APU exhaust,
1-in. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039,
olive drab, No. 34087, letters.
DANGER EXHAUST
NOTE
Below LH engine use 1 in. MILDTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black letters. No 37038 letters
on HIRSS equipped aircraft.
14
Both sides of transition fuselage FS 435, WL
246, aircraft black. (See paragraph 7-28 for
dimensions.)
15
LH access panel drive shaft, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
5T-6T-9
16
LH access panel drive shaft, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
5T-6T-10
17
Dot at FS 585, WL 227, approximately,
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039 aircraft
red, No. 31136.
• .75 DIA
18
Dot at FS 625, WL 227, approximately, blue,
No. 35044.
• .75 DIA
19
Pylon D.S. covers NHF-FM No. 1 antenna,
1/2-in. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039,
olive drab, No. 34087, letters.
5T-6T-11
20
Left side of pylon near pylon steps, 3 places,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
21
Near gear box fairing and light support,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
5T-6T-12
22
Stencil for troop commander antenna 1/2-in.
olive drab letters.
5T-6T-13
23
Access panel above upper actuator attach.
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
5T-14
24
Pylon trailing edge, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
5T-6T-15
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 6 of 22)
9-186
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
25
Aft pylon call out for stabilizer degrees, 1/2
in aircraft black letters.
26
Lower pylon, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
27
Lower aft section of tail rotor pylon, FS 680,
WL 218 approximately. The word CAUTION
to be 1-in. aircraft black letters, remainder
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
WORDING
5B-6B-16
GROUND STRAP INSIDE DETACH DURING
REMOVAL
28
Gear box access cover, 1/2-in. aircraft black 5T-6T-17
letters.
29
Near pylon fold, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL HYDRAULICS
AND CONTROLS BEFORE FOLDING
30
Tail cone just fwd of access panel, FS 640,
WL 224, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
STRUCTURAL ACCESS PANEL
MUST BE FITTED BEFORE FLIGHT
31
Structural access panel and above on
fuselage, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
5T-5B-18
32
Tail cone lower fuselage, FS 640, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
TIRE PRESSURE 115-125 PSI
33
Tail cone lower aft section, FS 635, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
34
Tail cone fuselage above and aft of the tie
down ring, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. 2
places.
35
Top of antenna, 1-in. olive drab letters.
NO STEP
36
Top side of VOR/LOC antenna, 1/2-in. olive
drab letters.
5B-5T-19
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 7 of 22)
Change 7
9-187
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
NOTE
Aircraft equipped with CMWS, replace with 1 1/4-in black letters. No .ares.
37
Tail cone fwd section center stencil between
FS 501 and FS 503, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
38
LH side of A/C, FS 488, WL 232, aircraft
black.
39
Locate stencil at FS-485 above tie down ring,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
40
Transition fuselage cover, FS 467, WL 229,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
ACCESS COVER MAG
FLUX VALVE
41
Access cover and above on fuselage, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
3B-3T-20
42
Transition fuselage above access cover, FS
446, WL 223, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
43
Access cover, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
44
Transition fuselage section adjacent to fuel
vent drain, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
45
Access cover pressure/closed circuit
refueling cap, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
46
Below code 45, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
PROVISION FOR CHAFF
DISPENSER
3T-3B-21
3T-3B-23
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 8 of 22)
9-188
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
47
Bottom side of access door, FS 421, BL 5,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
48
Transition fuselage aft of top fuselage step,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
49
Apply non-skid coating to all walkways, step
and platforms. Paint aircraft black.
50
Stencil all step areas as shown, aircraft
black stripe.
51
Adjacent to drain at FS 390, WL 204, LH
and RH side of aircraft. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
52
Bottom side of cargo hook access cover,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
53
LH interior cargo door just below emergency
handle, orange-yellow arrow and 1/2-in.
letters.
54
Exterior LH cargo door, near horizontally
oriented handle (old) or vertically oriented
handle (new), 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
WORDING
FUEL SUMP DRAIN
4B-24
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 9 of 22)
Change 12
9-189
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
55
Interior LH cargo door, near horizontally
oriented handle (new) or vertically oriented
handle (old), 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
56
Paint LH interior cargo door handle aircraft
black.
57
Near LH cargo door handle (old), both
interior and exterior of door, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
58
Stencil 1/8-in. wide aircraft black stripes
and 3/4-in. wide orange-yellow stripes in
LH cargo door window emergency jettison
handle recess.
59
Cabin, FS 290, WL 206, 1/2-in. aircraft black TIRE PRESSURE
letters.
130/140 PSI
60
Gunner’s window sill, FS 290, 1/2-in. aircraft STEP
black letters.
61
LH and RH bottom side of aircraft at STA
260 and BL 28, 1-in. aircraft black letters.
PITOT STATIC
DRAIN
62
Near lower corner of copilot door aft, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
EXT. I.C.S.
63
Fuselage near jack point FS 247, WL 203,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
64
LH side of A/C, 247, WL 232, aircraft black.
HANDLE MUST BE IN ’CLOSED’
POSITION BEFORE CLOSING DOOR
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 10 of 22)
9-190
Change 7
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
65
Inside of cockpit copilot door on vinyl
coated nylon pocket, 1/2-in. aircraft white
letters.
66
Interior of cockpit window sill-aft of
emergency handle, orange-yellow arrow
and 1/2-in. letters.
67
Pilot and copilot door handles exterior,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
68
Fairing at access to shock strut, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
WORDING
CHECK LIST DATA
AND MAP
STOWAGE
3B-30
NOTE
Do not apply this stencil on aircraft
provisioned for ESSS.
69
Oleo inspection window paint as shown.
Paint red No. 31136
White No. 37875
Olive drab No. 34087
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 11 of 22)
Change 5
9-191
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
70
Paint interior of cabin floor from FS 247 to
FS 398 aircraft interior gray. Apply 2 inch
wide non-skid stripes, 2 inches apart from
FS 247 to FS 398. Do not apply non-skid
material in floor attachment holes and
countersinks.
71
RH side of pylon steps, 3 places, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
72
Both sides of aircraft. On left side
start U at FS 528, WL 227. On right
side of aircraft finish with Y at FS 528,
WL 227, aircraft black letters. Place
the United States Army per MWO
1-1520-230-50-CMWS drawing A100744,
when MWO 1-1520-237-50-CMWS has
been applied. If CMWS is installed on both
sides of aircraft. On left side start U at FS
528, WL 243, in line with contour of tail
cone. On right side of aircraft finish with Y
at FS 528, WL 243, in line with contour of
tail cone.
73
Prime cross hatched area using primer
MIL-PRF-23377. Top coat aircraft black.
WORDING
NOTE
Top coat area with aircraft green on
HIRSS equipped aircraft.
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 12 of 22)
9-192
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
74
DELETED.
75
Below RH engine exhaust 1-in. olive drab letters.
76
Apply non-skid coating to all walkways, steps and
platforms. Paint aircraft black.
77
Stencil all step areas as shown aircraft black stripe.
78
Right angle bands at LH and RH emergency exits
and rescue areas, aircraft black.
79
Engine intake duct (cross hatch area). Do not
block any slots or holes. Paint aircraft black. (Do
not paint any anodized areas.)
80
Above and forward of cargo door FS 308, WL 261,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
81
Apply non-skid coating to all walkways, steps and
platforms. Paint aircraft black.
82
Gunners window sill, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
83
Apply non-skid coating to all walkways, steps and
platforms. Paint aircraft interior gray.
WORDING
DANGER EXHAUST
STEP
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 13 of 22)
Change 5
9-193
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
84
Stencil at all step areas as shown aircraft black
stripe
85
Pilots cockpit on upper windshield frame
interior, 1/2-in. aircraft white letters.
86
Pilots window sill aft of emergency handle,
1/2-in. orange-yellow letters.
87
Pilots and copilots door handles 1/2-in. aircraft
white letters and arrows.
88
RH side of A/C FS 247, WL 232, aircraft black.
89
RH side of A/C FS 488, WL 232, aircraft black.
90
Fuselage near jackpoint FS 247, WL 203,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
91
Near lower corner of pilots door and aft, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
92
Below gunners window, at FS 284, WL 216,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
93
Fuselage above access cover, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
WORDING
HAND HOLD
EXT. I.C.S.
4B-26
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 14 of 22)
9-194
Change 5
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
94
Cabin, fuselage at FS 290, WL 206, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
TIRE PRESSURE
130/140 P.S.I.
95
Fairing at access to shock strut, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
4B-31
NOTE
Do not apply this stencil on aircraft provisioned for ESSS. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
96
Exterior RH cargo door near horizontally
oriented handle (old) or vertically oriented
handle (new), 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
97
Interior RH cargo door near horizontally
oriented handle (new) or vertically oriented
handle (old), 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
98
Paint RH interior cargo door handle aircraft
black.
99
Near RH cargo door handle (old), both interior
and exterior of door, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
100
RH interior cargo door, just below emergency
handle, orange-yellow arrow and 1/2-in. letters.
101
Stencil 1/8-in. wide aircraft black stripes and
3/4-in. wide orange-yellow stripes in RH cargo
door window jettison handle.
HANDLE MUST BE IN ’CLOSED’
POSITION BEFORE CLOSING DOOR
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 15 of 22)
Change 5
9-195
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
102
Transition fuselage, aft of top fuselage step,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
103
Fuel filler access panel 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
4T-22
104
Bottom side on access door, FS 421, BL 5,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
FUEL SUMP DRAIN
105
Fwd RH fuselage near external power recptl.,
aircraft black. (See MIL-C-83413/9-2 for
dimensions.)
106
Transition fuselage, FS 460, WL 247, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
107
Above tie ring, FS 485, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
108
Tail cone fuselage, FS 605, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
109
Tail cone fuselage above and aft of tie down,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
110
Tail cone lower aft fuselage, FS 640, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
111
Tail cone fuselage lower aft section, FS 635,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
112
Tail cone just fwd of access panel, FS 640, WL
224, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
STRUCTURAL ACCESS PANEL MUST BE FITTED
BEFORE FLIGHT
113
Access panel and above on fuselage, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
6T-6B-32
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
DISCHARGE INDICATOR
PYLON
STRUT
MTG
TIRE PRESSURE
115/125 PSI
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 16 of 22)
9-196
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
114
Tail cone pylon fold, FS 679, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
115
Near pylon fold, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
WORDING
PYLON FOLD
STRUT MTG
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL HYDRAULICS
AND CONTROLS BEFORE FOLDING
116
Pylon lower edge, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
117
LH and RH sides, FS 732 approximately, WL
260, aircraft black arrows and letters. Stencil
radio call numbers above Danger sign in
6-in. aircraft black number.
118
DELETE
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 17 of 22)
Change 12
9-197
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
119
After pylon call out for stabilizer degrees,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters, 1/2-in. wide and
2 long aircraft black stripes
120
Oleo inspection window paint as shown
red
No. 31136
white
No. 37875
olive drab
No. 34087
WORDING
121
Locate stencil top side of cockpit between
NO STEP
pilot and co-pilot upper window area exterior,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
122
Apply non-skid coating to all walkways,
steps, and platforms. Paint aircraft black.
123
Apply non-skid coating to all walkways,
steps, and platforms. Paint aircraft black.
124
Top side of RH APU access panel, 1/2-in.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, olive
drab No. 34087, letters
4T-28
125
Pylon, at FS 735, BL 0, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
HAND HOLD
126
Top side of stabilizer fwd spar, 1-in. aircraft
black letters.
NO STEP
127
Stencil black stripe to inboard leading edge
of stabilizer WL 244.40 to line up with
position marks on pylon, aircraft black stripe.
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 18 of 22)
9-198
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
128
LH and RH exhaust fairing top side, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
NO STEP
129
Top side of LH APU access panel, 1/2-in.
MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, olive
drab, No. 34087, letters.
3T-27
130
Right side of engine nacelle near screen,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
NO STEP
131
Paint underside of sliding fairing aircraft
black #37038.
132
Inside of cockpit pilot door on vinyl coated
nylon pocket, 1/2-in. aircraft white letters.
CHECK LIST DATA
AND MAP
STOWAGE
133
RH underside of APU access panel, 1-in.
aircraft black letters
NO STEP
134
LH underside of APU access panel, 1-in.
aircraft black letters.
NO STEP
135
Below gunners window, FS 260, WL
220 approximately, black 1/4-in. letters.
**Contractor will insert their code.
**WP1-P2-L3 Date
136
WP
- indicates wash primer used
P
- indicates primer used
L
- indicates lacquer used (if req’d)
C
- indicates coating used (if req’d)
Below code 135.
NOTE
Date shown on stencil is date aircraft
paint with MIL-C-46168 paint.
137
Back of Norton Armored crew seat, P/N
RA30525-1. First line 1/2-in., second line
3/8-in., remaining 1/4-in. orange-yellow
letters.
SEAT TILT RELEASE
SEAT TILT RELEASE
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 19 of 22)
Change 12
9-199
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
138
Dot between holes, FS 624, WL 227
(approximately), aircraft yellow No. 33538.
•
.75 dia
139
Dot between holes, FS 585, WL 227
(approximately), aircraft black.
•
.75 dia
140
Both sides of aircraft on side ends of
instrument glare shield, 1/2-in. aircraft white
letters.
NO HAND HOLD
141
Top of both collective stick cover panels,
1/2-in. aircraft white letters.
NO STEP
142
Aircraft battery cover behind copilot’s seat,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
BATTERY
143
LH and RH side of aircraft on ESSS fixed
provision upper fairing assembly (fwd and aft
sections), 1-in. aircraft black letters.
NO STEP
144
LH and RH side of aircraft on ESSS fixed
provision upper fairing assembly platform,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
HAND
HOLD
145
Access panel both RH and LH side of aircraft 3T-3B-37
and above on fuselage air-oil strut, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
NOTE
4T-4B-38
Apply only on ESSS provisioned aircraft.
146
Both RH and LH side of aircraft on fairing at
access to shock strut, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters.
3B-39
4B-40
NOTE
Apply only on ESSS provisioned aircraft.
147
3B-41
Both RH and LH side of aircraft on ESSS
fixed provisions lower fairing assembly (fwd)
4B-43
and another directly above on fuselage (2
stencils per side), 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
148
3B-42
Both RH and LH side of aircraft on ESSS
fixed provisions lower fairing assembly (aft)
4B-44
and another directly above on fuselage (2
stencils per side), 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
149
Both RH and LH side of aircraft on ESSS fixed 3T-33
provisions upper fairing assembly platform
4T-34
on inboard edge, 1/2-in. MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039, olive drab, No. 34087,
letters.
9-200
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
150
Top of antenna, 1 in. olive drab letters.
NO STEP
151
Top side of VOR/LOC antenna, 1/2 in. olive
drab letters.
6B-6T-19
152
Stencil 2 olive drab, No. 34087, continuous
stripes around each main rotor blade. Each
stripe is 1 in. wide and the center of the
stripes will be 140.86 inches from the center
of the blade cuff pin holes.
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 20 of 22)
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 21 of 22)
Change 5
9-200.1
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
153
Apply non skid coating on LH and RH oil
cooler access panels.
154
Apply non skid coating to LH and RH access
panels.
155
Apply 10 inch wide non skid coating to
controls/accessories sliding cover.
156
L/H slide of A/C, FS 256 WL 245,
approximately, top two lines 1-inch black,
#37038, Letters, remainder are 1/2-inch
black, #37038 Letters
157
Inside pressure/closed circuit refueling
access cover 1/3-in aircraft black letters.
158
Locate stencil at FS 249, WL 219 and FS
257, LBL 29. 1/2 in. aircraft black letters
WORDING
U.S. Army (insert model) U.S.A. serial No. (Insert
Serial No.) Service this aircraft with MIL-T-83133
Grade JP8 Aviation fuel. If not available, refer to TB
55-9150-200-24 for alternate fuel.
Battery Vent
Figure 9-42. Exterior and Interior Markings, UH-60 (Sheet 22 of 22)
9-200.2
Change 12
TM55-1500-345-23
9-201/(9-202 blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CHAPTER 10
FIXED WING AIRCRAFT ILLUSTRATIONS
SECTION I
a. The basic external color of the aircraft in this
chapter will be insignia white paint. C–12 = Paint #
G8022 MFG U.S. paint Federal Standard 595, in accordance with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039. RC-12
= paint # 8228-9316 (MFG Sherwin Williams.)
b. All markings, unless otherwise speci.cally
noted in the following figures, will be aircraft black,
shade No. 37038 of Federal Standard 595, in accordance with MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039.
GENERAL
d. The following closure areas of C-12 & RC-12
aircraft shall be painted the shades indicated, in accordance with Federal Standard 595 and MIL-DTL-64159
or MIL-DTL-53039.
(1) C-12 and RC-12 landing gear, wheels, inside of landing gear doors and wheel wells insignia white
paint # G8022 US Paint.
e.
Deleted
c. Unless otherwise specified herein, all lettering
will be standard 50% letters, 0.50 in. high.
Change 12
10-1
10-2
Change 9
TM 55-1500-345-23
C12 AND RC-12 ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 (Sheet 1 of 22)
SECTION II
26
36
PAINT VERTICAL LUG RED
DETAIL B
INSIGNIA WHITE ONLY
PAINT # G-8022
1
10
59
67 890
14
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
2.0
3
4
1.5
10
20.0
5
6
INSIGNIA WHITE ONLY
PAINT # G-8022
GLOSS BLACK PAINT NO. G2017
Change 9
12
LEFT SIDE VIEW
10-3
Figure 10-1.
Exterior Markings, C-12
(Sheet2 of 22)
TM 55-1500-345-23
15
8
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
3
28
32
32
28
30
3
3
15
30
3
3
4
3
15
34
29
29
34
31
30
34
30
54
31
54
40
29
41
34
29
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
28
27
C-12
Figure 10-1.
TOP VIEW
Exterior Markings, C-12
33
(Sheet 3 of 22)
10-4 Change 9
TM 55-1500-345-23
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
10-5
Change 9
TM 55-1500-345-23
2.1
16
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
(Sheet 4 of 22)
JACK PAD
PAINT BOTTOM OF NACELLE BLACK
PER BEECHCRAFT KING AIR
COMMUNIQUE ( NO. 65 JUNE 1993 )
48
47
49
58
50
5
25
54
50
51
16
1.8
TYP
Figure 10-1.
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
BOTTOM VIEW
.7
TYP
JACK PAD
16
Exterior Markings, C-12
16
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
C-12
22
52
PLANE OF PROPELLER
24
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
24
1.5 (BLACK)
WHITE
52
33
38
22.00
VIEW
PER BEECHCRAFT KING AIR
NIQUE
COMMU
200 / 300 / B300
No. 65 JUNE 93
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
3.00
23
VIEW
11
11
35
3
35
Figure 10-1.
Exterior Markings, C-12
Change 9
17
(Sheet 5 of 22)
25
10-6
TM 55-1500-345-23
3.00
2.0
2.0
PUSH IN
AFTER RELEASE
PUSH IN
AFTER RELEASE
EMERGENCY
EXIT
PUSH
PULL HANDLE
TO RELEASE
19
19
18
307 00
18
6
3
15
19
19
42
46
5
RC-12
13
37
PAINT # 828-9316
Change 9
12
PAINT # 828-9316
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
Figure 10-1.
Exterior Markings, RC-12
10-7
(Sheet6 of 22)
WING TIP PODS OMMITTED THIS VIEW FOR CLARITY
21
TM 55-1500-345-23
39
26
36
PAINT VERTICAL LUG RED
2
7
10
59
8
14
30 700
53
WL. 179.00
REF
50.5±1.0
WL. 120.00
REF
US ARMY
C
2.0
3
4
C
1.2
5
10
6
1
RC-12
13
60
20.0
12
LEFT SIDE VIEW
Figure 10-1.
Exterior Markings, RC-1
(Sheet 7 of 22)
W ING TIP PODS OMITTED THIS VIEW FOR CLARITY
Change 9
15
10-8
TM 55-1500-345-23
3
44
43
3
PAINT # 828-9316
28
31
45
31
28
30
3
3
15
30
57
3
29
3
4
3
15
34
29
34
32
30
34
32
40
54
30
54
29
41
PAINT # 828-9316
56
34
29
28
27
RC-12
33
55
Figure 10-1.
10-9
TOP VIEW
Exterior Markings, C-12
(Sheet 8 of 22)
TM 55-1500-345-23
Change 9
PAINT # 828-9316
50
1.8
TYP
50
5
16
16
54
25
51
16
Change 9
58
(Sheet 9 of 22)
49
Exterior Markings, RC-12
47
Figure 10-1.
BOTTOM VIEW
JACK PAD
48
10-10
.7
TYP
JACK PAD
TM 55-1500-345-23
2.1
16
PAINT # 828-9316
PAINT # 828-9316
22
52
RC-12
24
PLANE OF PROPELLER
24
RC-12 ONLY
ANTI-STATIC
52
38
VIEW
3.00
PAINT # 828-9316
23
VIEW
11
11
35
35
3
3.00
Change 9
10-11
FRONT VIEW
Figure 10-1.
Exterior Markings, RC-12
25
(Sheet 10 of 22)
TM 55-1500-345-23
17
TM 55-1500-345-23
LOWER WING ATTACH FITTINGS
C
L REAR SPAR, REF.
WARNING
LUBRICATED BOLTS
SEE MAINT. MANUAL
FOR TORQUE VALUES
TO INSTALL DECAL ON WING ATTACH
FITTINGS, CUT DECAL ON DOTTED LINES.
SAND WING ATTACH FITTINGS LIGHTLY
IN REQUIRED AREAS ( DO NOT REMOVE
PRIMER). WASH AREA WITH MEK, APPLY
DECAL AND SEAL THE EDGES.
C
L REAR SPAR, REF.
LUBRICATED BOLTS
UPPER WING ATTACH FITTINGS
WARNING
C
L FRONT SPAR, REF.
SEE MAINT. MANUAL
FOR TORQUE VALUES
DETAIL A:
LUBRICATED BOLTS
SEE MAINT. MANUAL
FOR TORQUE VALUES
WING ATTACH FITTINGS, LEFT HAND SHOWN, RIGHT
HAND OPPOSITE, FITTING COVERS OMITTED.
Figure 10-1.
10-12
WARNING
Change 9
Exterior Markings, C-12
(Sheet 11 of 22)
TM 55-1500-345-23
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
INSIGNIA WHITE ONLY
PAINT # G-8022
67 890
WL. 179.00
REF
50.5±1.0
1.5
1.5 (BLACK)
3
INSIGNIA WHITE ONLY
PAINT # G-8022
DETAIL B
STA
278.50
REF
1.5
TYP
LEVEL
POINT
31.0
LEVEL
POINT
WL
90.00
REF
Figure 10-1.
DETAIL C
Exterior Markings, C-12
1.0
(Sheet 12 of 22)
Change 9 10-13
TM 55-1500-345-23
INSIGNIA WHITE
PAINT # G-8022
GLOSS BLACK
US PAINT # G-2017
1.5
INSIGNIA WHITE ONLY
PAINT # G-8022
DETAIL E
Figure 10-1.
10-14
Change 9
Exterior Markings, C-12
(Sheet 13 of 22)
RC-12
TM 55-1500-345-23
F.S.
309.25
REF
1.0
LEVEL
POINT
2.00
W.L.
120.00
REF
31.00
LEVEL
POINT
DETAIL F
figure 10-1.
F
Exterior Markings, RC-12
(Sheet 14 of 22)
Change 9 10-15
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
1
Left side of fuselage on entrance air step
door, adjacent to handle. 1/2-in. MIL-C-46168,
aircraft black letters .
2
Both sides of vertical stabilizer. C-12, see
Detail B. RC-12 8-in. aircraft black numbers.
3
C-12 both sides of ventral fin, center top trailing edge of each
aileron and flap, 1/2-in. black letters. Also center on nose cone
using 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. RC-12D, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters and MIL-C-46168 aircraft white letters on nose cone. (Use
gloss black paint part number G2017 (MFG U.S. Paint) C-12
only) (Use flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint)
RC-12 only) Also
RC-12 Forward data link and Aft data link data
link pods.
WORDING
PUSH BUTTON
AND TURN HANDLE
TO OPEN
(Radio call numbers)
NO PUSH
Aircraft data plate located on left side of aft fuselage.
4
5
C-12 both sides of ventral fin and bottom center of each
outboard wing panel, 1/2-in. black letters. RC-12, 1/2-in. TIE DOWN
aircraft black letters. (Use gloss black paint part number
G2017 (MFG U.S. Paint) C-12 only) (Use flat black
paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12 only)
6
C-12 both sides of fuselage below static port. Do not
paint static port. 1/2-in, black letters. RC-12 1/4-in.
aircraft black letters. (Use gloss black paint part number
G2017 (MFG U.S. Paint) C-12 only) (Use flat black paint
part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12 only)
7
RC-12 both sides of fuselage, aft of cabin door.
Aircraft black letters. (Using flat black paint part
number G2002 (MFG US Paint) RC-12 only)
8
Left side of fuselage aft of cabin door, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
9
Paint windows using 828-9316 paint (MFG
Sherwin-Williams), exterior aircraft gray. On RC-12
aircraft with cabin windows (D, H).
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 / RC-12
10-16
Change 9
STATIC AIR KEEP CLEAN
U.S. ARMY
FIRE EXTINGUISHER INSIDE
(Sheet 15-22)
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
10
DIRECTIONS
C-12 left side fuselage, fwd of cabin door.
Upper marking 1/2-in. aircraft black letters,
lower marking 1/2-in. black letters. See
Detail C. RC-12, aft of cabin door, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters. See Detail F. (Use
WORDING
LEVEL POINT
gloss black paint part number G2017 (MFG
U.S. Paint) C-12 only) (Use flat black paint part
number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12 only)
11
12
13
14
15
16
Left and right top of horizontal stabilizer
1/2-in. and 1/4-in. aircraft black letters.
ACCESS ASN FLUX DETECTOR
CAUTION: USE NON-MAGNECTIC
SCREWS IN COMPASS
Both engine nacelles, inside each
NORMAL PRESSURE 92-96 PSI*
outboard main landing gear door, 1/2-in.
73-77 PSI**
aircraft black letters. *C-12, **RC-12,
60-64 PSI***
*** C-12 High Flotation.
Aft, outboard sides of each engine
CAUTION: DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL WIRING
nacelle, above each main landing gear
AND PLUMBING BEFORE REMOVING WING
door, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
Left side of fuselage under cockpit
U.S. ARMY
window. Enter appropriate model" and
U.S.A. SERIAL NO. 00000
aircraft serial number. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters. RC-12 only.
C-12, inboard and outboard fwd sides of
both engine cowlings, four places on each
cowling, black. C-12 and RC-12, black
vinyl decal.
C-12, aft of nose wheel well and left of
fuselage centerline. Also two on bottom of
wing stubs inboard of each engine nacelle.
1/2-in. black letters. C-12 and RC-12,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use gloss black
JACK PAD
paint part number G2017 (MFG U.S. Paint)
C-12 only) (Use flat black paint part number
G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12 only)
17
Locate on inboard side of left nose gear
door, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
NORMAL PRESSURE 55 60 PSI
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 / RC-12 (Sheet 16 of 22)
Change 9
10-17
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
DIRECTIONS
C-12, locate on right side of fuselage
above fwd cabin window, 1/2-in. black
letters. RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters. (C-12 silk screen with ink, gloss
black) (RC-12 flat black paint part number
G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint))
C-12, right side of fuselage above fwd
cabin window, upper marking, 1/2-in black
letters, lower marking, 1/4-in. black
letters. RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters
(C-12 silk screen with ink, gloss black)
(RC-12 flat black paint part number
G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint))
Paint wheels, landing gear strut and
wheel wells white, On C-12 and RC-12.
Locate on outboard side of nose wheel
strut, 1/2-in. Vinyl decal. aircraft black
letters.
C-12, locate inside inboard cowling doors,
both engines, 1/2-in. black letters. RC-12,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (C-12 silk
screen with ink, gloss black) (RC-12 flat
black paint part number G2002 (MFG
U.S.Paint))
C-12, locate a 3-in. black band around
fuselage centered on the travel of
propeller tip. RC-12, aircraft black band
(C-12 gloss black paint part number
G2017 (MFG U. S. Paint), (RC-12 flat
black paint part number G2002 (MFG
U.S.Paint))
C-12, both sides of fwd fuselage, fwd and
aft of Code 23, (Use gloss black paint part
number G2017 (MFG U.S. Paint) C-12 only)
(Use flat black paint part number G2002
(MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12 only)
WORDING
EMERGENCY
EXIT
PUSH
PULL HANDLE
TO RELEASE
PUSH IN
AFTER RELEASE
J
A
C
K
LUBE OIL
MIL-L-23699
3.0"
DANGER
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 / RC-12 (Sheet 17 of 22)
10-18
Change 9
DANGER
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
25
26
27
28
29
30
DIRECTIONS
C-12, bottom of both wings outboard of nacelles, near
wing center lines, 1/2-in. and 1/4-in. black letters.
RC-12, 1/2-in. and 1/4-in. aircraft black letters
C-12 black gloss silkscreen ink. Paint number G2017
black gloss (MFG U.S.Paint). RC-12 aircraft black paint
number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint).
Locate on front side of nose landing gear strut, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters.
C-12, top right wing, inboard of nacelle, on access cover,
1/2-in. black letters.
RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
C-12 black gloss silkscreen ink. Paint number G2017
black gloss (MFG U.S.Paint). RC-12 aircraft black paint
number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint).
C-12, locate near fuselage on top of both wings, 3 places
on right wing, 4 places on left wing. 1/2-in black letters.
RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
C-12 black gloss silkscreen ink. Paint number G2017
black gloss (MFG U.S.Paint). RC-12 aircraft black paint
number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint).
WORDING
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN WASHING
WING TO NOT REMOVE ANTICORROSIVE GREASE FROM
WING ATTACH BOLT
MIC
JACK
BATTERY
ACCESS
NO
STEP
Paint a black ground symbol, dimensions per
MIL-C-83413/9-2.
C-12 black gloss silkscreen ink. Paint number G2017
black gloss (MFG U.S.Paint). RC-12 aircraft black paint
number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint).
RC-12 Only, Paint wing tip pod
assembly, As required using anti-static epoxy paint, Flat
black, with a transmissivity range of 0.50 to 75 meg
ohms resistance per square specification 528-104 with
910-119 w/catalyst.
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 / RC-12 (Sheet 18 of 22)
Change 9
10-19
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
31
32
DIRECTIONS
C-12, top of both wings inboard of nacelles, near wing
centerline, 1/2-in. black letters above 1/4-in. black
letters. RC-12, aircraft black letters. (C-12 silk screen
gloss black, paint number G2017 (MFG U.S.Paint))
(RC-12 flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG
U.S.Paint))
Must be readable from leading edge of
wing.
WORDING
AUX TANK
PILOTS OPERATING MANUAL FOR
ALTERNATES.
CAPACITY 79.5 US GALLONS
(USABLE 79.0 US GALLONS)
WITH WINGS LEVEL
MAIN TANK
C-12, top of both wings outboard of nacelles, 1/2-in.
black letters above 1/4-in. black letters. RC-12, aircraft
USE AVIATION KEROSENE OR SEE
black letters. (C-12 silk screen gloss black, paint
PILOTS OPERATING MANUAL FOR
number G2017 (MFG U.S.Paint)) (RC-12 flat black
ALTERNATES.
paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint)). Must be
CAPACITY
195 US GALLONS
readable from leading edge of wing.
(USABLE 193 US GALLONS)
33
Antiglare areas shall be painted aircraft black.
34
C-12, top of both wings beside inboard and outboard
fuel caps, 1/2-in. black letters. RC-12, aircraft black
letters. (C-12 silk screen gloss black, paint number
G2017 (MFG U.S.Paint)) (RC-12 flat black paint part
number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint))
35
Paint propeller tips white. See chapter 7
36
Locate on front nose gear strut. Aircraft black
37
C-12, locate on right side of fuselage, below and aft of
cargo window, 1/2-in. black letters. RC-12, 1/2-in.
aircraft black letters. (C-12 silk screen with ink, paint
number G2017 (MFG U.S.Paint)gloss black) (RC-12
flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint))
FUEL
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 / RC-12 (Sheet 19 of 22)
10-20 Change 9
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
DIRECTIONS
C-12, locate on inboard side of RH nacelle and outboard
of LH nacelle, 1/2-in. black letters.
(C-12 silk screen, paint number G2017 (MFG
U.S.Paint)gloss black) (RC-12 flat black
paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint))
Locate on outboard side of RH nacelle, 1/2-in. aircraft
black letters.
C-12, top right wing, just outboard of nacelle, "ACCESS"
1/2-in. black letters, remainder, 1/4-in. black letters.
RC-12, 1/2-in. and 1/4-in. black letters.(C-12 silk screen,
paint number G2017 (MFG U.S.Paint)gloss black)
(RC-12 flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG
U.S.Paint))
C-12, top right wing, just outboard of nacelle, "ACCESS"
1/2-in. black letters, remainder, 1/4-in. black letters.
RC-12, 1/2-in. and 1/4-in. black letters.(C-12 silk screen,
paint number G2017 (MFG U.S.Paint)gloss black) (RC-12
flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint))
C-12, right side of fuselage below and aft of cargo
window, 1/2-in. black letters. RC-12, 1/2-in. and 1/4-in.
aircraft black letters(C-12 silk screen, paint number
G2017 (MFG U.S.Paint)gloss black) (RC-12 flat black
paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint))
RC-12 only, top of right wing, centered aft of engine
nacelle chaff dispenser, 1/2-in. letters. "warning", 1/4-in.
reminder, flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG
U.S.Paint)
RC-12 only, top of right wing, centered aft of engine
nacelle chaff dispenser, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
WORDING
OIL DRAIN
EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE
28 VDC
ACCESS
DC EXTERNAL POWER
RELAY DC EXTERNAL
POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER
ACCESS
BATTERY/EMERGENCY BUS
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH CONTROL
BLEED AIR BYPASS VALVE
OXYGEN
WARNING
SAFETY PIN MUST BE IN WHEN
MODULE IS REMOVED OR
INSTALLED.
NO FLARES
RC-12 only, top of left wing behind safety pin receptacle.
1/2-in. upper and 1/4-in. lower, flat black paint part
number G2002 (MFG U.S.Paint)
CHAFF/FLARE
SAFETY SWITCH
INSERT SAFTY PIN BEFORE
MODULES ARE REMOVED OR
INSTALLED. CAUTION:
REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT.
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 / RC-12 (Sheet 20 of 22)
Change 9
10-21
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
46
RC-12 only, right side of fuselage centered 1.5 in. above test
connector receptacle centerline. 1/2-in. aircraft black letters.
(Use flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint)
47
C-12, bottom of both nacelles, 1/2-in. black letters. C-12 and
RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use silk screen gloss
black paint number G2017(MFG U.S.Paint) C-12 only) (Use
flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12
only)
STANDBY
PUMP
DRAIN
C-12, bottom of both engine nacelles, 1/2-in. black letters.
RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use silk screen gloss
black paint number G2017(MFG U.S.Paint) C-12 only) (Use
flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12
only)
FILTER
DRAIN
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
C-12, bottom of both nacelles, 1/2-in. black letters. RC-12,
1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use silk screen gloss black
paint number G2017(MFG U.S.Paint) C-12 only) (Use flat
black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12
only)
C-12, bottom of both wings, inboard of nacelles near
fuselage, and outboard of nacelles, 1/2-in. black letters. 4
required. RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use silk screen
gloss black paint number G2017(MFG U.S.Paint) C-12 only)
(Use flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint)
RC-12 only)
C-12, bottom aft ends of both engine nacelles, 1/2-in. black
letters. RC-12, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use silk screen
gloss black paint number G2017(MFG U.S.Paint) C-12 only)
(Use flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint)
RC-12 only)
Do not paint these areas.
Left side of aircraft aft of cabin door, 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters. (Use silk screen gloss black paint number
G2017(MFG U.S.Paint) C-12 only) (Use flat black paint part
number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12 only)
Locate under access plates on top and bottom of both wings
near inboard and outboard wing mating surfaces.
"WARNING", 1/2-in. aircraft black letters, remainder, 1/4-in.
aircraft black letters. See Detail A. (Use silk screen gloss
black paint number G2017(MFG U.S.Paint) C-12 only) (Use
flat black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint) RC-12
only)
Top left side of nose, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use flat
black paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint)
RC-12 only. Left wing just outboard of engine nacelle, near
leading edge, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use flat black
paint part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint)
M-130
TEST CONNECTOR
STRAINER
DRAIN
FUEL DRAIN
GRAVITY
LINE DRAIN
PRESSURIZED
WARNING
LUBRICATED BOLTS
SEE MAINT. MANUAL
FOR TORQUE VALUES
SIGHT
GAUGE
ACCESS AC EXTERNAL POWER RELAY
AC EXTERNAL POWER
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 / RC-12 (Sheet 21 of 22)
10-22
Change 9
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DESCRIPTION
WORDING
57
RC-12 only. Top of left wing just outboard of engine
nacelle near wing centerline. 1/2-in. aircraft black
letters. (Use .at black part number G2002 (MFG
U.S. Paint ) RC-12 only).
ACCESS
INVERTER
115 VAC 3Ø
58
Inboard bottom of left wing near fuselage and
leading edge, 1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use
gloss black paint number G2017 (MFG U.S. Paint)
C-12 only) (Use flat black part number G2002 (MFG
U.S. Paint ) RC-12 only)
ACCESS
BLEED AIR BYPASS VALVE
AVIONIC INVERTER
& CONTROL RELAY
59
DELETED
60
RC-12, Bottom, outboard side of left engine nacelle.
1/2-in. aircraft black letters. (Use gloss black paint
number G2017 (MFG U.S. Paint) (Use flat black
part number G2002 (MFG U.S. Paint ) RC-12 only)
EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE
115 VDC 3Ø, 400 Hz AC
Figure 10-1. Exterior Markings, C-12 (Sheet 22 of 22)
Change 9
10-23
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-2. Station Diagram, C-12
DELETED pages 10-25 through 10-30
10-24
Change 12
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION III
DELETED
DELETED pages 10-33 thru 10-54
Change 12
10-31/(10-32 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION IV
DELETED
DELETED pages 10-57 thru 10-64
Change 12
10-55/(10-56 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION V
DELETED
All data on page 10-66 has been deleted.
Change 12
10-65/(10-66 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VI
DELETED
DELETED pages 10-69 thru 10-76
Change 12
10-67/(10-68 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VII
DELETED
DELETED pages 10-79 thru 10-88
Change 12
10-77/(10-78 Blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
SECTION VIII
U-21 AND RU-21 ILLUSTRATIONS
1. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft gray (entire aircraft, except
where noted).
2. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft Black.
Figure 10-18. Tactical Paint Scheme, RU-21 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 12
10-89
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-18. Tactical Paint Scheme, RU-21 (Sheet 2 of 2)
10-90
TM 55-1500-345-23
1. MIL-C-83286, gloss olive drab, #14087.
2. MIL-C-83286, gloss white, #17875.
3. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black.
Figure 10-19. Non-Tactical Paint Scheme, U-21 (Sheet 1 of 4)
Change 12
10-91
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-19. Non-Tactical Paint Scheme, U-21 (Sheet 2 of 4)
10-92
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-19. Non-Tactical Paint Scheme. U-21 (Sheet 3 of 4)
10-93
TM55-1500--345-23
Figure 10-19, Non-Tactical Paint Scheme, U-21 (Sheet 4 of 4)
10-94
TM 55-1500-345-23
1. MIL-C-83286, gloss white, #17875.
2. MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, aircraft black.
3. MIL-P-21600, .ourescent red-orange, ANA #633 (only where
authorized.)
Figure 10-20. Non-Tactical, High Visibility Paint Scheme, U-21 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 12
10-95
TM 55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-20. Non-Tactical, High Visibility Paint Scheme, U-21 (Sheet 2 of 2)
10-96
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-21. Interior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 1 of 5)
10-97
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-21. interior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 2 0f 5)
10-98
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
1
Locate placard top edge of door forward of
STA 228.75
2
Locate placard over center of door shaft.
Background yellow. Cover placard with 0.12
in. acrylic plastic sheet 3.70 in. by 9.0 in.,
bevel edges of plastic sheet 45° (See detail
A)
3
Locate placard bottom edge of door forward
of STA 228.75
4
Locate placards forward of cargo door. Top
placard is aligned with bottom of window
frame, bottom placard is directly below top
placard an above floor (approx.)
5
Paint inside of right fuselage skin and face
of upholstery panel at the same location as
the exterior markings, STA 254.75 WL 120,0
to WL 146.0. Marking will be yellow, shade
No. 13538
Figure 10-21.
Interior Markings, U-21 and RU-21
WORDING
(Sheet 3 of 5)
10-99
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
6
Locate decal in center of emergency exit
markings (code No. 5) and 11 in. from top
edge of markings. Black letters on yellow
background.
7
Locate EMERGENCY DOOR RELEASE
placard aft of escape hatch and below handle, right side fusleage.
8
9
10
11
‘Center decal above escape latch and on
STA 228.75.
EMERGENCY EXIT
Right side of aircraft on static air line drain
door.
Right side of aircraft cockpit aft of STA
122.0 and 0.75 in. forward of inertia reel
harness lock on inboard surface of window
escutcheon.
CO-PILOT SEAT MUST BE IN FORWARD
POSITION DURING TAKE . OFF& LANDING
Locate placard on fuselage floor, centered
on STA 130.0 and left edge of placard 6.2 in.
left of aircraft centerline. Placard is metal
etched on anodized red background.
Figure 10-21.
10-100
WORDING
Interior Markings, U-21 and RU-21
(Sheet 4 of 5)
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
DIRECTIONS
12
I
13
Locate decal on aft side of spar cover and 11
in. to right of aircraft centerline
WORDING
MAXIMUM LOAD PER
TIEDOWN: 200 LB.
Center decals in tiedown fittings as shown,
top of letters foward. Lettering is black.
F.S. 145.0
F.S. 146.0
F.S. 163.8
F.S. 165.4
F.S. 179.8
F.S. 181.5
F.S. 199.7
F.S. 200.6
F.S. 218.7
F.S. 219.6
F.S. 239.2
F.S. 239.9
F.S. 240.2
14
Locate marking near each oxygen outlet.
Warning l/4-in. letters, text l/8-in. gloss red
letters on yellow background.
15
Passenger oxygen outlet
16
Pilot and copilot’s
Diluter demand regulator
Figure 10-21.
WARNING
NO SMOKING WHILE
OXYGEN IN USE
Interior Markings, U-21 and RU-21
(Sheet 5 of 5)
10-101
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-22.
10-102
Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 1 of 13)
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 2 of 13)
10-103
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-22 Exterior Markings. U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 3 of 13)
10-104
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings. U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 4 of 13)
10-105
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 5 of 13)
10-106
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
NOTE
Only MIL-C-46168 paints will be used on
RU-21 aircraft unless otherwise specified.
Left side of fuselage on entrance air step
door, adjacent to handle, 1/2-in. black letters
and arrow. Lines are 1/8 in. wide, arrowhead
3/8 in. wide.
2
RADIO CALL NUMBERS
Left and right side of vertical stabilizer, 6-in.
lusterless black numerals, STA 401.00,
WL 188.00.
3
Both sides of ventral fin, center top trailing
edge of each aileron, also center on nose
cone using black letters.
4
Aircraft data plate located on left side of aircraft under horizontal stabilizer.
5
Left and right side of aft fuselage and bottom center of each outboard wing panel.
Black 1/2-in. letters. Top of letters up or
towards spar.
6
Left and right side of fuselage below static
port, 1/2-in. black letters. Do not paint static
port.
NO
PUSH
I
TIE DOWN
STATIC AIR
KEEP CLEAN
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 6 of 13)
10-107
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
7
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
U-21, both sides of fuselage, 20 in. dia. basic
blue circle, center vertically. Bottom of top
star frame in line with green/white seam.
(National Star Insignia)
RU-21, left and right side of fuselage, 6-in.
black letters. Center between aft edge of
cabin door and line even with front of
horizontal stabilizer. Top of letters on
WL 120.0.
U.S. ARMY
Left side of fuselage aft of entrance door
frame, 1/2-in. black letters.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
INSIDE
Left side of fuselage aft of entrance door
frame, 1/2-in. black letters.
BATTERY LOCATION
TOP OF RIGHT HAND
WING STUB
Left side of fuselage aft of entrance door
frame, 1/2-in. black letters.
LEVEL
POINT
U-21, top of left wing, bottom of right wing A 22 in. dia. basic blue circle centered 80 in.
inboard of wingtip. Point of star facing fwd.
(National Star Insignia)
Left and right side of fuselage on each outboard main gear door, 1/2-in. black letters.
NORMAL PRESSURE 46-50 P.S.I.
13
Left and right side of fuselage under wing
and on outboard side of each nacelle above
main landing gear doors. Black 1/2-in.
letters.
CAUTION: DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL WIRING
AND PLUMBING BEFORE REMOVING WING
14
Left side of fuselage under cockpit window,
1 in. black letters and numerals. Enter complete model and aircraft serial number.
U.S. ARMY *
U.S.A. SERIAL NO. *
(*Indent correct model and
serial numbers)
8
15
Left and right side of forward engine cowling. Black 1/8 in. lines and arrow, 1/2-in.
black letters, 4 places.
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 7 of 13)
10-108
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
16
Aft end of nose wheel well and left of
fuselage centerline. Two jack pads located
on bottom of wing stub near rear spar and
inboard of each engine nacelle. Black 1/2-in.
letters.
JACK PAD
17
Locate on inboard side of left nose gear
door, 1/2-in. black letters.
NORMAL TIRE PRESSURE 50-55 P.S.I.
VERY SOFT FIELD TAKEOFF 30-32 P.S.I.
U-21, paint yellow emergency rescue markings on right side of fuselage at STA 254.75
WL 120.0.
RU-21, paint lusterless black.
19
Right side of fuselage, centered within
emergency rescue markings (code No. 18),
1-in. letters, same color shade as markings.
20
U-21, paint landing gear struts and wheels
olive drab.
CUT HERE FOR
EMERGENCY EXIT
RU-21, paint lusterless white.
21
Locate on outboard side of nose wheel strut.
Black 1/2-in. letters, arrow 1 in. long, 1/4 in.
shaft and 1/2 in. head.
22
Locate on inside of left and right cowling
doors.
U-21, yellow 1/2-in. letters.
LUBE OIL
MIIL-L-23699 ABOVE -25° F
MIL-L-7808 BELOW - 25°F
RU-21, lusterless black 1/2-in. letters.
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 8 of 13)
10-109
TM55 -1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
23
DIRECTIONS
U-21 , paint 3 in. red band, from underside of
black stripe on left side of fuselage to black
stripe on opposite side inline with propeller
plane. Locate PROPELLER placard over red
band on both sides of fuselage.
23
RU-21, Paint 3 in. lusterless black stripe,
centered on propeller plane, Top of stripe
starts at upper corner of fuselage, 4 in. down
from skin seam to bottom of nose gear
doors. Forward edge of black stripe is approximately 18 1/2 in. aft of nose cone.
24
U-21, left and right side of forward fuselage,
fore and aft of RED/BLACK stripe (code No.
23). Word DANGER is 13 1/2 in. down from
top of stripe and is 1 1/4 in. away from edge
of stripe. Black 2-in. letters, arrow points
toward stripe and is 4 in. long with 1 in. shaft
and 1 1/2 in. arrowhead.
24
RU-21, left and right side of forward
fuselage, fore and aft of BLACK stripe (code
No. 23). Word DANGER is 13 1/2 in. down
from top of stripe and is 1 1/4 in. away from
edge of stripe. Black 2-in. letters, arrow
points toward stripe and is 4 in. long with 1
in. shaft and 1 1/2 in. arrow head.
25
WORDING
U-21, outboard of left and right engine
nacelles on access doors. Black 1/2-in. letters, top of letters toward spar.
DANGER
PU-545
INVERTER
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 9 of 13)
10-110
TM 55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
25
WORDING
RU-21, outboard of left and right engine
needles on access doors. Black lettering,
letters towards antenna
PU-545
INVERTER
Top of nose section forward of’ antiglare
paint. Left and right center wing stub forward
of spar and inboard of nacelles. Black 1/2 in.
letters with arrow. Top of letters towards spar.
Top right inboard wing stub On access cover.
Black 1/2 in. Ietters, top of letters toward spar.
BATTERY
ACCESS
Top of left and right wing center stub, inboard
of needles. Right wing 3 places, left wing 4
places, 1/2 in. bIack letters.
NO
STEP
Paint a black ground symbol, shade 37038,
dimensions per MIL-C-83413/9-2.
3 0
DELETE
Figure 10-22. Exterior Makings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 10 of 13)
Change 5
10-111
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
WORDING
DIRECTIONS
31
Left and right wings, inboard of fuel filler
caps (code No. 30). Black 1/2-in. letters, top
of letters towards spar, 2 places.
128 Gallons Capacity
MIL-T-5624(JP-4)
AVIATION KEROSENE
CAUTION: NACELLE TANKS
MUST BE FULL BEFORE
FILLING THIS TANK
32
Top of each engine nacelle, outboard of fuel
filler cap. Black 1/2-in. letters, top of letters
facing inboard, 2 places.
57 Gallons Capacity
MIL-T-5624(JP-4)
AVIATION KEROSENE
33
Antiglare areas. Paint inboard upper 1/4 of
the left and right nacelles and nose area forward of cockpit windshield to STA 53.0.
Paint black.
34
U-21, top of right outboard wing panel on access door. Yellow 1/2-in. letters top of letters
towards spar.
RU-21, lusterless black 1/2-in. letters,
35
U-21, propellers shall not be stripped but will
be lightly oversprayed with lusterless black.
Do not cover index mark on rear of blade, or
serial numbers and data on front of blades.
Yellow tip 4-in. wide on front of blade only.
For high visibility paint scheme for propellers and spinners, see Chapter 6.
35
RU-21, propellers shall not be stripped but
will be lightly oversprayed with aircraft
black. Do not cover index mark on rear of
blade, or serial numbers and data on front of
blades. Yellow tip 4 in. wide on front of blade
only.
36
Front of nose gear strut. Portect during
paint stripping. TOW, 1/2-in. letters, remainder 1/4-in. with arrows and stripes.
Paint black.
Figure 10-22.
ACCESS
CN 405/ASN COMPENSATOR
T-611/ASN INDUCTION COMPASS
CAUTION: USE NON-MAGNETIC
SCREWS IN COMPASS
Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21
(Sheet 11 of 13)
* U . S . GOVERNT PRINTING OFFICE: 1994-555-028/00236
10-112
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
I
I
DIRECTIONS
WORDING
37
U-21, bottom of left and right center wing
stub on access door. Yellow 1/2-in. letters,
top of letters towards spar.
REMOVE FOR
ACCESS TO
ARC-51
38
Bottom of left and right outboard engine
nacelles. Black 1/2-in. letters.
OIL COOLER
DRAIN
39
U-21, bottom of left and right outboard wing
panels. Locate 1 in. forward of power receptacle door. Yellow 1/2-in. letters, top of letters towards spar
(Left Wing)
A.C.
EXTERNAL
POWER
(Right Wing)
EXTERNAL
POWER
24 VOLTS
RU-21, lusterless black 1/2-in. letters.
40
Bottom of right wing, outboard of engine
nacelle and forward of spar. Black 1/2-in. letters, top of letters towards spar.
SEE
OPERATOR’S
MANUAL
FOR
INVERTER
OPERATION
Left side of fuselage under model
designator (code No. 14) Black 1/4-in. letters.
**WP1-P2-L3 Date
WP- indicates wash primer used
P - indicates primer used
L - indicates lacquer used (if req’d)
indicates coating used (if req’d)
** Contractor will insert their code.
c .
Stencil below Code 41.
NOTE: Date shown on stencil is date aircraft painted with MI L-C-46168 paint.
U-21, top and bottom of right hand inboard
wing aft of battery vent tubes. Paint black.
43
44
45
I
U-21, leading edge of right inboard wing.
Paint black.
RU-21, center 1 in. over oxygen access
cover. Paint black.
Battery Vent
I
PITOT Drain
OXYGEN
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 12 of 13)
10-113
TM55-1500-345-23
CODE
NO.
46
DIRECTIONS
RU-21, top right wing, centered aft of engine
nacelle, chaff dispensor (see detail A). Paint
black.
47
RU-21, top right wing, centered aft of engine
nacelle, chaff dispensor (see detail A). Paint
black.
48
RU-21, top of right wing behind safety pin
receptacle (see detail B). Paint black.
WORDING
WARNING
SAFETY PIN MUST BE IN WHEN
MODULE IS REMOVED OR INSTALLED
NO FLARES
CHAFF/FLARE
SAFETY SWITCH
INSERT SAFETY PIN BEFORE
MODULES ARE REMOVED OR
INSTALLED. CAUTION: REMOVE
PIN BEFORE FLIGHT.
49
RU-21, top right wing behind safety pin
receptacle (see detail B). Paint black.
M-130
TEST CONNECTOR
Figure 10-22. Exterior Markings, U-21 and RU-21 (Sheet 13 of 13)
10-114
TM55-1500-345-23
Figure 10-23
10-115/(10-116 blank)
TM 55-1500-345-23
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
R. L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-31, AVUM and AVIM Requirements
for All Fixed and Rotary Wing Aircraft
*U.S.GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1993 342-421/62103
These are the instructions for sending an electronic 2028
The following format must be used if submitting an electronic 2028. The subject line must be
exactly the same and all fields must be included; however only the following fields are
mandatory: 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, and 27.
From:
To:
“Whomever” <[email protected]>
[email protected]
Subject: DA Form 2028
1. From: Joe Smith
2. Unit: home
3. Address: 4300 Park
4. City: Hometown
5. St: MO
6. Zip: 77777
7. Date Sent: 19--OCT--93
8. Pub no: 55--2840--229--23
9. Pub Title: TM
10. Publication Date: 04--JUL--85
11. Change Number: 7
12. Submitter Rank: MSG
13. Submitter FName: Joe
14. Submitter MName: T
15. Submitter LName: Smith
16. Submitter Phone: 123--123--1234
17. Problem: 1
18. Page: 2
19. Paragraph: 3
20. Line: 4
21. NSN: 5
22. Reference: 6
23. Figure: 7
24. Table: 8
25. Item: 9
26. Total: 123
27. Text:
This is the text for the problem below line 27.
Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/
Supply Manuals (SC/SM)
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND
BLANK FORMS
DATE
8/30/02
For use of this form, see AR 25--30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form)(Include ZIP Code)
FROM: (Activity and location)(Include ZIP Code)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
MSG, Jane Q. Doe
ATTN: AMSAM--MMC--MA--NP
1234 Any Street
Redstone Arsenal, AL. 35898
Nowhere Town, AL 34565
PART 1 -- ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER
DATE
TM 9--1005--433--24
16 Sep 2002
ITEM
PAGE
PARA--
LINE
FIGURE
TABLE
NO.
NO.
GRAPH
NO. *
NO.
NO.
1
WP0005
2
TITLE Organizational, Direct Support, And General
Support Maintenance Manual for Machine Gun, .50
Caliber M3P and M3P Machine Gun Electrical Test Set
Used On Avenger Air Defense Weapon System
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
Test or Corrective Action column should identify a different WP number.
PG 3
* Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
MSG, Jane Q. Doe, SFC
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/
AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
788--1234
REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED.
USAPA V3.01
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication)
FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
MSG, Jane Q. Doe
ATTN: AMSAM--MMC--MA--NP
1234 Any Street
Redstone Arsenal, AL. 35898
Nowhere Town, AL 34565
DATE
8/30/02
PART II -- REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS
PUBLICATION NUMBER
DATE
TITLE
PAGE
COLM
LINE
NATIONAL STOCK
REFERENCE
FIGURE
ITEM
NO.
NO.
NO.
NUMBER
NO.
NO.
NO.
TOTAL NO.
OF MAJOR
ITEMS
SUPPORTED
RECOMMENDED ACTION
PART III -- REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and
blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
MSG, Jane Q. Doe, SFC
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON,
PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
788--1234
USAPA V3.01
Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/
Supply Manuals (SC/SM)
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND
BLANK FORMS
DATE
For use of this form, see AR 25--30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form)(Include ZIP Code)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
ATTN: AMSAM-MMC-MA-NP
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
FROM: (Activity and location)(Include ZIP Code)
PART 1 -- ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER
DATE
TITLE
TM 55-1500-345-23
12 June1986
Painting and Marking of Army Aircraft
ITEM
PAGE
PARA--
LINE
FIGURE
TABLE
NO.
NO.
GRAPH
NO. *
NO.
NO.
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
* Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/
AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED.
USAPA V3.01
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
ATTN: AMSAM-MMC-MA-NP
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)
DATE
PART II -- REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS
PUBLICATION NUMBER
DATE
TM 55-1500-345-23
TITLE
Painting and Marking of Army Aircraft
12 June 1986
PAGE
COLM
LINE
NATIONAL STOCK
REFERENCE
FIGURE
ITEM
NO.
NO.
NO.
NUMBER
NO.
NO.
NO.
TOTAL NO.
OF MAJOR
ITEMS
SUPPORTED
RECOMMENDED ACTION
PART III -- REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and
blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON,
PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
USAPA V3.01
Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/
Supply Manuals (SC/SM)
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND
BLANK FORMS
DATE
For use of this form, see AR 25--30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form)(Include ZIP Code)
Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command
ATTN: AMSAM-MMC-MA-NP
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
FROM: (Activity and location)(Include ZIP Code)
PART 1 -- ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER
DATE
TITLE
TM 55-1500-345-23
12 June1986
Painting and Marking of Army Aircraft
ITEM
PAGE
PARA--
LINE
FIGURE
TABLE
NO.
NO.
GRAPH
NO. *
NO.
NO.
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
* Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/
AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION
SIGNATURE
REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED.
USAPA V3.01
The Metric System and Equivalents
Linear Measure
Liquid Measure
1 centiliter = 10 milliters = .34 fl. ounce
1 deciliter = 10 centiliters = 3.38 fl. ounces
1 liter = 10 deciliters = 33.81 fl. o unces
1 dekaliter = 10 liters = 2.64 gallons
1 hectoliter = 10 dekaliters = 26.42 gallons
1 kiloliter = 10 hectoliters = 264.18 gallons
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters = .39 inch
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters = 3.94 inches
1 meter = 10 decimeters = 39.37 inches
1 dekameter = 10 meters = 32.8 feet
1 hectometer = 10 dekameters = 328.08 feet
1 kilometer = 10 hectometers = 3,280.8 feet
Square Measure
Weights
1 sq. centimeter = 100 sq. millimeters = .155 sq. inch
1 sq. decimeter = 100 sq. centimeters = 15.5 sq. inches
1 sq. meter (centare) = 100 sq. decimeters = 10.76 sq. feet
1 sq. dekameter (are) = 100 sq. meters = 1,076.4 sq. feet
1 sq. hectometer (hectare) = 100 sq. dekameters = 2.47 acres
1 sq. kilometer = 100 sq. hectometers = .386 sq. mile
1 centigram = 10 milligrams = .15 grain
1 decigram = 10 centigrams = 1.54 grains
1 gram = 10 decigram = .035 ounce
1 decagram = 10 grams = .35 ounce
1 hectogram = 10 decagrams = 3.52 ounces
1 kilogram = 10 hectograms = 2.2 pounds
1 quintal = 100 kilograms = 220.46 pounds
1 metric ton = 10 quintals = 1.1 short tons
Cubic Measure
1 cu. centimeter = 1000 cu. millimeters = .06 cu. inch
1 cu. decimeter = 1000 cu. centimeters = 61.02 cu. inches
1 cu. meter = 1000 cu. decimeters = 35.31 cu. feet
Approximate Conversion Factors
To change
To
inches
feet
yards
miles
square inches
square feet
square yards
square miles
acres
cubic feet
cubic yards
fluid ounces
pints
quarts
gallons
ounces
pounds
short tons
pound-feet
pound-inches
centimeters
meters
meters
kilometers
square centimeters
square meters
square meters
square kilometers
square hectometers
cubic meters
cubic meters
milliliters
liters
liters
liters
grams
kilograms
metric tons
Newton-meters
Newton-meters
Multiply by
To change
2.540
.305
.914
1.609
6.451
.093
.836
2.590
.405
.028
.765
29,573
.473
.946
3.785
28.349
.454
.907
1.356
.11296
ounce-inches
centimeters
meters
meters
kilometers
square centimeters
square meters
square meters
square kilometers
square hectometers
cubic meters
cubic meters
milliliters
liters
liters
liters
grams
kilograms
metric tons
To
Newton-meters
inches
feet
yards
miles
square inches
square feet
square yards
square miles
acres
cubic feet
cubic yards
fluid ounces
pints
quarts
gallons
ounces
pounds
short tons
Temperature (Exact)
°F
Fahrenheit
temperature
5/9 (after
subtracting 32)
Celsius
temperature
°C
Multiply by
.007062
.394
3.280
1.094
.621
.155
10.764
1.196
.386
2.471
35.315
1.308
.034
2.113
1.057
.264
.035
2.205
1.102
PIN: 060072-000
This fine document...
Was brought to you by me:
Liberated Manuals -- free army and government manuals
Why do I do it? I am tired of sleazy CD-ROM sellers, who take publicly
available information, slap “watermarks” and other junk on it, and sell it.
Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that
sell free information, come up first in search engines. They did not create it...
They did not even scan it... Why should they get your money? Why are not
letting you give those free manuals to your friends?
I am setting this document FREE. This document was made by the US
Government and is NOT protected by Copyright. Feel free to share,
republish, sell and so on.
I am not asking you for donations, fees or handouts. If you can, please
provide a link to liberatedmanuals.com, so that free manuals come up first in
search engines:
<A HREF=http://www.liberatedmanuals.com/>Free Military and Government Manuals</A>
– Sincerely
Igor Chudov
http://igor.chudov.com/
– Chicago Machinery Movers
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement